Standard B CE Specification V1.0 Nov 2012 reviewed Sept 2013

Standard B CE Specification V1.0 Nov 2012 reviewed Sept 2013
UWE Facilities
Standard B&CE Specification
Issue 01
Review Date: September 2013
Change Control
Version Number 1
Date of Issue 2
Author(s) 3
Brief Description of Change(s) 4
1.0
1st November 2012
S Brennan
Issue Date
1
Add in a version number of the document. This will help you track your changes. Your first draft version of the Report would
be Version 1.0. Any minor changes after your first draft could be labeled 1.1., 1.2 and so on. When a significant number of
changes are being made or when your Report has reached a milestone (for example, it is ready for internal review), you could
then change your Version to 2.0 or 3.0. Remember to change the footer at the same time.
2
Indicate the date you are working on the Report. This, along with your version number, will help you keep track of the most
up-to-date version.
3
More than one person will contribute to the report and it is important to indicate who worked on the Report, on what date and
in what specific areas. If you have questions later, you can then easily refer back to the specific author.
4
Identify what section was changed and provide a brief description of why the changes took place.
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Preface:
 This document contains Workmanship and Materials clauses and is based on the
National Building Specification (NBS) format.
 All items will conform to current / latest BS requirement or publicly available standard as
valid on the base date of the individual contract, regardless of the BS reference stated in
this document.
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Standard Specification
Index:
C20
Demolition
C40
Cleaning masonry
C41
Repairing/renovating/conserving masonry
C51
Repairs, Renovating, Conserving Timber
D20
Excavating and filling
F10
Brick/block walling
F20
Natural stone rubble walling
G20
Carpentry/timber framing/first fixing
H60
Plain roof tiling
H62
Natural slating
H71
Lead sheet coverings/flashings
J21
Mastic asphalt roofing/insulation/finishes
J30
Liquid applied tanking/damp proofing
J31
Liquid applied waterproof roof coatings
K10
Plasterboard dry lining/partitions cubicles
K11
Rigid sheet flooring/sheathing/sarking/linings/casings
K30
Panel partitions
K32
Panel cubicles
K40
Demountable suspended ceilings
L10
Windows/rooflights/screens/louvers
L20
Doors/shutters/hatches
L40
General Glazing
M10
Cement
M20
Plastered/rendered/roughcast coatings
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M31
Fibrous Plaster
M40
Stone/concrete/quarry/ceramic tiling/mosaics
M50
Rubber/plastics/cork/lino/carpet tiling/sheeting
M60
Painting/clear finishing
N10
General fixtures/furnishings/equipment
N13
Sanitary appliances and fittings
N14
General internal signage systems
N15
Internal fire and safety signage systems
N17
Portable fire fighting systems
N91
External signage and interpretation
P10
Sundry insulation/proofing work
P20
Unframed isolated trims/skirtings/sundry items
P21
Door/window ironmongery
P31
Holes/chases/covers/supports for services
Q24
Interlocking brick/block roads/pavings
R12
Drainage below ground
Z10
Purpose made joinery
Z12
Preservative/fire retardant treatment
Z20
Fixings and adhesives
Z21
Mortars
Z22
Sealants
Z31
Powder coatings
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Not Used:
E10
Mixing/casting/curing in situ concrete
E20
Formwork for in situ concrete
F21
Natural stone/ashlar walling/dressings
F22
Cast stone ashlar walling/dressings
F30
Accessories/sundry items for brick/block/stone walling
F31
Precast concrete sills/lintels/copings/features
G12
Isolated structural metal members
H74
Zinc strip/sheet coverings/flashings
J40
Flexible sheet tanking/damp proofing
J41
Built-up felt roof coverings
K41
Raised access floors
L30
Stairs/ladders/walkways/handrails/balustrades
M51
Edge fixed carpeting
M52
Decorative papers/fabrics
M61
Intumescent coatings for fire protection of steelwork
N25
Permanent access and safety equipment
P11
Foamed/fibre/bead cavity wall insulation
P12
Fire stopping systems
Q25
Slab/brick/sett/cobble paving’s
Q40
Fencing
R10
Rainwater pipework/gutters
R11
Above ground foul drainage systems
Z11
Purpose made metalwork
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C20
DEMOLITION
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
110
DESK STUDY / SURVEY
• Scope: Before starting demolition work, examine available information, carry out
a survey of the structures, site and surrounding area.
• Report and method statements: Submit, describing:
- Form, condition and details of the structures.
- Form, location and removal methods of flammable, toxic or hazardous
materials.
- Visible or suspected hazards: Record general positions.
- Type and location of adjoining or surrounding premises which may be
adversely affected by noise, vibration, dust or removal of structure.
- Identification and location of services above and below ground, including
those required for the Contractor's own use. Arrangements for disconnection
and removal of services.
- Type and location of features of historical, archaeological or geological
importance.
- Sequence and method of demolition including details of specific preweakening.
• Arrangements for protection of personnel and the public including exclusion of
unauthorized persons.
• Arrangements for control of site transport and traffic.
- Special requirements: refer to project scoping document.
140
BENCH MARKS
• Unrecorded bench marks and other survey information: Give notice when found.
- Do not remove or destroy.
150
FEATURES TO BE RETAINED
• General: Keep in place and protect the following: Refer to Project Drawings.
SERVICES AFFECTED BY DEMOLITION
210
SERVICES REGULATIONS
• Work carried out to or which affects new or existing services: Carry out in
accordance with the Byelaws or Regulations of the relevant Statutory Authority.
220
LOCATION OF SERVICES
• Services affected by the Works: Locate and mark positions.
• Mains services: Arrange with the appropriate authorities for location and
marking of positions.
• Standard: In accordance with National Joint Utilities Group (NJUG) 'Guidelines
on the positioning and colour coding of utilities' apparatus'.
230
DISCONNECTION - ARRANGED BY CONTRACTOR
• General: Arrange with UWE Estates Department (CA) for disconnection of
services by the universities Measured Term Contractor.
• Remove fittings and equipment prior to starting demolition.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C20
DEMOLITION
240
DISCONNECTION OF DRAINS
• General: Locate disconnect and seal disused drain connections.
• Sealing: Within the site and permanent.
250
LIVE FOUL AND SURFACE WATER DRAINS
General: Protect drains and fittings still in use. Keep free of debris and ensure
normal flow during deconstruction/ demolition work.
•
Damage: Make good damage arising from deconstruction/ demolition work.
Leave clean and in working order at completion of deconstruction/ demolition
work.
260
SERVICE BYPASS CONNECTIONS
• General: Provide as necessary to maintain continuity of services to occupied
areas of the same and adjoining properties.
• Minimum notice to University Estates: 72 hours if shutdown is necessary during
changeover.
270
SERVICES TO BE RETAINED
• Damage: Give notice and notify service authority or owner of damage arising
from the execution of the works.
• Repairs: Complete as directed, and to the satisfaction of the service authority or
owner.
DECONSTRUCTION / DEMOLITION WORK
310
WORKMANSHIP
• Standard: Demolish structures in accordance with BS 6187.
• Operatives:
- Appropriately skilled and experienced for the type of work.
- Holding or in training to obtain relevant CITB Certificates of Competence.
- Site staff responsible for supervision and control of work: Experienced in the
assessment of risks involved and methods of deconstruction / demolition to
be used.
320
GAS OR VAPOUR RISKS
• Precautions: Prevent fire or explosion caused by gas or vapour.
330
DUST CONTROL
General: Reduce airborne dust by periodically spraying deconstruction/ demolition
works with an appropriate wetting agent. Keep public roadways and footpaths clear
of mud and debris.
•
340
Lead dust: Submit method statement for control, containment and clean-up
regimes.
SITE HAZARDS
• Precautions: Protect site operatives and general public from hazards associated
with vibration, dangerous fumes and dust arising during the course of the
Works.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C20
DEMOLITION
350
ADJOINING PROPERTY
Temporary support and protection: Provide. Maintain and alter, as necessary, as
work proceeds. Do not leave unnecessary or unstable projections.
•
•
•
360
Defects: Report immediately on discovery.
Damage: Minimize. Repair promptly to ensure safety, stability, weather
protection and security.
Support to foundations: Do not disturb.
STRUCTURES TO BE RETAINED
Extent: Project Specific .
•
•
370
Parts which are to be kept in place: Protect.
Interface between retained structures and deconstruction/ demolition: Cut away
and strip out with care to minimize making good.
PARTLY DEMOLISHED STRUCTURES
General: Leave in a stable condition, with adequate temporary support at each
stage to prevent risk of uncontrolled collapse. Make secure outside working hours.
•
•
380
Temporary works: Prevent overloading due to debris.
Access: Prevent access by unauthorized persons.
DANGEROUS OPENINGS
General: Provide guarding at all times, including outside of working hours.
Illuminate during hours of darkness.
•
Access: Prevent access by unauthorized persons.
385
ASBESTOS – MANAGEMENT
• All in accordance with UWE’s procedures as laid out in UWE’s Asbestos
Management Plan and Critical Summary;
http://www.uwe.ac.uk/facilities/estates/information/informationindex.shtml
390
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
• General: These are known to be present in the structures to be demolished in
the following locations: Refer to project Asbestos Survey.
• Removal: By a UWE Framework Contractor licensed by the Health and Safety
Executive and prior to other works starting in these locations.
391
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS - UNKNOWN OCCURRENCES
• Discovery: Give notice immediately of suspected asbestos-containing materials
when discovered during deconstruction/ demolition work. Avoid disturbing such
materials.
• Removal: Submit statutory risk assessments and details of proposed methods
for safe removal. Removal by a UWE Framework Contractor licensed by the
Health and Safety Executive.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C20
DEMOLITION
410
UNFORESEEN HAZARDS
Discovery: Give notice immediately when hazards such as unrecorded voids,
services, tanks, chemicals, are discovered during deconstruction/ demolition.
•
410
Removal: Submit details of proposed methods for filling, removal, etc
OTHER KNOWN HAZARDS
Hazards: Radioactive, Chemical, Biological, Silica Dust, HV Labs.
General: These are known to be in science / engineering / education facilities
Locations: Fume cupboards, ducting, sink wastes, drainage runs & traps etc.
420
OPEN BASEMENTS, ETC
• Temporary support: Leave adequate buttress walls or provide temporary
support to basement retaining walls up to ground level.
• Safety: Make remaining sections of retaining and buttress walls safe and
secure.
• Water movement: Make holes in basement floors to allow water drainage or
penetration (depending on water table). Provide a hole for every 10 m², not less
than 600 mm in diameter.
430
SITE CONDITION AT COMPLETION
• Debris: Clear away and leave the site tidy on completion.
• Special Requirements: Project Specific
441
SITE LEVELS AT COMPLETION
• Levels: Grade the site to follow the levels of adjacent areas.
MATERIALS ARISING
510
CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY
Components and materials arising from the deconstruction/ demolition work:
Property of the Contractor except where otherwise provided.
•
520
Action: Remove from site as work proceeds where not to be reused or recycled
for site use.
RECYCLED MATERIALS
Materials arising from deconstruction/ demolition work: Can be recycled or reused
elsewhere in the project, subject to compliance with the appropriate specification
and in accordance with any site waste management plan.
•
•
Issue: 1.0
Evidence of compliance: Submit full details and supporting documentation.
Verification: Allow adequate time in programme for verification of compliance
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C40
CLEANING MASONRY / CONCRETE
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
GENERAL / PREPARATION
110A
SCOPE OF WORK
• The scope of work for each project is defined elsewhere. Also the applicable
clauses specifying the chosen cleaning method is defined elsewhere. CA
approval must be obtained to mandatory Methods Statements submitted by the
Contractor.
120
RELATED REPAIR/ REMEDIAL WORKS
• Work to be carried out before cleaning work: As specified within project scoping
document.
140
REDUNDANT FITTINGS Remove the following: As specified by CA elsewhere
1425
TEMPORARY REMOVAL OF FITTINGS
• Carefully remove as specified by CA elsewhere Make arrangements for the safe
storage of the items for later refixing. Retain sound fastenings.
• The following are to be removed by others: As specified by CA elsewhere
150
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Ensure that all electrical supplies serving external equipment have been
disconnected and that, unless specified otherwise, fittings and associated cables
have been removed.
160
PROTECTION
• Surfaces not designated for cleaning: Prevent damage, including marking and
staining.
• Openings: Prevent ingress of water, cleaning agents, and detritus.
• Vents and grilles: Seek instructions before sealing up.
• Temporary mechanical fastenings:
• In masonry: Locate in joints.
• In other surfaces: Seek instructions.
• Additional protection: as specified within scoping document.
175
CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF WASH WATER AND DETRITUS /
CONTAMINATION
• Disposal: Safely. Obtain approvals from relevant Authority.
• Control of wash water: Collect and divert to prevent ingress and damage to
building fabric and adjacent areas.
• Above and below ground drainage systems: Keep free from detritus /
contamination and maintain normal operation.
190
CLEANING GENERALLY
• Operatives: Appropriately trained and experienced for each type of cleaning
work.
• Evidence of training: Submit on request.
• Control of cleaning: Confine cleaning processes and materials to designated
areas. Prevent wind drift.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C40
CLEANING MASONRY / CONCRETE
•
•
•
Removal of detritus: Regularly. Dispose of safely.
Monitoring: Frequently check results of cleaning compared to approved trial
samples. If results established by trials are not achieved, seek instructions.
Modifications to cleaning methods and materials: Seek instructions.
215
RECORD OF CLEANING WORKS
• Written report: Maintain for cleaning methods and procedures used for each
type of surface and deposit.
- Purpose: For building maintenance and to inform future cleaning operations.
• Report content: Relevant attributes of cleaning methods used including:
- Equipment and settings.
- Dwell times.
- Number of applications.
- Ambient temperatures.
• Other documentation: Disposal of Waste.
• Submission: At completion of cleaning works.
230
TRIAL SAMPLES
• Trial sample reference: As specified by CA.
- Location/ Size: As specified by CA.
- Type of soiling/ surface: Atmospheric or biological growths or graffiti as
specified by CA.
- Cleaning methods: As specified by contractor and approved by CA.
• Records: Maintain written records for each trial area, including cleaning
methods and conditions, to enable repetition of results elsewhere.
240
STANDARDS
• Works to comply with BS8221:2000 Parts 1 and 2 'Code of practice for cleaning
and surface repair of buildings'
260
MONITORING
• Regularly monitor effects of each cleaning procedure against the degree of
cleaning established by approved trial sample(s). Seek instructions immediately,
wherever:
- Disruption to the surface occurs.
- Anticipated level of surface cleaning is not being achieved.
- Discolouration or stains are revealed by cleaning.
• Do not modify cleaning procedures or materials without approval from the CA.
PRODUCTS / EQUIPMENT
312
SURFACE BIOCIDES
• Types: Registered by the Health and Safety Executive (HSE) and listed on the
HSE website under non-agricultural pesticides.
• Compatibility with surface: Free from staining or other harmful effects.
322
ABRASIVE CLEANING EQUIPMENT
• Manufacturer/ Supplier: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
- Product reference: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
• Nozzle types: Subject to site trials.
• Abrasives: Subject to site trials.
• Other requirements: None.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C40
CLEANING MASONRY / CONCRETE
332
WATER SPRAY (MOUNTED NOZZLES)
• Equipment:
- Spray/ Nozzle types: Subject to site trials.
- Nozzles: Position and direction adjustable, relative to surfaces and profiles.
- Controls: Contractor's choice.
• Other requirements: None.
342
PRESSURIZED WATER CLEANING EQUIPMENT
• Manufacturer: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
- Product reference: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
• Nozzles: Subject to site trials.
352
STEAM CLEANING EQUIPMENT
• Manufacturer: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
- Product reference: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
362
CHEMICALS FOR GRAFITTI REMOVAL
• Manufacturer: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
- Product reference: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
372
PLAIN POULTICES FOR SALTS REMOVAL
• Poulticing medium manufacturer: To be specified by contractor and approved by
CA.
- Product reference: To be specified by contractor and approved by CA.
• Softening agent: Deionised water.
APPLICATION
412
REMOVAL OF LOOSELY ADHERED DEPOSITS
• Timing: Before commencement of other cleaning methods.
• Surfaces: Prevent damage, including abrasion.
422
BIOCIDE APPLICATION
• Preparation: Remove loose growths.
• Surfaces: Prevent damage, including abrasion.
• Biocide treatment: Appropriate solutions to kill growths and inhibit further
growths.
- Dead growths: Remove.
432
TOOLING
• Requirements: As trial sample and subject to strict CA approval.
442
ABRASIVE BLOCKS
• Types of abrasive blocks: Suitable grades of carborundum or gritstone.
• Application: Lubricate with water. Remove detritus.
452
ABRASIVES CLEANING
• Surfaces: Minimize abrasion.
- Ingrained deposits: Seek instructions.
• Equipment settings (including nozzle type and distance from surface): Adjust
regularly to achieve optimum cleaning performance for each surface.
• Detritus: Remove with clean water.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C40
CLEANING MASONRY / CONCRETE
462
WATER SPRAYED CLEANING (MOUNTED NOZZLES)
• Surfaces: Minimize water run-off. Prevent damage, including abrasion.
• Adjustment of washing cycle and nozzle positions: Regularly to achieve
optimum cleaning performance.
472
PRESSURISED WATER CLEANING
• Surfaces: Prevent damage, including abrasion.
• Equipment settings (including nozzle type and distance from surface): Adjust
regularly to achieve optimum cleaning performance for each surface.
482
STEAM CLEANING
• Surfaces: Prevent damage, including abrasion.
• Equipment settings (including nozzle type and distance from surface): Adjust
regularly to achieve optimum cleaning performance for each surface.
495
TESTING pH VALUES FOR CHEMICAL CLEANING
• pH indicator: To distinguish pH values between 1-14.
• Testing before cleaning:
- Clean rinsing water, wetted surfaces and joints: Test for pH. Record as
'control' values.
• Testing after water rinsing and neutralization:
- Wetted surfaces and joints: Record pH values.
- Acceptance criteria: Seek instructions.
500
CHEMICAL CLEANING
• Surfaces: Prevent damage, including discolouration, bleaching and
efflorescence.
• Product variables (including concentrations, dwell times and number of
applications): Adjust for each surface to achieve optimum cleaning performance.
• Application: To wetted surfaces.
- Drying out: Prevent unless recommended otherwise by cleaning product
manufacturer.
• Removal of chemicals and neutralization: As recommended by product
manufacturer, including rinsing with clean water.
- Additional treatment: Where water rinsing is insufficient to neutralize
surface, apply compatible neutralizing agent.
- Surfaces and joints: Minimise absorption of chemicals. Prevent damage,
including abrasion.
- Prohibited at Frenchay Campus unless approved by UWE Environmental
Manager.
515
PLAIN POULTICING
• Surfaces: Prevent damage, including abrasion.
• Application: To wetted surfaces. Maintain contact with surfaces as poultice dries
out. Reinforce poultice as necessary.
- Drying: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out.
• Spent poultice material: Do not reuse.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C41
REPAIRING/ RENOVATING/ CONSERVING MASONRY

To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
110
SCOPE OF WORK
• Schedule: Project specific.
• Records of masonry to be repaired: Before starting work, use measurements
and photographs as appropriate to record bonding patterns, joint widths, special
features, etc.
• Identification of masonry units to be removed, replaced or repaired: Mark
clearly, but not indelibly, on face of masonry units or parts of units to be cut out
and replaced. Transcribe markings to drawings/ photographs.
120
SITE INSPECTION
• Purpose: To confirm type and extent of repair/ renovation/ conservation work
shown on drawings and described in survey reports and schedules of work.
• Parties involved: Project specific.
• Timing: Project specific.
• Instructions issued during inspection: Project specific.
125
REMOVAL OF FITTINGS/ FIXTURES
• Items to be removed, and reinstated on completion of repair work: Project
specific.
• Identification: Attach labels or otherwise mark items using durable, nonpermanent means, to identify location and describe refixing instructions, where
applicable.
• Treatment following removal: Project specific.
• Storage: Protect against damage, and store until required.
• Storage location: Project specific.
• Reinstatement: Refit in original locations using original installation methods.
• Items unsuitable or not required for reuse: Project specific.
• Disposal: In accordance with UWE Site Waste Management Plan.
• Masonry fabric and surfaces: Do not damage during removal and replacement
of fittings/ fixtures.

130
REMOVAL OF PLANT GROWTHS FROM MASONRY
• Plants, root systems and associated soil/ debris: Carefully remove from joints,
voids and facework.
• Removal of roots: Use dampened temporary wood wedges or other approved
method to assist removal. Where growths cannot be removed completely
without disturbing masonry seek instructions.
• Plants to remain in the ground: Cut out a section of stem as close to the ground
as possible. Peel bark back from stump and apply herbicide paste. Leave stump
to wither.

150
GENERALLY / PREPARATION
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
POWER TOOLS FOR REMOVAL OF MORTAR
• Usage: Permitted only with prior approval.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C41
REPAIRING/ RENOVATING/ CONSERVING MASONRY
155
PUTLOG SCAFFOLDING
• Not permitted
160
PROTECTION
• Masonry units: Prevent overstressing during transit, storage, handling and
fixing. Store on level bearers clear of the ground, separated with resilient
spacers. Protect from adverse weather and keep dry. Prevent soiling, chipping
and contamination. Lift units at designed lifting points, where provided.
• Masonry: Prevent damage, particularly to arrises, projecting features and
delicate, friable surfaces. Prevent mortar/ grout splashes and other staining and
marking on facework. Protect using suitable nonstaining slats, boards,
tarpaulins, etc. Remove protection on completion of the work.
165
STRUCTURAL STABILITY
• General: Maintain stability of masonry. Report defects, including signs of
movement that are exposed or become apparent during the removal of masonry
units.
170
DISTURBANCE TO RETAINED MASONRY
• Retained masonry in the vicinity of repair works: Disturb as little as possible.
• Existing retained masonry: Do not cut or adjust to accommodate new or reused
units.
• Retained loose masonry units and those vulnerable to movement during repair
works: Prop or wedge so as to be firmly and correctly positioned.
180
OPERATIVES
• General: Skilled and experienced with the materials and procedures required.
- Evidence of training and previous experience: Provide prior to
commencement.
185
ADVERSE WEATHER
• Frozen materials: Do not use. Do not lay masonry units on frozen surfaces.
• Air temperature: Do not bed masonry units or repoint:
- In cement gauged mortars when at or below 3°C and falling or unless it is at
least 1°C and rising (unless mortar has a temperature of not less than 4°C
when laid and the masonry is thoroughly protected).
• In hydraulic lime:sand mortars when at or below 5°C and falling or unless it is at
least 3°C and rising.
• In non-hydraulic lime:sand mortars in cold weather without approval.
• Temperature of the work: Maintain above freezing until mortar has fully set.
• Rain and snow: Protect masonry by covering during precipitation and at all
times when work is not proceeding.
• Hot conditions and drying winds: Prevent masonry from drying out too rapidly.
• New mortar damaged by frost: Rake out and replace.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C41
REPAIRING/ RENOVATING/ CONSERVING MASONRY

MATERIAL / PRODUCTION/ ACCESSORIES
215
SAMPLES
• Inspection: Make arrangements for the inspection of samples of the following
materials: proposed stone/brick to be used.
• Samples: Representative of the range of variation in appearance for each type
of material to be matched.
• Appearance: Obtain approval before placing orders with suppliers or proceeding
with production.
• Approved samples: Keep at site. For reference purposes. Protect from damage.
220
RECORDING PROFILES
• Profiles: Take measurements from existing masonry units, as instructed, to
allow replacements to be matched accurately.
• Recording in situ: If there are no suitable joints for inserts, seek instructions.
• Drawings and templates: Prepare as necessary, clearly and indelibly marked to
identify use and location.
240
STONE
• Type: To match existing.
• Requirements: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects
which may adversely affect strength, durability or appearance. Thoroughly
seasoned, dressed and worked in accordance with shop drawings prepared by
the supplier.
• Finish: To match existing.
• Supplier: Contractor's choice and CA approval.
245
REPLACEMENT STONE UNITS
• Minimum bed depths and agreed face lines in relation to existing work: Maintain.
Make suitable allowances for any final finishing carried out in situ.
• Sizes and profiles: To match existing masonry; existing joint widths maintained.
• Sinkings for fixings and joggles: Accurately aligned and positioned in relation to
existing masonry. Provide sinkings for lifting devices.
• Marking: Each block/ dressing clearly marked on a concealed face to indicate
the natural bed and position in the finished work.
250
ORIENTATION OF STONE
• Natural bed:
• In plain walling: Horizontal
• In projecting stones and copings: Vertical and at right angles to wall face.
• In arches: At right angles to line of thrust.
255
ASHLAR BLOCKS/ DRESSINGS
• Cutting and dressing stone: To true and regular surfaces, free from hollow or
rough areas.
260
BRICKS
• Types: to match existing.
• Sizes/ Special shapes: to match existing.
265
SALVAGED/ SECOND HAND BRICKS
• Condition:
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C41
REPAIRING/ RENOVATING/ CONSERVING MASONRY
-
Free from matter such as mortar, plaster, paint, bituminous materials and
organic growths.
Sound, clean and reasonably free from cracks and chipped arrises.
330
PREPARATION FOR REPLACEMENT MASONRY
• Defective material: Carefully remove to the extent agreed. Do not disturb,
damage or mark adjacent retained masonry.
• Existing metal fixings, frame members, etc: Report when exposed.
• Redundant metal fixings: Remove completely.
• Recesses: Thoroughly clean to remove loose material and leave joint surfaces
in a suitable condition to receive replacement units. Protect from adverse
weather.
385
LAYING REPLACEMENT MASONRY
• Exposed faces of new material: Keep to approved face lines.
• Faces, angles and features: Accurately align. Set out carefully to ensure
satisfactory junctions with existing masonry and maintain existing joint widths.
• Joint surfaces: Dampen to control suction as necessary.
• Laying: On a full bed of mortar, all joints filled.
• Exposed faces: Keep clear of mortar and grout.
390
GROUTING JOINTS
• Grout mix: Non-hydraulic lime with pozzolanic admixture; mix subject to site
trials (or contractor's choice subject to CA approval).
• Joints that cannot be fully filled with bedding mortar: Grout thoroughly around
replacement masonry units
• Grouting: Keep grout back from exposed face to allow for the depth of pointing,
using an approved temporary sealing material. Prevent grout staining exposed
face.
395
STONE INSERTS
• Pockets to receive inserts:
- Cut out accurately. Undercut sides of pocket where necessary to provide
space for bonding material.
- Adjust depth so that insert stands proud of existing stone for finishing in situ.
Clean out thoroughly.
• Inserts: Cut to the smallest rectangular shape necessary to replace the
defective area and provide a firm seating. Install accurately and securely.
- Exposed faces: Keep clear of bonding material.
• Existing joint widths: Maintain. Do not bridge joints.
• Replacement cramps: From new shoulders as required.
405
BONDED DOWELS generally
• Dowels: austenitic stainless steel. .
- Secured into clean, dry holes with adhesive. Do not use adhesive to bond
stones at joints unless agreed otherwise.
- Adhesive: epoxy resin.
- Additional requirements: nil.
• Holes:
- Drilled in the background and the rear of the replacement/ insert to receive
dowels and adhesive.
- Aligned to allow accurate positioning of the replacement/ insert.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C41
REPAIRING/ RENOVATING/ CONSERVING MASONRY

TOOLING / DRESSING STONE IN SITU
450
WEATHERING LEDGES AT JOINTS
• Locations: Where stones project or are recessed.
• Requirement: Carefully weather the ledge, to approval.
• Method: Suitably graded carborundum blocks or tooling as appropriate.
455
DESCALING STONE
• Requirement: Carefully remove loose scaling and powdering from stones to the
extent agreed.
• Method: Suitable bristle brushes or carborundum blocks. Do not use wire
brushes.
458
REDRESSING STONE
• Requirement: Carefully dress back stones to the extent agreed.
• Method: Suitably graded carborundum blocks or tooling as appropriate.

MORTAR REPAIRS
510
PREPARATION FOR MORTAR REPAIRS
• Repair area: Scribe straight horizontal and vertical lines with edges parallel to
joints. Where repair area abuts joints, maintain existing joint widths and do not
bridge joints.
• Decayed masonry: Cut back carefully to a depth of not less than 20 mm and to
a sound background. Where the depth of removal exceeds 50 mm seek
instructions.
• Precautions: Do not weaken the masonry by removing excessive material. Do
not damage adjacent masonry.
• Top and vertical edges of repair area: Undercut.
540
APPLYING MORTAR
• Background: Clean thoroughly to remove all dust and debris and dampen to
control suction.
• Building up: In layers to specified thickness. Apply firmly and ensure good
adhesion with no voids. Form a mechanical key to undercoats by combing or
scratching to produce evenly spaced lines.
• Applying coats: Allow each layer to achieve an initial set before applying
subsequent coats. Prevent each layer from drying out too rapidly by covering
immediately with plastics sheeting and/ or dampening intermittently with clean
water.
• Finishing mortar coat: Form accurately to required planes/ profiles and flush with
adjacent masonry.
• Protection: Protect completed mortar repairs from adverse weather until they
have fully set.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
C51
REPAIRING/ RENOVATING/ CONSERVING TIMBER
To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions
GENERAL
110
INSPECTION
• Purpose: To confirm nature and extent of repair/ renovation/ conservation
work shown on drawings and described in survey reports and schedules of
work.
130
OPENING UP
• Purpose: To reveal previously concealed areas of structure or fabric not
recorded during initial surveys.
• Extent: Project Specific refer to Project Scope
• Timing: Give notice before starting opening up.
- Period of notice: To be agreed with CA, no less than 2 working days
• Retained building structure/ fabric: Do not damage or destabilize.
150
TIMBER PROCUREMENT
• Timber (including timber for wood based products): Obtained from well
managed forests and/ or plantations in accordance with:
- The laws governing forest management in the producer country or
countries.
- International agreements such as the Convention on International Trade in
Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (CITES).
- UWE Design Guide.
• Documentation: Provide either:
- Documentary evidence (which has been or can be independently verified)
regarding the provenance of all timber supplied.
- Evidence that suppliers have adopted and are implementing a formal
environmental purchasing policy for timber and wood based products.
STRUCTURAL REPAIRS/ ALTERATIONS
250
TIMBER SECTION REPAIRS - EXTERNAL SPLICE
• Defective timber: Cut out to clean, regular profile.
• Replacement timber: To match existing
PRODUCTS – Generally: Project Specific.
255
TIMBER REPAIRS – RESIN
• Two part resin system: DRY FIX® and DRY FLEX®
• Manufacture: Repair Care International Ltd, Unit 19, Darwell Park, Mica Close,
Amington, Tamworth, Staffordshire, B77 4DR Tel.: +44 (0)1827 302 517.
http://www.repair-care.com/uk
• Preparation, Application and Finishing; All as per manufacturer’s specification.
• Installers to be certified by manufacturer to Repair Care – Level 1.
• Recommended Tools; As per manufacturer’s specification.
• Refer to full Material Safety Data Sheets and Health and Safety information,
before commencing work – available at www.repair-care.com
Issue: 1.0
C51
Repairing/ renovating/ conserving timber (continued)
C51
310
STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD (GRADED DIRECT TO STRENGTH CLASS)
• Grading standard: To BS 4978, BS EN 14081-1 or other national equivalent
and so marked.
360
SOFTWOOD FOR JOINERY REPAIRS
• Quality: Generally to BS EN 942; free from decay and insect attack (except
pinhole borers).
370
HARDWOOD FOR JOINERY REPAIRS
• Quality: Generally to BS EN 942; free from decay and insect attack (except
pinhole borers).
380
STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD
• Standard: To the relevant national standards and quality control procedures
specified in BS 5268-2, and so marked.
410
CARBON STEEL SECTIONS AND PLATES
• Standard: To BS EN 10025-2.
• Source: Obtain steel from a source accredited to a national or internationally
accepted quality standard.
420
STAINLESS STEEL SECTIONS AND PLATES
• Standard: To BS EN 10088.
• Source: Obtain steel from a source accredited to a national or internationally
accepted quality standard.
440
CARBON STEEL BOLT ASSEMBLIES
• Bolts: To BS 4190.
• Nuts and washers: Material, grades and finishes to suit bolts.
- Washer size:
- In contact with timber: Diameter: 2 times bolt diameter; thickness: 0.2
times bolt diameter.
- In contact with steel section/ plate (required when surface finish may be
damaged by nut or bolt head rotating): To BS 4320.
450
STAINLESS STEEL BOLT ASSEMBLIES
• Bolts: To BS EN ISO 3506-1.
- Nuts and washers: To suit grade of bolt.
- Washer size:
- In contact with timber: Diameter: 2 times bolt diameter; thickness: 0.2
times bolt diameter.
- In contact with steel section/ plate (required when surface finish may be
damaged by nut or bolt head rotating): To BS 4320.
470
NAILS
• Standard: As section Z20.
480
SCREWS
• Standard: As section Z20.
Issue: 1.0
C51
Repairing/ renovating/ conserving timber (continued)
C51
EXECUTION
600
WORKMANSHIP
• Skill and experience of site operatives: Appropriate for types of work on which
they are employed.
- Documentary evidence: Submit on request.
610
TEMPORARY SUPPORTS/ PROPPING
• General: Provide adequate temporary support at each stage of repair work to
prevent damage, overstressing or uncontrolled collapse of any part of the
structure.
• Bearings for temporary supports/ propping: Suitable to carry loads throughout
repair operations.
620
PROTECTION OF TIMBER AND WOOD COMPONENTS BEFORE AND
DURING INSTALLATION
• Storage: Keep dry, under cover, clear of the ground and with good ventilation.
Support sections/ components on regularly spaced, level bearers on a dry,
firm base.
• Handling: Do not overstress, distort or disfigure sections or components
during transit, storage, lifting, erection or fixing.
630
MATERIAL SAMPLES
• Representative samples of designated materials: Submit before placing
orders.
- Designated materials: Project Specific.
650
DIMENSIONS GENERALLY
• Site dimensions: Take as necessary before starting fabrication.
- Discrepancies with drawings: Report without delay and obtain instructions
before proceeding.
660
CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD AND
HARDWOOD
• General: Dimensions given on drawings and in schedules of work are finished
sizes.
• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes:
- Sawn surfaces:
- Thickness and widths < 100 mm: -1, +3 mm.
- Thickness and widths > 100 mm: -2, +4 mm.
- Further processed surfaces:
- Thickness and widths < 100 mm: -1, +1 mm.
- Thickness and widths > 100 mm: -1.5, +1.5 mm.
670
CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF NONSTRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD AND
HARDWOOD
• General: Dimensions given on drawings and in schedules of work are finished
sizes.
• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes:
- Sawn surfaces:
- Thickness and widths < 100 mm: -1, +3 mm.
- Thickness and widths > 100 mm: -2, +4 mm.
- Further processed surfaces: -0, +1.
Issue: 1.0
C51
Repairing/ renovating/ conserving timber (continued)
C51
680
WARPING OF TIMBER
• Bow, spring, twist and cup: Not greater than the limits set down in BS 4978 or
BS EN 14081-1 for softwood, or BS 5756 for hardwood.
690
PROCESSING TREATED TIMBER
• Cutting and machining: Carry out as much as possible before treatment.
• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed,
planed, ploughed, etc.
• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat with two flood coats
of a solution recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.
710
REUSE OF TIMBER SECTIONS/ WOOD COMPONENTS
• Sections / components scheduled to be removed but not reused in existing
locations: Agree extent of retention for reuse elsewhere in the works.
- Treatment following removal: Project Specific.
- Storage: Protect against damage, and store until required.
- Storage location: Project Specific.
• Reuse: Adapt sections/ components, as necessary, and install in agreed
locations.
720
TEMPORARY REMOVAL AND REINSTATEMENT OF FITTINGS/ FIXTURES
• Items to be removed, and reinstated on completion of repair work:
- Identification: Attach labels or otherwise mark items using durable, nonpermanent means, to identify location and refixing instructions, where
applicable.
- Treatment following removal: Project Specific.
- Storage: Protect against damage, and store until required.
- Storage location: Project Specific.
- Reinstatement: Refit in original locations using original installation
methods.
• Items unsuitable or not required for reuse: Obtain instructions regarding
disposal.
730
PARTIAL REMOVAL OF EXISTING DECORATIVE/ PROTECTIVE FINISH
• Extent: Remove minimum necessary to expose damaged or decayed wood.
Feather the edge of remaining coating around repair site.
740
REMOVAL OF EXISTING DECORATIVE/ PROTECTIVE FINISH
• Extent: Remove completely back to bare wood.
750
CLEANING DIRTY OR STAINED WOOD
• Generally: Scrub with neutral pH soap and clean, warm water.
• Old varnish: Remove using mixture of turpentine (not turpentine substitute)
and acetone in proportions determined by experiment, followed by washing
down.
760
REPAIR OF MEMBERS - CUTTING OUT MEMBERS
• Extent of timber removal: Cut out full cross section of member where wood is
defective or decayed, plus appropriate length of sound wood.
• Distance from face of support to cut end of existing timber: Obtain instructions
if dimension exceeds 300mm.
780
REPAIR OF DISTORTED TIMBER MEMBERS
• Generally: Repair to shape that member has assumed.
Issue: 1.0
C51
Repairing/ renovating/ conserving timber (continued)
C51
850
ADHESIVE JOINTS
• Moisture content of sections to be joined: Within 5% of equilibrium moisture
content for conditions of service, and differing from each other by not more
than 3%.
• Surfaces to be bonded: Close fitting, structurally sound, dry, and free from
contamination by dirt, dust, grease or other deleterious substances.
860
MOISTURE CONTENT CHECKING
• Procedure: When instructed, check moisture content of timber sections with
an approved electrical moisture meter.
• Test results: Keep records of all tests. If moisture content falls outside
specified range obtain instructions.
870
MOISTURE CONTENT TESTING
• Procedure: When instructed, test timber sections with an electrical moisture
meter with deep probes, that has been carefully calibrated against oven drying
tests or otherwise guaranteed by an independent testing authority.
• Test sample: Test 5% but not less than 10 lengths of each cross-section in the
centre of the length.
• Test results: 90% of values obtained to be within the specified range. Provide
records of all tests.
COMPLETION
910
MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
• General: Inspect accessible bolted, coach screwed and timber pegged joints
and tighten fasteners if necessary.
- Timing: On Completion and at end of Defects Liability Period or
Rectification Period.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
D20
EXCAVATING AND FILLING
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
CLEARANCE / EXCAVATING
110
SITE INVESTIGATION
Project Specific
164
TREE ROOTS
• Protected area: Do not cut roots within an area which is the larger of:
- The branch spread of the tree.
- An area with a radius of half the tree's height, measured from the trunk.
• Excavation in protected area:
- Method: Contractor's choice.
- Backfill as soon as possible or temporarily line with polyethylene sheet to
reduce evaporation.
• Outside protected area: Give notice of roots exceeding 25 mm and do not cut
without approval.
• Cutting:
- Make clean smooth cuts with no ragged edges.
- Pare cut surfaces smooth with a sharp knife.
- Treatment of cut roots: Not required.
• Backfill: To be approved by CA.
225
HANDLING TOPSOIL
• Aggressive weeds:
- Species: Included in the Weeds Act, section 2 or the Wildlife and
Countryside Act, Schedule 9, part II.
- Give notice: Obtain instructions before moving topsoil.
• Earthmoving equipment: Select and use to minimize disturbance, trafficking and
compaction.
• Contamination: Do not mix topsoil with:
- Subsoil, stone, hardcore, rubbish or material from demolition work.
- Oil, fuel, cement or other substances harmful to plant growth.
- Other grades of topsoil.
• Multiple handling: Keep to a minimum. Use topsoil immediately after stripping.
• Wet conditions: Handle topsoil in the driest condition possible. Do not handle
during or after heavy rainfall or when it is wetter than the plastic limit as defined
by BS 3882, Annex N2.
270
FOUNDATIONS GENERALLY
• Give notice if:
- A natural bearing formation of undisturbed subsoil is not obtained at the
depth shown on the drawings.
- The formation contains soft or hard spots or highly variable material.
290
FOUNDATIONS IN MADE UP GROUND
• Depth: Excavate down to a natural formation of undisturbed subsoil.
• Discrepancy: Give notice if this is greater or less than depth given.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
D20
EXCAVATING AND FILLING
310
UNSTABLE GROUND
• Generally: Ensure that the excavation remains stable at all times.
• Give notice: Without delay if any newly excavated faces are too unstable to
allow earthwork support to be inserted.
• Take action: If instability is likely to affect adjacent structures or roadways, take
appropriate emergency action.
320
RECORDED FEATURES
• Recorded foundations, beds, drains, manholes, etc: Break out and seal drain
ends.
• Contaminated earth: Remove and disinfect as required by local authority.
330
UNRECORDED FEATURES
• Give notice: If unrecorded foundations, beds, voids, basements, filling, tanks,
pipes, cables, drains, manholes, watercourses, ditches, etc. not shown on the
drawings are encountered.
FILLING
500
PROPOSED FILL MATERIALS
• Details: Submit full details of proposed fill materials to demonstrate compliance
with specification, including:
- Type and source of imported fill.
- Proposals for processing and reuse of material excavated on site.
- Test reports as required elsewhere.
• Timing: At least 7 days before starting filling.
510
HAZARDOUS, AGGRESSIVE OR UNSTABLE MATERIALS
• General: Do not use fill materials which would, either in themselves or in
combination with other materials or ground water, give rise to a health hazard,
damage to building structures or instability in the filling, including material that is:
- Frozen or containing ice.
- Organic.
- Contaminated or noxious.
- Susceptible to spontaneous combustion.
- Likely to erode or decay and cause voids.
- With excessive moisture content, slurry, mud or from marshes or bogs.
- Clay of liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding 55.
- Unacceptable, class U2 as defined in the Highways Agency 'Specification
for highway works', clause 601.
520
FROST SUSCEPTIBILITY
• General: Except as allowed below, fill must be non frost-susceptible as defined
in Highways Agency 'Specification for Highway Works', clause 801.17.
• Test reports: If the following fill materials are proposed, submit a laboratory
report confirming they are non frost- susceptible:
- Fine grained soil with a plasticity index less than 20%.
- Coarse grained soil or crushed granite with more than 10% retained on a
0.063 mm sieve.
• Crushed chalk.
• Crushed limestone fill with average saturation moisture content in excess of 3%.
- Burnt colliery shale.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
D20
EXCAVATING AND FILLING
•
Frost-susceptible fill: May only be used within the external walls of buildings
below spaces that will be heated. Protect from frost during construction.
530
PLACING FILL
• Excavations and areas to be filled: Free from loose soil, rubbish and standing
water.
• Freezing conditions: Do not place fill on frozen surfaces. Remove material
affected by frost. Replace and recompact if not damaged after thawing.
• Adjacent structures, membranes and buried services:
- Do not overload, destabilise or damage.
- Submit proposals for temporary support necessary to ensure stability during
filling.
- Allow 14 days (minimum) before backfilling against in situ concrete
structures.
• Layers: Place so that only one type of material occurs in each layer.
• Earthmoving equipment: Vary route to avoid rutting.
535
COMPACTION
• General: Compact fill as soon as possible after placing.
• After compaction: Surface of each layer must be well closed, showing no
movement under compaction plant, and without cracks, holes, ridges, loose
material and the like.
• Defective areas: Remove and recompact to full thickness of layer using new
material.
540
BENCHING IN FILL
• Adjacent areas: If, during filling the difference in level between adjacent areas of
filling exceeds 600 mm, cut into edge of higher filling to form benches 600 mm
minimum width and height equivalent to depth of a layer of compacted filling.
• New filling: Spread and compact to ensure maximum continuity with previous
filling.
617
HIGHWAYS AGENCY TYPE 1 GRANULAR FILLING Fill: To Highways Agency
'Specification for highway works', clause 803:
• Crushed rock (other than argillaceous rock).
• Crushed concrete.
- Recycled aggregates.
- Crushed non-expansive slag to clause 801.2.
- Well-burned non-plastic colliery shale.
• Filling: To Highways Agency 'Specification for highway works', clauses 801.3
and 802.
730
BLINDING
• Surfaces to receive sheet overlays or concrete: Blind with:
- Concrete where shown on drawings; or
- Sand, fine gravel, or other approved fine material applied to fill interstices.
Moisten as necessary before final rolling to provide a flat, closed, smooth
surface.
• Sand for blinding: To BS 882 table 4, type C or M, or to BS EN 12620, grade 0/4
or 0/2 (MP).
• Permissible deviations on surface level: +0 -25 mm.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F10
BRICK / BLOCK WALLING
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF WALLING
110
CLAY FACING BRICKWORK
• Bricks: To BS EN 771-1:2003 or most current standard if superseded
- Special Shapes: As shown on Project Drawings
- Recycled content (as % of mass): 10% to BS EN ISO 14021 or most current
standard if superseded
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand generally with Sulphate resisting cement or to
BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, (where mix
proportions and compressive strength are specified)
- Additional Requirements: none
• Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
• Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
• Features: to match existing (or project specific)
170
CALCIUM SILICATE FACING BRICKWORK
• Bricks: to BS EN 771-2:2003 or most current (if superseded)
- Special Shapes: As shown on Project Drawings
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand generally with Sulphate resisting cement or to
BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, (where mix
proportions and compressive strength are specified)
- Additional Requirements: none
• Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
• Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
• Features: to match existing (or project specific)
215
CONCRETE FACING BRICKWORK
• Bricks: To BS EN 771-3:2003 or most current (if superseded)
- Configuration: Group 1
- Compressive Strength: Category 1
- Mean value: not applicable
- Characteristic value: not applicable
- Category: 1
- Freeze / Thaw Resistance: declared to BS EN 771-3:2003, or most current
standard if superseded, for CA approval
- Recycled Content (as % of mass): 50% minimum to BS EN ISO 14021 or
most current standard if superseded
- Work sizes: As defined on the Project Drawings
Special Shapes: As shown on Project Drawings
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand generally with Sulphate resisting cement or to
BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, (where mix
proportions and compressive strength are specified)
- Additional Requirements: none.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F10
BRICK / BLOCK WALLING
•
•
•
Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
Features: to match existing (or project specific)
230
RECLAIMED BRICK FACING BRICKWORK
• Reclaimed Bricks: To match existing
- Condition: Sound, free from mortar and deleterious matter
- Supplier / Source: obtained by contractor
- Format: to match existing
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand generally with Sulphate resisting cement or to
BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, (where mix
proportions and compressive strength are specified)
- Additional Requirements: none
• Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
• Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
• Features: to match existing (or project specific)
255
CONCRETE FACING BLOCKWORK
• Blocks: to BS EN 771-3:2003 or most current (if superseded)
- Configuration: Group 1
- Compressive Strength: Category 1
- Mean value: not applicable
- Characteristic value: not applicable
- Category: 1
- Freeze / Thaw Resistance: declared to BS EN 771-3:2003, or most current
standard if superseded, for CA approval.
- Recycled Content (as % of mass): 80% minimum to BS EN ISO 14021 or
most current standard if superseded.
- Work sizes: As defined on the Project Drawings
- Finish / colour: As defined on the Project Drawings
Special Shapes: As shown on Project Drawings
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand generally with Sulphate resisting cement or to
BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, (where mix
proportions and compressive strength are specified)
- Additional Requirements: none
• Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
• Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
• Features: to match existing (or project specific)
315
CLAY COMMON BRICKWORK
• Bricks: To BS EN 771-1:2003 or most current (if superseded)
- Average compressive strength (minimum): 5N/mm2
- Freeze / thaw resistance: The freeze / thaw resistance of masonry units
shall be determined by the exposure level definitions stated BS EN
771:2003 Annex B; section B3 and the table below:
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F10
BRICK / BLOCK WALLING
•
•
•
•
Exposure level
Freeze / thaw resistance
Passive
F0
Moderate
F1
Severe
F2
- Water absorption: Less than 20%
- Configuration: As defined on Project Drawings
- Recycled content (as % of mass): 10% minimum to BS EN ISO 14021 or
most current standard if superseded
Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand generally with Sulphate resisting cement or to
BS EN 998-2, or most current if superseded, (where mix proportions and
compressive strength are specified)
- Additional Requirements: none
Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
Features: to match existing (or project specific)
355A
CONCRETE COMMON LIGHTWEIGHT BLOCKWORK
• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3:2003 or most current (if superseded)
- Configuration: Group 1
- Compressive Strength: Category 1
- Mean value (minimum): 3.6N/mm2
- Characteristic value: not applicable
- Category: 1
- Freeze / thaw resistance: The freeze / thaw resistance of masonry units
shall be determined by the exposure level definitions stated BS EN
771:2003 Annex B; section B3 and the table below:
Exposure level
Freeze / thaw resistance
Passive
F0
Moderate
F1
Severe
F2
- Recycled Content (as % of mass): 80% minimum to BS EN ISO 14021 or
most current standard if superseded
- Work sizes: As defined on the Project Drawings
Special Shapes: As shown on Project Drawings
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: to BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, Class M4
(minimum)
- Additional Requirements: none
• Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
• Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
• Features: to match existing (or project specific)
355B
CONCRETE COMMON HEAVYWEIGHT BLOCKWORK
• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3:2003 or most current (if superseded)
- Configuration: Group 1
- Compressive Strength: Category 1
- Mean value (minimum): 7.3N/mm2
- Characteristic value: not applicable
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F10
BRICK / BLOCK WALLING
-
•
•
•
•
Category: 1
Freeze / thaw resistance: The freeze / thaw resistance of masonry units
shall be determined by the exposure level definitions stated BS EN
771:2003 Annex B; section B3 and the table below:
Exposure level
Freeze / thaw resistance
Passive
F0
Moderate
F1
Severe
F2
- Recycled Content (as % of mass): 80% minimum to BS EN ISO 14021 or
most current standard if superseded
- Work sizes: As defined on the Project Drawings
Special Shapes: As shown on Project Drawings
Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: to BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, Class M10
(minimum)
- Additional Requirements: none
Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
Features: to match existing (or project specific)
385
ENGINEERING BRICKWORK
• Bricks: to BS EN 771-1:2003 or most current standard if superseded
- Mean compressive strength (minimum): 125N/mm2
- Category: 1
- Water absorption (maximum): 4.5%
- Freeze / thaw category: F2
- Active soluble salts category: S2
- Additional requirements: none
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: to BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, Class M20
(minimum)
- Additional Requirements: none
• Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
• Joints: flush
395
DAMP PROOF COURSE BRICKWORK
• Bricks: to BS EN 771-1
- Type: HD
- Water absorption (maximum): 4.5%
- Net dry density (minimum): 2200kg/m3
- Freeze / thaw category: F2
- Active soluble salts content category: S2
- Additional requirements: none
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: to BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, Class M10
(minimum)
- Additional Requirements: none
• Bond: to match existing (or project specific)
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F10
BRICK / BLOCK WALLING
•
•
Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
Features: to match existing (or project specific)
400
HARD LANDSCAPING MATERIALS SPECIFICATION
• Minimum standard: All products shall achieve environmental ratings as set out
in the BRE Green Guide to Specification table 6.10 Landscaping in accordance
with the required use type
430
CONDITIONING OF CLAY AND CALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS
- Bricks delivered warm from manufacturing process: Do not use until cold
- Absorbent bricks in warm weather: Wet to reduce suction. Do not soak
440
CONDITIONING OF CONCRETE BRICKS / BLOCKS
- Autoclaved concrete bricks / blocks delivered warm from manufacturing
process. Do not use
- Age of non-autoclaved concrete bricks: Do not use until at least four weeks
old
- Avoidance of suction in concrete bricks / blocks: Do not wet
- Use of water retaining mortar admixture: Submit details
500
LAYING GENERALLY
• Mortar joints: Fill vertical joints. Lay bricks, solid and cellular blocks on a full
bed
• AAC block thin mortar adhesive and gypsum block adhesive joints: Fill vertical
joints. Lay blocks on full bed
• Clay block joints:
- Thin lay mortar: Lay blocks on a full bed
- Interlocking perpends: Butted
• Bond where not specified: Half lap stretcher
• Vertical joints in brick and concrete block facework: Even widths. Plumb at
every fifth cross joint
520
ACCURACY
• Courses: Level and true to line
• Faces, angles and features: plumb
• Permissible deviations:
Position plan of any point in relation to the specified building
reference line and / or point at the same level
Straightness in any 5m length
Verticality up to 3m height
Verticality up to 7m height
Overall thickness of walls
Level of bed joints up to 5m (brick masonry)
Level of bed joints up to 5m (block masonry)
535
± 10mm
± 5mm
± 10mm
± 14mm
± 10mm
± 11mm
± 13mm
HEIGHT OF LIFTS IN WALLING USING CEMENT GAUGED OR HYDRAULIC
LIME MORTAR
• Quoins and advance work: Rack back
• Lift height (maximum): 1.2m above any other part of work at any time
• Daily lift height (maximum): 1.5m for any one leaf
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F10
BRICK / BLOCK WALLING
540
HEIGHT OF LIFTS IN WALLING USING THIN JOINT MORTAR GLUE
• Quoins and advance work: Rack back
• Lift height (maximum): 1.3m above any other part of work at any time
545
LEVELLING OF SEPARATE LEAVES
• Locations for equal levelling of cavity wall leaves: As follows:
- Every course containing vertical twist type ties or other rigid ties
- Every third tie course for double triangle / butterfly ties
- Courses in which lintels are to be bedded
560
COURSING BRICKWORK
• Gauge: Four brick courses including bed joints to 300mm
561
COURSING BRICKWORK WITH EXISTING
• Gauge: Line up with existing brick courses
580
LAYING FROGGED BRICKS
• Single frogged bricks: Frog uppermost
• Double frogged bricks: Larger frog uppermost
• Frog cavity: Fill with mortar
595
LINTELS
• Bearing: Ensure full length masonry units occur immediately under lintel ends
610
SUPPORT EXISTING WORK
• Joint above inserted lintel or masonry: Fully consolidated with semi-dry mortar
to support existing structure
615
BRICKWORK TO RECEIVE ASPHALT DPC
• Substrate: Mortar bed finished flush, smooth and level
620
BLOCK BONDING NEW WALLS TO EXISTING
• Pocket requirements: Formed as follows:
- Width: Full thickness of new wall
- Depth (minimum): 100mm
- Vertical spacing
- Brick to brick: 4 courses high at 8 course centres
- Block to block: Every other course
• Pocket joints: Fully filled with mortar
635
JOINTING
• Profile: Consistent in appearance.
645
ACCESSIBLE JOINTS NOT EXPOSED TO VIEW
• Jointing: Struck flush as work proceeds, ensure all excess material is cleared
away from wall
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F10
BRICK / BLOCK WALLING
665
POINTING
• Workmanship: Where specified, rake out joints to a depth of 12-15 mm as the
work proceeds. Subsequently, remove loose debris from the joints using a dry
brush, dampen the work, and neatly point to the specified profile in a
continuous operation from the top of the wall downwards as the scaffolding is
taken down
• Mortar: As section Z21 - Standard: Not applicable
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand generally with Sulphate resisting cement or to
BS EN 998-2, or most current standard if superseded, (where mix
proportions and compressive strength are specified)
671
FIRE STOPPING
• Avoidance of fire and smoke penetration: Fit tightly between cavity barriers and
masonry. Leave no gaps.
690
ADVERSE WEATHER
• General: Do not use frozen materials or lay on frozen surfaces.
• Air temperature requirements: Do not lay bricks/ blocks:
- In cement gauged mortars when at or below 3°C and falling or unless it is at
least 3°C and rising.
- In hydraulic lime:sand mortars when at or below 5°C and falling or below
5°C and rising.
- In thin joint mortar glue when outside the limits set by the mortar
manufacturer
• Temperature of walling during curing: Above freezing until hardened
• Newly erected walling: Protect at all times from:
- Rain and snow.
- Drying out too rapidly in hot conditions and in drying winds.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FACEWORK
709
TRIAL SAMPLE PANEL of facework
• If instructed by CA, construct a sample panel, approx 1m square, for CA
approval.
710
THE TERM FACEWORK
• Definition: Applicable in this specification to all brick/ block walling finished fair.
• Painted facework: The only requirement to be waived is that relating to colour.
750
COLOUR CONSISTENCY OF MASONRY UNITS
• Colour range: Submit proposals of methods taken to ensure that units are of
consistent and even appearance within deliveries
• Conformity: Check each delivery for consistency of appearance with previous
deliveries and with approved reference panels; do not use if variation is
excessive
• Finished work: Free from patches, horizontal stripes and racking back marks
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F10
BRICK / BLOCK WALLING
760
APPEARANCE
• Brick/ block selection: Do not use units with damaged faces or arrises
• Cut masonry units: Where cut faces or edges are exposed cut with table
masonry saw
• Quality control: Lay masonry units to match relevant reference panels
- Setting out: To produce satisfactory junctions and joints with built-in
elements and components.
- Coursing: Evenly spaced using gauge rods.
• Lifts: Complete in one operation.
• Methods of protecting facework: Submit proposals.
780
GROUND LEVEL
• Commencement of facework: Not less than 150 mm below finished level of
adjoining ground or external works level.
790
PUTLOG SCAFFOLDING
• Use: Not permitted in facework.
800
TOOTHED BOND
• New and existing facework in same plane: Bond together at every course to
achieve continuity.
830
CLEANLINESS
• Facework: Keep clean
• Mortar on facework: Allow to dry before removing with stiff bristled brush
• Removal of marks and stains: Rubbing not permitted
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F20
NATURAL STONE RUBBLE WALLING
To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.
TYPES OF WALLING
110
RANDOM RUBBLE BROUGHT TO COURSES or similar WALLING
• Stone: To BS EN 771-6:2003 or most current standard if superseded
- Name (traditional): natural stone to match existing
- Petrological family: natural stone to match existing
- Colour: to match existing
- Origin: sourced by contractor
- Thickness on bed (nominal): refer project drawings
- Quality: Seasoned and free from vents, cracks, fissures or other defects
adversely affecting strength, durability or appearance
• Mortar: As section Z21
- Mix: 1:3:12 white cement:lime:sand for most building stones, 1:1:6 for
sandstones, 1:3 for dense granite or Lime: sand as section Z21.
- Lime: NHL 5 hydraulic lime. Eminently hydraulic to approval (or project
specific)
- Sand: for approval by CA
- Other requirements: project specific
- Joints: to match existing (or project specific)
- Features: to match existing (or project specific)
GENERAL
230
OPERATIVES
• Workmanship: Cutting, dressing, laying and jointing of stone to be carried out
by skilled masons. Provide evidence of previous experience and details of work
previously carried out
240
STONE SAMPLES
• Timing: Before placing orders to be presented to CA for approval
• Submit: Labelled samples of dressed stone or arrange for samples which
represent the range of variation in appearance to be inspected
250
SAND SAMPLES
• Timing: Before placing orders
• Submit: Representative samples for approval of colour and grading
LAYING AND JOINTING
300
REFERENCE PANELS
• General: Complete areas of specified walling types and obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding.
• Walling type:
- Location: Project specific.
- Size: Project specific.
- Features: Project specific.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F20
NATURAL STONE RUBBLE WALLING
315
ADVERSE WEATHER
• General: Do not use frozen materials or lay on frozen surfaces.
• Air temperature: Do not lay stones:
- In cement gauged mortars: At or below 3°C & falling or below 3°C & rising.
- In hydraulic lime:sand mortars: At or below 5°C & falling or below 5°C &
rising.
- Temperature of walling during curing: Above freezing until mortar hardened.
• Newly erected walling: Protect at all times from:
- Rain and snow.
- Drying out too rapidly in hot conditions and in drying winds.
325
LAYING GENERALLY
• Absorbent stones in warm weather: Dampen to reduce suction. Do not soak.
• Mortar joints:
- Laying: Full bed of mortar with all joints and voids filled.
- Appearance: Neat and consistent.
• Orientation for natural bed of stones:
- In plain walling: Horizontal.
- Coping and projecting stones: Vertical and at right angles to wall face.
- Arches: Vertical to line of thrust.
• Appearance and bonding: Achieve a consistent overall appearance and good
bond. Distribute different shapes, sizes and colours evenly throughout the face
of the wall.
- Vertical joints: Long continuous joints prohibited.
• Accuracy:
- Plumb.
- Setting out: Achieve satisfactory junctions and joints with adjoining or built-in
elements and components.
• Cleanliness: Keep facework clean. Rubbing to remove marks & stains not
permitted
330
GROUND LEVEL
• Extent of facework below finished ground or paving level (minimum): 150 mm.
340
PUTLOG SCAFFOLDING
• Use: Not permitted in facework.
• Regularity: Dress stones to give consistent leaf thickness and maintain full
cavity width.
360
QUOINS AND JAMBS
• Selection of stones: Large stones, dressed to a more regular shape.
• Laying: In advance of main body of rubble walling.
370
BONDERS FOR WALLS FACED BOTH SIDES
• • Bonding stones:
- Length: Two thirds the thickness of the wall.
- Height: Not less than one third of length.
- Distribution: One to every square metre of each side of wall and staggered.
• Courses: True to line and level.
• General: After the initial set, stippled with a stiff brush to remove laitance and
give a coarse texture.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
F20
NATURAL STONE RUBBLE WALLING
410
SUPPORT OF EXISTING WORKS
• Joint above inserted lintel or masonry: Fully consolidated with semidry mortar to
support existing structure.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
G20
CARPENTRY / TIMBER FRAMING / FIRST FIXING
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF TIMBER
109
TIMBER PROCUREMENT
• Timber and wood products should be sourced from legal and sustainable
sources, certified under a credible timber certification scheme (such as FLEGT,
FSC, ISO 14001) which are based on publicly available forestry standards
drawn up in a fully participatory, transparent and objective manner and backed
by independent auditing.
150
STRENGTH GRADING OF TIMBER
• Grader: Any company currently registered under a third party quality assurance
scheme operated by a certification body approved by the UK Timber Grading
Committee.
• Grading and marking of timber:
• Timber of a target/finished thickness less than 100 mm and not specified for wet
exposure: Graded at an average moisture content not exceeding 20% with no
reading being in excess of 24% and clearly marked as 'DRY' or 'KD' (kiln dried).
• Timber graded undried (green) and specified for installation at higher moisture
contents: Clearly marked as 'WET' or 'GRN'.
- Structural timber members cut from large graded sections: Regraded to
approval and marked accordingly.
210
GRADED SOFTWOOD FOR STRUCTURAL USE GENERALLY
• Grading standard: To BS 4978 or BS EN 519 or other national equivalent and
so marked.
• Strength class to BS EN 338: C 24.
• Treatment: Preservative/fire retardant treatment to NBS section Z12 and the
Wood Protection Association Specification C8, Service life: 40 years.
• Moisture content at time of erection: As clause 450.
270
UNGRADED SOFTWOOD FOR INTERNAL NONSTRUCTURAL USE
• Quality of timber: Free from decay, insect attack (except pinhole borers) and
with no knots wider than half the width of the section.
• Surface finish: Regularized.
• Treatment: Preservative/fire retardant treatment to NBS section Z12 and Wood
Protection Association Commodity Specification C5, Service life: 40 years.
• Moisture content at time of erection: As clause 450.
275
WROT TIMBER FOR EAVES FASCIA, BARGEBOARDS ETC
• Species: Contractor's choice.
• Standard: To BS 1186-3. Class: 2 OR 3.
• Treatment: Preservative/fire retardant treatment NBS section Z12 and Wood
Protection Association Commodity Specification C5, Service life: 40 years.
• Moisture content at time of fixing: As clause 450.
• Fixing: Generally two 50 mm lost head nails to each support.
• Other requirements: Undercut bottom edge of boards to form drip.
Issue Nr: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
G20
311
CARPENTRY / TIMBER FRAMING / FIRST FIXING
PLYWOOD FOR PARAPET GUTTER BOARDS EAVES FASCIA AND SOFFIT
ETC
• Standard: To an approved national standard.
• Thickness: 19 (or to match existing) mm.
• Appearance class to BS EN 635: -3 class I/II.
• Bond quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 3.
• Finish: sanded if to be painted, otherwise unsanded.
• Treatment: Preservative/fire retardant treatment to NBS section Z12 and the
Wood Protection Association Specification C8, Service life: 40 years.
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
401
CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD AND
HARDWOOD TIMBER
• Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are target
sizes as defined in BS EN 336.
• Tolerances: The tolerance indicators (T1) and (T2) specify the maximums
permitted deviations from target sizes as stated in BS EN 336, clause 5.3:
• Tolerance class 1 (T1) for sawn surfaces.
• Tolerance class 2 (T2) for further processed surfaces.
402
CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF NONSTRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD TIMBER
• Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are
finished sizes.
• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes: As stated in BS EN 1313-1:
• Clause 6 for sawn sections.
• Clause NA. 2 for further processed sections.
403
CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF NONSTRUCTURAL HARDWOOD TIMBER
• Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are
finished sizes.
• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes: As stated in BS EN 1313-2:
• Clause 6 for sawn sections.
• Clause NA.3 for further processed sections.
430
SELECTION AND USE OF TIMBER
• Timber members damaged, crushed or split beyond the limits permitted by their
grading: Do not use.
• Notches and holes: Position in relation to knots or other defects such that the
strength of members will not be reduced.
• Scarf joints, finger joints and splice plates: Do not use without approval.
440
PROCESSING TREATED TIMBER
• Cutting and machining: As much as possible before treatment.
• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed,
planed, ploughed, etc.
• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat with two flood coats of
a solution recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.
Issue Nr: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
G20
CARPENTRY / TIMBER FRAMING / FIRST FIXING
450
MOISTURE CONTENT
• Moisture content of timber and wood based products at time of installation: Not
more than:
• Covered in generally unheated spaces: 24%.
• Covered in generally heated spaces: 20%.
• Internal in continuously heated spaces: 20%.
510
PROTECTION
• Generally: Keep timber dry and do not overstress, distort or disfigure sections or
components during transit, storage, lifting, erection or fixing.
• Timber and components: Store under cover, clear of the ground and with good
ventilation. Support on regularly spaced, level bearers on a dry, firm base. Open
pile to ensure free movement of air through the stack.
• Trussed rafters: Keep vertical during handling and storage.
520
EXPOSED END GRAIN
• Components: Seal exposed end grain of the following before delivery to site:
Structural Timbers.
• Sealer: Clear end grain sealer.
530
PAINTED FINISHES
• Structural timber to be painted: Primed as specified before delivery to site.
540
CLEAR FINISHES
• Structural timber to be clear finished: Keep clean and apply first coat of
specified finish before delivery to site.
550
EXPOSED TIMBER
• Planed structural timber exposed to view in completed work: Prevent damage to
and marking of surfaces and arrises.
JOINTING TIMBER
570
JOINTING/FIXING GENERALLY
• Generally: Where not specified precisely, select methods of jointing and fixing
and types, sizes and spacings of fasteners in compliance with section Z20.
580
FRAMING ANCHORS
• Manufacturer: Tata Steel, Catnic range (or equal approved).
- Product reference: (to suit location).
• Material/ finish: Galvanized low carbon steel.
• Fasteners: Nails not less than 30 x 3.75mm galvanized or sherardized square
twist
• Fixing: Secure using not less than the number of nails recommended by anchor
manufacturer.
630
BOLTED JOINTS
• Bolt spacings (minimum): to BS 5268-2, table 81.
• Holes for bolts: Located accurately and drilled to diameters as close as practical
to the nominal bolt diameter and not more than 2 mm larger.
Issue Nr: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
G20
CARPENTRY / TIMBER FRAMING / FIRST FIXING
•
•
670
Washers: Placed under bolt heads and nuts that would otherwise bear directly
on timber. Use spring washers in locations which will be hidden or inaccessible
in the completed building.
Bolt tightening: So that washers just bite the surface of the timber. Ensure that
at least one complete thread protrudes from the nut.
- Checking: At agreed regular intervals up to Practical Completion. Tighten as
necessary.
ANTICORROSION FINISHES FOR FASTNERS
• Galvanizing: To BS 7371-6, with internal threads tapped and lightly oiled
following treatment.
• Sherardizing: To BS 7371-8, Class 1
• Zinc Plating: To BS EN ISO 4042 and passivated
ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
760
TEMPORARY BRACING
• Provision: As necessary to maintain structural timber components in position
and to ensure complete stability during construction.
770
ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS
• Provision: Position and fix additional studs, noggins and/or battens to support
edges of sheet materials, and wall/floor/ceiling mounted appliances, fixtures etc,
shown on drawings
• Material properties: Additional studs, noggins and battens to be of adequate
size and have the same treatment, if any, as adjacent timber supports.
780
WALL PLATES
• Position and alignment: To give the correct span and level for trusses, joists,
etc.
• Bedding: Fully in fresh mortar.
• Joints: At corners and elsewhere where joints are unavoidable use nailed half
lap joints. Do not use short lengths of timber.
784
JOISTS GENERALLY
• Centres: Equal and not exceeding designed spacing.
• Bowed joists: Installed with positive camber.
• End joists: Positioned approximately 50 mm from masonry walls.
786
JOISTS ON HANGERS
• Hangers: Bedded directly on and hard against supporting construction. Do not
use packs or bed on mortar.
• Joists: Cut to leave not more than 6 mm gap between ends of joists and back of
hanger. Rebated to lie flush with underside of hangers.
• Fixing to hangers: A nail in every hole.
791
JOIST HANGERS FOR ceiling /floor joists.
• Manufacturer: Tata Steel, Catnic range.
- Product reference: (to suit location).
• Material/finish: galvanised mild steel.
• Size: To suit joist, design load and crushing strength of supporting construction.
Issue Nr: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
G20
CARPENTRY / TIMBER FRAMING / FIRST FIXING
795
TRIMMING OPENINGS
• Trimmers and trimming joists: When not specified otherwise, not less than 25
mm wider than general joists.
800
TRUSSED RAFTER INSTALLATION
• Erection to BS5268-3, clause 9.3 and TRA site installation guide.
• Trusses generally: Do not modify without approval.
• Damaged trusses: Do not use.
• Fixing: Truss clips and bottom chords of standard trusses and rafters of raised
tie trusses bearing fully on wall plates.
- Bottom chords of standard trusses: do no fix to internal walls until roofing is
complete and
- Cisterns are installed and filled.
805
TRUSS CLIPS
• Manufacturer: Expamet
- Product reference: TC50 for 50mm thick truss, TC38 for 38mm truss.
• Material/finish: Galvanised steel.
• Fasteners: 32 x 3.5mm galvanized or sheradized square twisted nails in every
hole
PERMANENT BRACING OF TRUSSED RAFTERS
•
•
820
Bracing and binders:
- Quality: softwood free from major strength reducing defects and distortion
- Size: 100 x 25mm softwood
- Method of fixing: To every rafter, strut or tie with not less than two fasteners.
- Fasteners: 75 x 3.5mm galvanized round nails.
Lap joints: Extend over and nailed to at least two truss members
VERTICAL RESTRAINT STRAPS
• Type: ST
• Manufacturer: Expamet
- Product reference: When ordering quote the overall length and distance of
bend/twist from the END of the strap e.g. length 1000mm + bent at 100mm
= ST1000B100.
• Material/finish: Galvanised carbon steel.
• Size:
- Cross section: Not less than75mm²
- Length: 100mm anchorage length, 1m overall length
• Centres: Not more than 2m
• Fixing:
- To timber members with not less than two No12 x 50mm woodscrews or two
4.00 dia x 75mm galvanised square twist nails.
- To masonry with not less than five 4.8 x 70mm masonry screws.
- To masonry with not less than four screws evenly spaced, with at least one
screw located within 150mm of the bottom end of each strap.
Issue Nr: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
G20
CARPENTRY / TIMBER FRAMING / FIRST FIXING
830
LATERAL RESTRAINT STRAPS
• Manufacturer: Expamet.
- Product reference: HD.
• Material/finish: Galvanised carbon steel
• Size: Not less than 30 x 5mm cross section, 150mm cranked end and 1200mm
long
• Fixing: To top of joists/rafters/ties at not more than 2m centres and as shown on
drawings.
- Ensure that cranked end is in tight contact with cavity face of wall inner leaf
and is not pointing upwards.
• Straps spanning joists/rafters/ties running parallel to wall:
• Fix noggins and packs tightly beneath straps.
- Size of noggins and packs: Not less than three quarters of joist/rafter/tie
depth and not less than 38mm thick.
- Notching: Notch joists so that straps fit flush with surface. Do not notch
rafters/ties.
• Fasteners: Not less than four 50mm x 8 gauge sheradized countersunk screws
per strap, evenly spread.
840
STRUTTING
• Type: One of the following:
- Herringbone strutting: At least 38 x 38 mm softwood.
- Solid strutting: At least 38 mm thick softwood and at least three quarters of
joist depth.
- Proprietary metal strutting: Catnic (or equal approved).
• Fixing: Between joists as follows:
- Joist spans of 2.5 to 4.5 m: One row at centre span.
- Joist spans over 4.5 m: Two rows equally spaced.
- Strutting must not project beyond top and bottom edges of joists.
• Outer joists: Blocked solidly to perimeter walls.
900
EAVES SOFFIT VENTILATORS
• Manufacturer: Cavity Trays Limited, Administration Centre, Yeovil, Somerset,
BA22 8HU. FREEPHONE 0800 7311 779, Fax: 01935 428223. Web:
www.cavitytrays.com E-mail: [email protected] (or equal approved).
- Product reference: see below.
- Type: SV-FL / SV-GP or as specified in project drawings.
- Colour: White unless specified otherwise.
• Airway: The equivalent of a continuous opening of not less than 10 mm for full
length of eaves.
560
SAFETY SIGNS
• Fixing locations of signs: As indicated on drawings/risk assessment.
• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.
• Product reference: Contractor's choice.
• Material: Aluminium with polyester powder coated base, screen printed
graphics.
• Signs description: Hazard sign as BS 5499-5, code 8.C.0072 with
supplementary text sign,
lettering 'DANGER fragile roof'. General sign with
mandatory instruction to BS 5499-5, code 11.A.0103 with supplementary text
sign, lettering, 'Use crawling boards'.
Issue Nr: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H60
PLAIN ROOF TILING
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF TILING
120A
CONCRETE ROOF TILING
• Base: Refer to project drawings (or existing roof structure).
• Pitch: Refer to project drawings (or existing roof structure).
• Underlay: Proprietary vapour permeable brand.
• Battens: As clause 245.
- Size: refer to project drawings (or to match existing subject to CA approval).
• Tiles: To BS EN 490, non-interlocking.
- Manufacturer: For approval by CA.
- Product reference: refer to project drawings (or to match existing subject to
CA approval).
- Pattern: refer to project drawings (or to match existing subject to CA
approval).
- Colour: refer to project drawings (or to match existing subject to CA
approval).
- Size: refer to project drawings (or to match existing subject to CA approval).
- Headlap (minimum): 65 mm.
- Fixing: As clauses 275 and 280:
TILING GENERALLY
210
BASIC WORKMANSHIP
• General: Fix tiling and accessories to make the whole sound and weather tight
at earliest opportunity.
• Setting out: To true lines and regular appearance, with neat fit at edges,
junctions and features.
• Fixings for tiling accessories: As recommended by tile or accessory
manufacturer.
• Gutters and pipes: Keep free of debris. Clean out at completion.
220
REMOVE EXISTING TILING
• General: Carefully remove tiles, battens, underlay, etc. with minimum
disturbance of adjacent retained tiling.
• Undamaged tiles: Set aside for reuse.
240
UNDERLAY
• Handling: Do not tear or puncture.
• Laying: Maintain consistent tautness.
• Vertical laps (minimum): 100 mm wide, coinciding with supports and securely
fixed.
• Fixing: Galvanized steel, copper or aluminium 20 x 3 mm extra large clout head
nails.
• Eaves: Where exposed, underlay must be BS8747, Annex B, type 5U, or
equivalent UV durable type
• Penetrations: Use proprietary underlay seals or cut underlay to give a tight,
water shedding fit around pipes and components.
• Ventilation paths: Do not obstruct.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H60
PLAIN ROOF TILING
245
BATTENS / COUNTERBATTENS - TREATED
• Timber: Sawn softwood.
- Standard: BS 5534, clause 4.12.1.
- Permissible characteristics and defects: Not to exceed limits in BS 5534,
Annex C.
- Moisture content at time of fixing and covering (maximum): 22%.
• Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and Wood Protection Association
Commodity Specification C8.
- Type: Organic solvent.
259
COUNTERBATTENS ON RAFTERS
• Fixing: Into rafters at not more than 300 mm centres.
265
BATTEN FIXING
• Setting out: In straight horizontal lines. Align on adjacent areas.
• Batten length (minimum): Sufficient to span over three supports.
• Joints in length: Square cut. Butt centrally on supports. Joints must not occur
more than once in any group of four battens on one support.
• Additional battens: Provide where unsupported laps in underlay occur between
battens.
• Fixing: Each batten to each support. Splay fix at joints in length.
270
BATTENS FIXED TO MASONRY
• Setting out: In straight horizontal lines. Align on adjacent areas.
• Batten length (minimum): 3 m.
• Fixing centres (maximum): 400 mm.
272
TIMBER FOR TILING SUBSTRATE WORK
• Timber: Sawn softwood, free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack
(ambrosia beetle excepted).
- Moisture content at time of fixing and covering (maximum): 22%.
• Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and Wood Protection Association
Commodity Specification C8.
- Type: Organic solvent.
275
TILE FIXING
• Setting out: Lay tiles to a half lap bond with joints slightly open. Align tails.
• Ends of courses: Use tile and a half tiles to maintain bond and to ensure that cut
tiles are as large as possible.
• Top and bottom courses: Use eaves/tops tiles to maintain gauge.
• Perimeter tiles:
- Verges, abutments and each side of valleys and hips: Twice nail end tile in
every course.
- Eaves and top edges: Twice nail two courses of tiles or clip as appropriate.
• Fixings for tiles: Nails/clips recommended by tile manufacturer.
280
LOCAL AND GENERAL FIXING AREAS
• Definitions:
- Local areas: Bands of tiling around all edges or obstructions of each plane
of the roof. Calculate extent of each band in accordance with BS 5534,
section 5.
- General areas: Remaining areas of roof tiling.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H60
290
PLAIN ROOF TILING
MORTAR BEDDING/ POINTING
• Mortar: As section Z21, 1:3 cement:sand, with plasticizing admixtures permitted.
- Bond strength providing resistance to uplift: To BS 5531.
• Weather: Do not use in wet or frosty conditions or when imminent.
• Preparation of tiles and accessories to be bedded: Wet and drain surface water
before fixing.
• Appearance: Finish neatly as work proceeds and remove residue.
ROOF TILING EDGES/ JUNCTIONS/ FEATURES
305
GENERALLY
• Fittings and accessories: As recommended by tile manufacturer, do not
improvise.
- Exposed fittings and accessories: To match tile colour and finish.
• Cut tiles: Cut only where necessary, to give straight, clean edges.
• Flashings: Fix with or immediately after tiling. Form neatly.
325
FIRE SEPARATING WALLS
• Separating walls: Completely fill space between top of wall and underside of
tiles with mineral wool quilt to provide fire stopping.
• Boxed eaves: Completely seal air paths in plane of separating wall with wire
reinforced mineral wool, not less than 50 mm thick, fixed to rafters and carefully
cut to shape to provide fire stopping.
365
EAVES
• Underlay support: 12 mm plywood, G20/312.
- Continuous to prevent water retaining troughs.
• Gutter: Dress underlay or underlay support tray to form drip into gutter.
• Undercourse and first course tiles: Fix with tails projecting 50 mm over gutter or
to centre of gutter, whichever dimension is the lesser.
455
MORTAR BEDDED VERGES WITH NAILED UNDERCLOAK
• Underlay: Carry over full width of verge.
• Undercloak: Fibre cement sheet.
- Position: Over underlay, level with underside of tiling battens, sloping
towards verge.
- Projection: 38-50 mm beyond face of barge board.
- Fixing: Nails.
• Tiling battens: Carry onto undercloak and finish 100 mm from verge edge.
• Verge tiles:
- Bedding: Flush with undercloak on 75 mm wide bed of mortar as clause
290.
- Fixing: Nails. Do not displace or crack mortar.
525
MITRED HIPS
• Underlay: Lay courses over hip.
- Overlaps (minimum): 150 mm.
• Mitred tiles: Cut tile and a half tiles and fix to form a straight, close mitred
junction.
• Soakers: Interleave with mitred tiles. Fix by turning down over head of mitred
tiles.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H60
PLAIN ROOF TILING
555
MORTAR BEDDED HIPS
• Underlay: Lay courses over hip.
- Overlaps (minimum): 150 mm.
• Roof tiles: Cut and fix closely at hip.
• Hip irons: Galvanized steel to BS 5534, clause 4.16.1.
- Fixing: To hip rafter or hip batten with not less than two zinc coated steel
screws.
• Hip tiles:
- Manufacturer: For approval by CA. Product reference: to match existing.
- Bedding: Om Mortar, continuous to edges, solid to joints, in mortar as clause
290.
- Fixing: Where rigid masonry walls support or abut hip, secure hip tiles within
900 mm of such walls to hip rafters or supplementary hip battens with nails/
wire ties or screws.
- Bottom hip tiles: Shape neatly to align with corner of eaves and fill ends with
mortar and slips of tile finished flush.
635
MITRED VALLEYS
• Underlay: Lay strips not less than 600 mm wide centred on valleys. Overlap with
general roof underlay.
• Mitred tiles: Cut tile and a half tiles and fix to form a straight, close mitred
junction.
• Soakers: Interleave with mitred tiles. Fix by turning down over head of mitred
tiles.
660
SIDE ABUTMENTS
• Underlay: Turn up not less than 100 mm at abutments.
• Abutment tiles: Cut as necessary. Fix close to abutments.
• Soakers: Interleave with abutment tiles. Fix by turning down over head of
abutment tiles.
670
TOP EDGE ABUTMENTS
• Underlay: Turn up not less than 100 mm at abutments.
• Top course tiles: Fix close to abutments.
690
ROOF WINDOWS
• Underlay: Turn up not less than 100 mm at window surrounds under integral
flashings/soakers.
• Roof tiles: Cut as necessary and fix closely all round.
740
MORTAR BEDDED RIDGES
• Underlay: Lay courses over ridge.
- Overlap (minimum): 100 mm.
• Ridge tiles:
- Manufacturer: For approval by CA. Product reference: to match existing.
- Bedding: Continuous to edges, solid to joints, in mortar as clause 290.
- Fixing: Where rigid masonry walls support or abut ridge, secure ridge tiles
within 900 mm of such walls to ridge boards or supplementary ridge battens
with nails/ wire ties or screws.
- Gable end ridge tiles: Fill ends with mortar and slips of tiles finished flush.
• Ridge terminals:
- Manufacturer: not required. Product reference: not required.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H60
800
PLAIN ROOF TILING
CHANGE OF ROOF PITCH
• Tiling substrate work: Fix timber tilting fillet to support flashing and course of
tiles above change of pitch.
• Roof tiles: Fix courses above and below change of pitch and make weather tight
with flashing.
VERTICAL TILING EDGES/JUNCTIONS
910
BOTTOM EDGES
• Tiling substrate work: Fix timber tilting fillet to support bottom course of tiles in
correct vertical plane. Fix flashing to tilting fillet.
• Underlay: Dress over flashing.
• Undercourse and bottom course tiles: Fix with tails neatly aligned.
920
TOP EDGES
• Top course tiles: Fix under abutment and make weather tight with flashings
dressed down not less than 150 mm.
930
SIDE ABUTMENTS
• Tiling substrate work: Chase abutment wall and insert stepped flashing.
- Flashing: Return not less than 75 mm behind tiling, overlapping underlay
and battens. Turn back to form a vertical welt.
• Abutment tiles: Cut and fix neatly.
940
ANGLES WITH ANGLE TILES
• Angle tiles (purpose made): Fix right and left hand in alternate courses to break
bond.
• Adjacent tiles: Cut and fix neatly.
950
ANGLES WITH SOAKERS
• Angle tiles: Cut tile and a half tiles and fix to form a straight, close mitred
junction.
• Soakers: Interleave with angle tiles. Fix by nailing to battens at top edge.
960
JUNCTIONS WITH ROOF VERGES
• Tiling substrate work: Fix additional tiling batten parallel to and below verges.
• Course end tiles: 'Winchester cut' tile and a half tiles to angle of verge rake. Fix
to additional tiling batten with cut edge parallel to and below verge.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H62
NATURAL SLATING
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF SLATING
105A
ROOF SLATING
• Substrate: existing roof structure.
• Pitch: existing roof structure.
• Underlay: Proprietary vapour permeable brand.
• Laying: As clause 240, parallel to eaves.
• Horizontal lap (minimum): 100 mm.
• Battens: As clause 245.
- Size: to match existing.
- Fixing: As clause 265
• Slates: To BS 680-2.
- Supplier: For approval by CA.
- Size: to match existing.
- Fixing: As clause 275.
SLATING GENERALLY
210
BASIC WORKMANSHIP
• General: Fix slating and accessories to make the whole sound and weather tight
at earliest opportunity.
• Setting out: To true lines and regular appearance, with neat fit at edges,
junctions and features.
• Fixings for slating accessories: As recommended by manufacturer.
• Gutters and pipes: Keep free of debris. Clean out at completion.
220
REMOVING EXISTING SLATING
• General: Carefully remove slates, battens, underlay, etc. with minimum
disturbance of adjacent retained slating.
• Undamaged slates: Set aside for reuse.
240
UNDERLAY
• Handling: Do not tear or puncture.
• Laying: Maintain consistent tautness.
• Vertical laps (minimum): 100 mm wide, coinciding with supports and securely
fixed.
• Fixing: Galvanized steel, copper or aluminium 20 x 3 mm extra large clout head
nails.
• Eaves: Where exposed, underlay must be BS 8747, type 5U, or equivalent UV
durable type.
• Penetrations: Use proprietary underlay seals or cut underlay to give a tight,
water shedding fit around pipes and components.
• Ventilation paths: Do not obstruct.
245
BATTENS / COUNTERBATTENS - TREATED
• Timber: Sawn softwood.
- Standard: To BS 5534, clause 4.12.1.
- Permissible characteristics and defects: Not to exceed limits in BS 5534,
annex C.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H62
NATURAL SLATING
•
- Moisture content at time of fixing and covering (maximum): 22%.
Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and Wood Protection Association
Commodity Specification C8.
- Type: Organic solvent.
259
COUNTERBATTENS ON RAFTERS
• Fixing: Into rafters at not more than 300 mm centres.
265
BATTEN FIXING
• Setting out: In straight horizontal lines. Align on adjacent areas.
• Batten length (minimum): Sufficient to span over three supports.
• Joints in length: Square cut. Butt centrally on supports. Joints must not occur
more than once in any group of four battens on one support.
• Additional battens: Provide where unsupported laps in underlay occur between
battens.
• Fixing: Each batten to each support. Splay fix at joints in length.
270
BATTENS FIXED TO MASONRY
• Setting out: In straight horizontal lines. Align on adjacent areas.
• Batten length (minimum): 3 m.
• Fixing centres (maximum): 400 mm.
275
SLATE FIXING
• Setting out: Lay slates with an even overall appearance with slightly open
(maximum 5 mm) butt joints. Align tails.
• Slate thickness: Consistent in any one course. Lay with thicker end as tail.
• Ends of courses: Use extra wide slates to maintain bond and to ensure that cut
slates are as large as possible. Do not use slates less than 150 mm wide.
• Top course: Head-nail short course to maintain gauge.
• Fixing: Centre nail each slate twice through countersunk holes 20-25 mm from
side edges.
- Nails: Copper clout to BS 1202-2 or aluminium clout to BS 1202-3.
- Nail dimensions: Determine in accordance with BS 5534 to suit site
exposure, withdrawal resistance and slate supplier's recommendations.
290
MORTAR BEDDING/ POINTING
• Mortar: As section Z21, 1:3 cement:sand, with plasticizing admixtures permitted.
- Bond strength providing resistance to uplift: To BS 5534.
• Weather: Do not use in wet or frosty conditions or when imminent.
• Preparation of concrete and clay tile accessories to be bedded: Wet and drain
surface water before fixing.
• Appearance: Finish neatly as work proceeds and remove residue.
ROOF SLATING EDGES/ JUNCTIONS/ FEATURES
305
GENERALLY
• Fittings and accessories: As recommended by slate supplier, do not improvise.
- Exposed fittings and accessories: To match slate colour and finish.
• Cut slates: Cut only where necessary, to give straight, clean edges.
• Flashings: Fix with or immediately after slating. Form neatly.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H62
NATURAL SLATING
325
FIRE SEPARATING WALLS
• Separating walls: Completely fill space between top of wall and underside of
slates with mineral wool quilt to provide fire stopping.
• Boxed eaves: Completely seal air paths in plane of separating wall with wire
reinforced mineral wool, not less than 50 mm thick, fixed to rafters and carefully
cut to shape to provide fire stopping.
445
MORTAR BEDDED VERGES WITH BEDDED UNDERCLOAK
• Underlay: Carry 50 mm onto outer leaf of gable wall and bed on mortar.
• Undercloak: Slates.
- Position: Over underlay, level with underside of slating battens, sloping
towards verge.
- Projection beyond face of wall: 38-50 mm.
- Bedding: On mortar identical to that used in gable walling.
• Slating battens: Carry onto undercloak and finish 100 mm from verge edge.
• Verge slates:
- Bedding: Flush with undercloak on 75 mm wide bed of mortar as clause
290.
- Pointing: Flush profile.
- Fixing: Do not displace or crack mortar.
455
MORTAR BEDDED VERGES WITH NAILED UNDERCLOAK
• Underlay: Carry over full width of verge.
• Undercloak: Slates.
- Position: Over underlay, level with underside of slating battens, sloping
towards verge.
- Projection: 38-50 mm beyond face of barge board.
- Fixing: Nails.
• Slating battens: Carry onto undercloak and finish 100 mm from verge edge.
• Verge Slates:
- Bedding: Flush with undercloak on 75 mm wide bed of mortar as clause
290.
- Pointing: Flush profile.
- Fixing: Do not displace or crack mortar.
555
MORTAR BEDDED TILE HIPS
• Underlay: Lay courses over hip.
- Overlaps (minimum): 150 mm.
• Roof slates: Cut and fix closely at hip.
• Hip irons: Galvanized steel to BS 5534, clause 4.16.1.
- Fixing: To hip rafter or hip batten with not less than two zinc coated steel
screws.
• Hip tiles:
- Manufacturer: For approval by CA. Product reference: to match existing.
- Bedding: Continuous to edges, solid to joints, in mortar as clause 290.
- Fixing: Where rigid masonry walls support or abut hip, secure hip tiles within
900 mm of such walls to hip rafters or supplementary hip battens with nails/
wire ties or screws as recommended by hip tile manufacturer.
- Bottom hip tiles: Shape neatly to align with corner of eaves and fill ends with
mortar and slips of tile finished flush.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H62
NATURAL SLATING
660
SIDE ABUTMENTS
• Underlay: Turn up not less than 100 mm at abutments.
• Abutment slates: Cut as necessary. Fix close to abutments.
• Soakers: Interleave with abutment slates. Fix by turning down over head of
abutment slates.
670
TOP EDGE ABUTMENTS
• Underlay: Turn up not less than 100 mm at abutments.
• Top slate courses: Fix close to abutments.
690
ROOF WINDOWS
• Underlay: Turn up not less than 100 mm at window surrounds under integral
flashings/ soakers.
• Roof slates: Cut as necessary and fix closely all round.
730
LEAD ROLL RIDGES
• Underlay: Lay courses over ridge.
- Overlap (minimum): 150 mm.
• Top slate courses: Fit close to timber roll.
740
MORTAR BEDDED TILE RIDGES
• Underlay: Lay courses over ridge.
- Overlap (minimum): 150 mm.
• Ridge tiles:
- Manufacturer: For approval by CA. Product reference: to match existing.
- Bedding: Continuous to edges, solid to joints, in mortar as clause 290.
- Fixing: Where rigid masonry walls support or abut ridge, secure ridge tiles
within 900 mm of such walls to ridge boards or supplementary ridge battens
with nails/ wire ties or screws.
- Gable end ridge tiles: Fill ends with mortar and slips of tiles finished flush.
• Ridge terminals:
- Manufacturer: not required. Product reference: not required.
800
CHANGE OF ROOF PITCH
• Slating substrate work: Fix timber tilting fillet to support flashing and courses of
slates above change of pitch.
• Roof slates: Make weather tight with flashing.
• Courses above change of pitch: Fix undercourse and first course slates.
• Courses below change of pitch: Cut top two courses as necessary to maintain
gauge.
• Head-nail top course.
VERTICAL SLATING EDGES/ JUNCTIONS
910
BOTTOM EDGES
• Slating substrate work: Fix timber tilting fillet to support bottom course of slates
in correct vertical plane. Fix flashing to tilting fillet.
• Underlay: Dress over flashing.
• Undercourse and bottom course slates: Fix with tails neatly aligned.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H62
NATURAL SLATING
920
TOP EDGES
• Top slate courses: Fix under abutment and make weather tight with flashings
dressed down not less than 150 mm.
930
SIDE ABUTMENTS
• Slating substrate work: Chase abutment wall and insert stepped flashing.
- Flashing: Return not less than 75 mm behind slating, overlapping underlay
and battens. Turn back to form a vertical welt.
• Abutment slates: Cut and fix neatly.
950
ANGLES WITH SOAKERS
• Angle slates: Cut extra wide slates and fix to form a straight, close mitred
junction.
• Soakers: Interleave with angle slates. Fix by nailing to battens at top edge.
960
JUNCTION WITH ROOF VERGES
• Slating substrate work: Fix additional slating batten parallel to and below verges.
• Course end slates: Splay cut slate and a half width slates to angle of verge rake.
Fix to additional slating batten with cut edge parallel to and below verge.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H71
LEAD SHEET COVERINGS/FLASHINGS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
110A
LEAD ROOFING
• Base: Existing timber boarding. Preparation included in this section: Make good
as clause 620.
• Underlay: 220 g/m² needle punched nonwoven polyester geotextile.
• Type of lead:
- Rolled to BS EN 12588.
- Machine cast and BBA certified
- Sand cast
• Thickness: code to suit joint spacing as recommended within BS 6915: 2001
• Longitudinal joints: To match existing or welted seams as clause 770. Spacing:
as existing roofing,
• Ridge/Hip detail: to match existing
240A
RIDGE/HIP ROLLS TO LEAD ROOFS
• Core: Rounded timber as clause 650. Size: to match existing, tapering to a flat
base 30 mm wide. Fix to ridge/hip board with brass or stainless steel screws at
not more than 600 mm centres.
• Capping: Lead of the same code as the roof, in lengths not exceeding existing.
Intersections with rolls in the roofing to be lead welded. Laps: Not less than 150
mm for ridges, 100 mm for hips. Cover: Dress roofing sheets up roll to form (to
match existing detail) Wings of capping to extend not less than 75 mm on to
roof.
• Fixing: Nail each sheet at underlapping end and secure wings with one copper
or stainless steel clip as clause 720 per roofing bay and at each lap.
322
SOAKERS FOR MITRED HIPS
• Lead:
- Thickness: 1.25 or 1.32mm (code 3).
• Dimensions:
- Length: Slate/ tile gauge + lap + 25 mm.
- Underlaps: Not less than 150 mm.
324
SOAKERS FOR MITRED VALLEYS
• Lead:
- Thickness: 1.25-1.50 mm (code 3).
• Dimensions:
- Length: Slate/length of valley mitre + 25 mm.
- Underlaps: Not less than 150 mm.
326
SOAKERS FOR SWEPT VALLEYS
• Lead:
- Thickness: 1.25 or 1.32mm (code 3).
• Dimensions: To suit sweep and pitch of tiles. Allow adequate length for turning
over head of cut tiles and width for underlay to first standard tile on each side.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H71
LEAD SHEET COVERINGS/FLASHINGS
470
FLASHINGS Generally
• Lead:
- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24mm (code 5).
• Dimensions:
- Lengths: Not more than 1500 mm.
• Fixing: Fixing: Nail top edge at 150 mm centres and welt edge. Clip bottom edge
(clause 715) at laps and 500 mm centres.
472
CHIMNEY FLASHINGS
• Front apron:
- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24mm (code 5).
- Dimensions: Length: Width of chimney plus not less than 150 mm underlap
to each side flashing. Upstand: Not less than 75 mm. Cover to roof: Not
less than 150 mm.
- Fixing: Lead wedges into bed joint.
• Lead soakers:
- Thickness: 1.25 or 1.32mm (code 3).
- Dimensions: Length: Slate/ tile gauge + lap + 25 mm. Upstand: Not less
than 75 mm. Underlap: Not less than 100 mm.
• Lead step flashings:
- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24mm (code 5).
- Dimensions: Lengths: Not more than 1500mm. End to end joints: Laps of
not less than 100 mm. Front end: Turn 75 mm around chimney over apron.
Cover: Overlap to soaker upstands of not less than 65 mm.
- Fixing: Lead wedges at every course.
• Lead back gutter:
- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24mm (code 5).
- Dimensions: Length: Width of chimney plus not less than 100 mm overlap to
each side flashing. Upstand: Not less than 100 mm. Gutter sole: Not less
than 150 mm. Cover up roof: Not less than 225 mm.
• Lead back gutter cover flashing:
- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24mm (code 5).
- Dimensions: Length: Width of chimney plus not less than 100 mm overlap to
each side flashing. Cover: Overlap to back gutter upstand of not less than
75 mm.
- Fixing: Lead wedges into bed joint.
478
CHIMNEY DAMP PROOF COURSE
• Position: Not less than 150 mm above roof finish
• Lead:
- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24mm (code 5).
• Protection: Fully coated with high build bitumen based paint on both sides of
surfaces to be embedded
• Dimensions:
- Plan area of chimney plus laps on perimeters: turned down over stack
externally with not less than 75 mm overlap to upstand, through flue lining
and turned up 25 mm all round internally.
• Laying: On a thin even bed of wet mortar.
- Next layer of overlying construction: Bed on wet mortar without delay and
finish joint neatly.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H71
LEAD SHEET COVERINGS/FLASHINGS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK
510
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
• Standard: To BS 6915 and latest edition of 'Rolled lead sheet. The complete
manual' published by the Lead Sheet Association.
• Fabrication and fixing: To provide a secure, free draining and weather tight
installation.
• Operatives: Trained in the application of lead coverings/ flashings. Submit
records of experience on request.
• Measuring, marking, cutting and forming: Prior to assembly wherever possible.
• Marking out: With pencil, chalk of crayon. Do not use scribers or other sharp
instruments without approval.
• Bossing and forming: Straight and regular bends, leaving sheets free from
ripples, kinks, buckling and cracks.
• Solder: Use only where specified.
• Sharp metal edges: Fold under or remove as work proceeds.
• Finished work: Fully supported, adequately fixed to resist wind uplift but also
able to accommodate thermal movement without distortion or stress.
- Protection: Prevent staining, discolouration and damage by subsequent
works.
516
LEADWELDING
• In situ lead welding: Is permitted, subject to completion of a 'hot work permit'
form and compliance with its requirements.
520
LEAD SHEET
• Production method:
- Rolled, to BS EN 12588, or
- Machine cast, Agrément certified and to code thicknesses with a tolerance
(by weight) of ±5%, or
- Sand cast, from lead free from bitumen, solder, other impurities, inclusions,
laminations, cracks, air, pinholes and blowholes; to code thicknesses but
with a tolerance (by weight) of ±10%.
• Identification: Labelled to show thickness/ code, weight and type.
610
SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES
• Condition: Dry and free of dust, debris, grease and other deleterious matter.
620
PREPARATION OF EXISTING TIMBER SUBSTRATES
• Remedial work: Adjust boards to level and securely fix. Punch in protruding
fasteners and plane or sand to achieve an even surface.
• Defective boards: Give notice.
• Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of covering. Give notice if greater
than 16%.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H71
LEAD SHEET COVERINGS/FLASHINGS
630
PLYWOOD UNDERLAY
• Standard: Manufactured to an approved national standard and to BS EN 636,
section 7 (plywood for use in humid conditions).
• Sheet size: 2400 or 1200 x 1200 mm and 6 mm thick.
• Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of covering. Give notice if greater
than 16%.
• Laying: Cross joints staggered and a 0.5 to 1 mm gap between boards.
• Fixing: With 25 mm annular ringed shank copper or stainless steel nails, at 300
mm grid centres over the area of each sheet and at 150 mm centres along
edges, set in 10 mm from perimeter edges.
- Nail heads: Set flush or just below the surface.
640
TIMBER FOR USE WITH LEADWORK
• Quality: Planed, free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack
(ambrosia beetle excepted).
• Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of covering. Give notice if greater
than 16%.
• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and Wood Protection
Association Manual - Commodity Specification C8.
650
UNDERLAY
• Handling: Prevent tears and punctures.
• Laying: Butt or overlap jointed onto a dry substrate.
- Fixing edges: With copper or stainless steel staples or clout nails.
- Do not lay over roof edges but do turn up at abutments.
• Wood core rolls: Fixed over underlay.
• Protection: Keep dry and cover with lead at the earliest opportunity.
FIXING LEAD
705
HEAD FIXING LEAD SHEET
• Top edge: Secured with two rows of fixings, 25 mm and 50 mm from top edge of
sheet, at 75 mm centres in each row, evenly spaced and staggered.
• Sheets less than 500 mm deep: May be secured with one row of fixings, 25 mm
from top edge of sheet and evenly spaced at 50 mm centres.
710
FIXINGS
• Nails to timber substrates: Copper clout nails to BS 1202-2, or stainless steel
(austenitic) clout nails to BS 1202-1.
• Shank type: Annular ringed, helical threaded or serrated.
• Shank diameter: Not less than 2.65 mm for light duty or 3.35 mm for heavy duty.
- Length: Not less than 20 mm or equal to substrate thickness.
• Screws to concrete or masonry substrates: Brass or stainless steel to BS 1210,
tables 3 or 4.
- Diameter: Not less than 3.35 mm.
- Length: Not less than 19 mm.
- Washers and plastic plugs: Compatible with screws.
• Screws to composite metal decks: Self tapping as recommended by the deck
and lead manufacturer/ supplier for clips.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H71
LEAD SHEET COVERINGS/FLASHINGS
715
CLIPS
• Material:
- Lead clips: Cut from sheets of same thickness/ code as sheet being
secured.
- Copper clips: Thickness: 0.7 mm.
- Temper: BS EN 1172, designation R220 in welts, seams and rolls, R240
elsewhere; dipped in solder if exposed to view.
- Stainless steel clips: Thickness: 0.46 mm.
- Grade: BS EN 10088, 1.4301(304) terne coated if exposed to view.
• Dimensions:
- Width: 50 mm where not continuous.
- Length: To suit detail.
• Fixing clips: Secure each to substrate with two fixings not more than 50 mm
from edge of lead sheet.
• Fixing lead sheet: Welt clips around edges and turn over 25 mm.
760
CONTINUOUS CLIPS
• Material:
- Lead continuous clips: Thickness: As sheet.
- Copper continuous clips: Thickness: 0.70 mm.
- Temper: BS EN 1172, designation R220 in welts, seams and rolls, R240
elsewhere.
- Stainless steel continuous clips: Thickness: 0.46 mm.
- Grade: BS EN 10088, 1.4301(304).
• Dimensions:
- Width: To suit detail.
• Fixing clips: Secure at 200 mm centres.
• Fixing lead sheet: Welt edge around continuous clip and dress down.
765
CONTINUOUS CLIPS FOR CROSS JOINTS IN ROOFING
• Lead continuous clips: 50 mm wide, cut from sheets of same thickness/ code as
sheet being secured.
• Fixing clips: Lead weld top edge of clips to underlap sheet, 50 mm from lower
edge of overlap.
• Fixing lead sheet: Welt edge around continuous clip and dress down.
770
WEDGE FIXING INTO JOINTS/ CHASES
• Joint/ chase: Rake out to a depth of not less than 25 mm.
• Lead: Dress into joint/chase.
- Fixing: Lead wedges at not more than 450 mm centres, at every change of
direction and with at least two for each piece of lead.
• Sealant: proprietary sealant for purpose.
- Application: As section Z22.
780
WEDGE FIXING INTO DAMP PROOF COURSE JOINTS
• Joint: Rake/ cut out under damp proof course to a depth of not less than 25 mm.
• Lead: Dress lead into joint.
- Fixing: Lead wedges at not more than 450 mm centres, at every change of
direction and with at least two for each piece of lead.
• Sealant: proprietary sealant for purpose.
- Application: As section Z22.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
H71
LEAD SHEET COVERINGS/FLASHINGS
JOINTING LEAD
840
WOOD CORED ROLL JOINTS WITHOUT SPLASH LAP
• Core: Timber.
- Size: 45 x 45 mm round tapering to a flat base 25 mm wide.
- Fixing to substrate: Brass or stainless steel countersunk screws at not more
than 300 mm centres.
• Undercloak: Dress half way around core.
• Copper or stainless steel clips. Fix to core at not more than 450 mm centres. Do
not restrict thermal movement of the undercloak.
• Overcloak: Dress around core with edge welted around ends of clips, finishing 5
mm clear of main surface.
845
WOOD CORED ROLL JOINTS WITH SPLASH LAP
• Core: Timber.
- Size: 45 x 45 mm round tapering to a flat base 25 mm wide.
- Fixing to substrate: Brass or stainless steel countersunk screws at not more
than 300 mm centres.
• Undercloak: Dress three quarters around core.
- Fixing: Nail to core at 150 mm centres for one third length of the sheet
starting from the head.
• Overcloak: Dress around core and extend on to main surface to form a 40 mm
splash lap.
880
WELTED JOINTS
• Joint allowance: 50 mm overlap and 25 mm underlap.
• Copper or stainless steel clips: Fix to substrate at not more than 450 mm
centres.
• Overlap: Welt around underlap and clips and lightly dress down.
970
FINISHING
• Finishing agent: Patination oil.
• Location: new exposed lead work.
• Application: As soon as practical, apply a smear coating evenly in one direction
and in dry conditions.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J21
MASTIC ASPHALT ROOFING / INSULATION / FINISHES
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF COATING / PAVING
110
WARM ROOF COATING refer to project drawings
• Substrate: Existing covering or project specific. .
- Preparation: Remove existing chippings and make good existing asphalt.
• Vapour control layer: As clause 395. .
• Insulation: Rigid urethane foam as clause 420 or project specific.
- Attachment: As clause 680.
• Overlay: Not required.
• Separating layer (loose laid): Glass fibre tissue, 50 – 70g/m².
- Laps (minimum): 50 mm.
• Coating: Mastic asphalt to BS 6925.
- Type: R988/ B.
- Nominal thickness: 20 mm, two coat application.
• Surface protection: Chippings as clause 475. Skirtings protected with solar
reflective paint as clause 495.
• Accessories: Edge trims as clause 345, ventilators as clause 485.
190A
MASTIC ASPHALT SKIRTINGS GENERALLY: TO PARAPET WALLS:
• Base: existing structure
• Separating layer: As clause 630
• Keying: Steel lathing as clause 380.
• Coating: Roofing asphalt: BS 6925
- Type R988/1/B, Kitemark certified.
- Application: 2 coats.
- Thickness: Not less than total of 19 mm
• Surface protection: Solar reflective paint as clause 780.
210
ROOF PERFORMANCE
• General: Secure, free draining and completely weather tight.
260
BONDING COMPOUND(S)
• Unless specified otherwise oxidised bitumen to BS 3690-1, grade as
recommended by the manufacturer of the material to be bonded for the
conditions and type of surface. Heat and lay at a temperature sufficient to
ensure bonding over the whole surface. Do not overheat.
• For bonding of and to heat sensitive insulation materials use cold bonding
bituminous adhesive recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
• Types: Recommended by mastic asphalt manufacturer.
ANCILLARY PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
320
PRIMER
• Type: Recommended by mastic asphalt manufacturer.
• Manufacturer: - Contractor’s choice
- Product reference: Contractor’s choice
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J21
MASTIC ASPHALT ROOFING / INSULATION / FINISHES
330
TIMBER FOR TRIMS, ETC
• Quality: Planed. Free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (except
ambrosia beetle damage).
• Moisture content at time of covering (maximum): 22%.
• Preservative treatment: To Wood Protection Association Commodity
Specification C8 - Preservative/fire retardant treatment to NBS section Z12
345
EDGE TRIMS
• Type: GRP
• Manufacturer: Compatible with felt roofing system
• Colour: Black
• Length (maximum): 3 m.
• Accessories: 90 degree angles & jointing spigots
• Fixings: Non ferrous or rust proof screws at centres in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
360
PLYWOOD OVERLAY TO METAL DECK
• Plywood: To BS EN 636-2.
- Quality: Naturally durable timber, free from preservatives.
• Thickness: to match existing or minimum of 19mm.
395
VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER
• Type: Reinforced bitumen sheet to BS 8747.
• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.
- First layer: Class S2P3.
- Second layer: Class S1P1
425
RIGID URETHANE FORM WARM DECK INSULATION
• Standard: Rigid polyisocyanurate form (PIR) roof board to BS 4841-3
• Manufacturer: Contractors choice
• Density: min 40kg/m³
• Edges: Rebated
• Thickness: As BS4841-3, Annex B, table b1.
• Facing: Composite cork overlay
455
SAND FOR RUBBING
• Type: Clean, coarse sand from natural deposits, free from loam.
- Size: Passing a 600 micron sieve and retained on a 212 micron sieve.
460
STONE BALLAST
• Type: Washed, round aggregate.
• Size: Graded 20-40 mm, free from fines and sharps.
470
ROOF PAVING
• Project specific
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J21
485
MASTIC ASPHALT ROOFING / INSULATION / FINISHES
ROOF VENTILATORS
• Manufacturer: Alumasc Exterior Building Products Ltd, White House Works,
Bold Road, Sutton, St Helens, Merseyside WA9 4JG. Tel: 01744 648400, Fax:
01744 648401. Email: [email protected] Web: www.alumascexteriors.co.uk (or equal approved).
- Product reference: Eurovent.
• Size: project specific.
EXECUTION GENERALLY
510
ADVERSE WEATHER
• Unfinished areas of the roof: Keep dry.
• Work in severe or continuously wet weather: Suspend or provide and maintain
effective temporary cover over the working area.
• Unavoidable wetting: Minimise and make good damage.
525
PREPARING EDGES OF EXISTING MASTIC ASPHALT
• Single coat applications:
- Cut edges: Soften and clean.
• Two coat applications:
- Cut edges: Soften and remove half depth of softened material for width of
not less than 75 mm.
- Jointing: Lapped between new and existing material at prepared edges.
• General:
- Heating: Torching not permitted.
- Timing: Immediately prior to laying mastic asphalt.
610
SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES
•
•
•
620
Generally:
- Secure, even textured, clean and dry, and free from frost.
- Horizontal surfaces: To even falls within tolerances.
Preliminary work: Complete, including:
- Formation of upstands and kerbs.
- Penetrations/ Outlets.
- Chases: Not less than 25 x 25 mm.
- External angles: Chamfered where required to maintain full thickness of
mastic asphalt.
- Movement joints.
Moisture content and stability: Must not impair integrity of roof.
REMOVING EXISTING MASTIC ASPHALT
• Areas to be replaced: refer to project drawings.
• Existing roof: Do not damage.
• Timing: Only remove sufficient mastic asphalt as will be replaced and
waterproofed on same day.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J21
MASTIC ASPHALT ROOFING / INSULATION / FINISHES
630
MAKING GOOD EXISTING MASTIC ASPHALT
• Existing items to be removed: as per project drawings.
• Dust, dirt, debris, moss, plants and grease: Remove.
• Defective areas of mastic asphalt: Soften and carefully cut out.
- Hammers, chisels, etc.: Do not use to cut cold mastic asphalt.
- Substrate: Clean and dry.
- Separating membrane: Make good.
- Mastic asphalt: Patch level with existing surface in two coats, the top coat
lapped 75 mm (minimum) on to existing asphalt and to half its depth.
644
KEYING TO NEW BRICKWORK/ DENSE BLOCKWORK
• Joints: Flush pointed.
• Surface preparation: Apply proprietary high bond primer.
646
KEYING TO EXISTING BRICKWORK/ DENSE BLOCKWORK
• Joints: Sound and flush pointed.
• Surface preparation: Clean and apply proprietary high bond primer.
648
KEYING TO METAL SURFACES
• Surface preparation: Clean and apply proprietary high bond primer.
649
APPLYING STEEL LATHING TO VERTICAL/ SLOPING refer to project drawings
• Placing: Long way of mesh is horizontal and pitch of horizontal strands is
sloping upwards away from background.
• Jointing: Wire tie butt joints between sheets at 75 mm centres.
• Method of fixing: Stainless steel staples.
- Perimeter edges: 75 mm centres.
- General areas (maximum): 150 mm vertical and horizontal centres.
660
JOINTS IN RIGID BOARD SUBSTRATES
• Cover strip: Lay centrally over substrate joints before laying vapour control
layers or coverings. Adhere to substrate with bonding compound along edges
only.
670
LAYING VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER
• Attachment: Secure.
- Bond: Continuous over whole surface, with no air pockets.
- Appearance on completion: Flat with no wrinkles.
• Laps: Seal using materials and method recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
• Joints in second layer (if any): Stagger by half a sheet.
• Upstands, kerbs and other penetrations: Enclose edges of insulation. Fully seal
at abutment by bonding or taping.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J21
680
MASTIC ASPHALT ROOFING / INSULATION / FINISHES
INSTALLING WARM ROOF INSULATION
•
•
•
•
•
690
Setting out:
- Long edges: Fully support and run at right angles to Structure. .
- End edges: Adequately support.
- Joints: Butt together.
- End joints: Stagger.
- Margin to walls, upstands, pipes and other projections (minimum): 25 mm.
Bedding: Full bed of bonding compound.
Mechanical fixing: Determined by contractor.
Completion: Boards must be in good condition, well fitting and with no springing,
flexing or rocking.
Infill material: Mastic asphalt when laying roofing. .
MARGIN INFILL TO ANGLE FILLETS IN WARM ROOFS
• Infill material: Mastic asphalt when laying roofing
ASPHALTING
720
DELIVERY
• Condition of mastic asphalt as delivered to site:
- Hot-prepared, do not remelt on site, or
- Blocks: Remelt on site, temperature of material not to exceed 230°C.
735
LOCALIZED HEATING
• Blowlamps and gas torches: Use only types with controlled gradual heating
during laying, removal and repair of mastic asphalt.
740
APPLICATION
• Laying mastic asphalt:
- Standard: To BS 8218.
• Mastic asphalt coats:
- Apply in bays to even thickness. Do not use re-heated asphalt.
- Full thickness: Maintain around external angles, at junctions and tuck-ins.
- Fillets at internal angles: Solid in two layers fully fused to asphalt coating.
- Previously laid coats: Protect whilst exposed.
- Successive coats: Apply without delay and within same working period.
Stagger joints between bays in consecutive coats (minimum): 75 mm.
- Finish: Even surface, smooth and free from imperfections.
- Completion: During final floating operation, whilst asphalt is still warm, apply
sand to horizontal surfaces and rub-in well using wooden float.
• Blowing: Pierce and make good affected areas while mastic asphalt is still at
working temperature.
• Condition of contact edges of previously laid bays: Warm and clean.
• Condition at completion: Fully sealed, waterproof and free draining.
750
MASTIC ASPHALT SKIRTINGS AND VERTICAL WORK
• Top edge: Tuck into chase or groove and, maintaining full thickness of asphalt,
form splayed top to shed water away from substrate.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J21
MASTIC ASPHALT ROOFING / INSULATION / FINISHES
775
INSTALLING MOVEMENT JOINTS
• Location: Centre over structural movement joint, and bed to exact finished level.
- Bedding: Proprietary epoxy mortar.
- Fixing: Chemical anchor/ Screw fixing kit. .
790
INSTALLING ROOF VENTILATORS
• Setting out: Position evenly over roof area.
- Centres (maximum): One vent per 20m² of roof.
- Distance from roof edges: 2 m.
• Holes for ventilators: Cut neatly to suit size of vents through: Insulation and
vapour control layer.
• Skirts and substrate below vents: Prime before asphalting.
SURFACING
876
CRIMPING
• Finish: Whilst asphalt is still sufficiently plastic, roll surface with indenting or
crimping roller.
• Indentations: Regular and even.
940
COMPLETION
• Roof areas: Clean.
- Outlets: Clear.
• Work necessary to provide a weather tight finish: Complete.
• Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.
• Completed mastic asphalt: Do not damage. Protect from petroleum based
solvents and other chemicals, traffic and adjacent or high level working.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J30
LIQUID APPLIED TANKING / DAMP PROOFING
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING
130
COLD APPLIED DAMP PROOFING
• Substrate: In situ concrete. .
• Primer: RIW Flexiseal Primer 1 coat, brush, roller or spray applied. Primer to
be allowed to become tacky before overcoating or allowed to dry if used on
bituminous surfaces. Coverage per coat (minimum): 10m²/litre. Coating
material:
• Manufacturer: RIW Limited, Arc House, Terrace Road South, Binfield,
Bracknell, Berkshire RG42 4PZ. Tel: 01344 397 777. Fax: 01344 862010. Email: [email protected] Web: www.riw.co.uk (or equal approved). Product
reference: RIW Flexiseal.
• Number of coats: 2no coats, brush, roller or spray applied. (1st coat - Grey,
2nd coat Black).
• Coverage per coat (minimum): 2m²/kg. .
• Reinforcement: Not required.
• Blinding: Not required .
EXECUTION
205
SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATE
• Preliminary work: Complete including:
- Chases.
- External angles.
- Formation of upstands and kerbs.
- Movement joints.
- Penetrations/ Outlets.
• Surface: Sound, even textured, clean and dry.
COATINGS
210
COATING APPLICATION
• Adjacent surfaces exposed to view in finished work: Protect.
• Primer: Uniform, continuous coverage.
• Coatings:
- Apply in dry atmospheric conditions when primer is tacky / dry.
- Uniform, continuous coverage.
- Firmly adhered to substrate and free from imperfections.
- Prevent damage to finished coating.
• Penetrations: Completely impervious.
• Final covering: Apply as soon as possible after coating has hardened.
260
JUNCTIONS WITH DPCs
• DPCs: Clean, all edges fully exposed.
• Coverage: Fully coat dpc and overlap adjacent surfaces by 50 mm.
270
BLINDING
• Coatings: Blind whilst still tacky.
• Surplus material: Remove when coatings are completely dry.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J31
LIQUID APPLIED WATERPROOF ROOF COATINGS
To be read with any preliminaries and / or general conditions.
TYPE(S) OF COATING
110
ROOF COATINGS
• Substrate Preparation: Ensure all surfaces are sound, clean and dry. They
should be free from defects, visible dampness, fungal growth, dust, dirt particles
and any other form of surface contamination.
• For quality requirements of specific substrate and preparation methods please
refer to the product data sheets.
• Waterproof Coating: Aliphatic Polyurethane
• Waterproofing System Manufacturer: Sika Liquid Plastics
• Sika House, Miller Street, Preston, PR1 1EA
• Primer Reference: See product data sheet or contact Sika Liquid Plastics
• Coating/System Reference: Decothane Delat 25 Waterproofing System
• Localised Reinforcement: Available if required to accommodate specific details

Application (1): Embedment Coat: Decothane Base Coat @ 1.25 litre/m2
• Overall Reinforcement: Sika Reemat Premium Glass fibre reinforcing mat
• Application (2): Intermediate Coat: Decothane Top Coat @ 0.75Litre/m2
• Application (3): Finish Coat: Decothane Top Coat @ 1Litre/m2
• Note: Vertical Details & Sloping Areas (+ 10 degrees): Apply Decothane Detail
Coat @ 0.75 litre/m2 in lieu of Decothane Top Coat.
• Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 2.3mm (finished)
• Colour: As per standard range
• Additional Requirements:
• The following should be considered prior to treatment:
• Immediately prior to application, ensure that all surfaces sound, clean, free from
surface contaminants and are dry.
• To be installed by accredited installers only.
EXECUTION GENERALLY
410
ADVERSE WEATHER
• Do not apply coatings:
• In wet conditions or at temperatures below 2°C, unless otherwise permitted by
coating manufacturer.
• In high winds (speeds in excess of 7 m/s) unless adequate temporary
windbreaks are erected adjacent to working area.
• Unfinished areas of roof: Keep dry.
420
SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATE
• Substrates generally:
• Secure, clean, dry, smooth, free from frost, contaminants, loose material, voids,
protrusions and organic growths.
• Compatible with coating system.
• Preliminary work: Complete including:
• Formation of upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and
expansion joints.
• Fixing of battens, fillets, anchoring plugs / strips.
• Moisture content and stability: Must not impair integrity of roof.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
J31
LIQUID APPLIED WATERPROOF ROOF COATINGS
EXISTING SUBSTRATES
For quality requirements of specific substrate and preparation methods please refer
to the product data sheets.
NEW SUBSTRATES
For quality requirements of specific substrate and preparation methods please refer
to the product data sheets.
ROOF COATING SYSTEM
720
APPLYING PRIMERS/ CONDITIONERS
• All relevant surfaces should be primed in accordance with product data sheets.
• Coverage per coat (minimum):
• Surface coverage: Brushed well in to ensure local or full area coverage
according to type.
• Coats: Allow to dry before overcoating.
760
APPLICATION OF ROOF COATINGS
• Thickness: Monitor by taking wet/ dry film thickness readings.
• Continuity: Maintain full thickness of coatings around angles, junctions and
features.
• Rainwater outlets: Form with watertight joints.
• Drainage systems: Do not allow liquid coatings to enter piped rainwater or foul
systems.
• Edge trims: Apply coatings over horizontal leg of trim and into recess.
COMPLETION
910
INSPECTION
• Coating surfaces: Check when cured for pinholes and discontinuities.
• Defective areas: Apply another coating.
940
COMPLETION
• Roof areas: Clean.
• Outlets: Clear.
• Flashings: Dressed into place.
• Work necessary to provide a weathertight finish: Complete.
• Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.
• Completed coatings: Protect against damage.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
To be read wily Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF DRY LINING
125A
METAL STUD PARTITIONS 1/2 HOUR CONSTRUCTION (SINGLE LAYER
PLASTERBOARD EACH SIDE)
• Manufacturer and reference: Gyproc Metal stud partition (OR EQUAL
APPROVED) Studs: 70 S 50 at 600 mm centres.
• Head condition: Fix to structural soffit where compartment wall / generally. Fix
to suspended ceiling K10/335 where specified on the drawings. Deflection
allowance: Up to 15mm.
• Lining(s):12.5mm tapered edge Wallboard to each side. Fixing: As clause 591a.
• Cavity insulation: Type: Rockwool Acoustic Partition Slab mineral wool
insulation. Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY.
Tel: 01656 868 400. Fax: 01656 868257. Web: www.rockwool.co.uk Thickness:
67mm. Density: Not less than 60 kg/cu m.
• Sealant: As clause 510.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A for wallpaper finishing or skim
coat plaster finish for painted finishing. Primer/sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc Drywall
Primer.
• Accessories: Angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements:
- Metal angle beads to be provided on all external corners.
- Use Gypframe Service Support Plate & 18mm plywood in areas where heavy
duty wall mounted fixtures are required.
- Allow for pattressing to all electrical back boxes.
- Bearers for Toprail at nominal 2.1m high, height subject to CA confirmation
- Bearers for Dado Rail at nominal 0.9m high, height subject to CA confirmation
125B
METAL STUD PARTITIONS 1/2 HOUR CONSTRUCTION (DOUBLE LAYER
PLASTERBOARD EACH SIDE
• Location: 'Party' wall between interview rooms
• Manufacturer and reference: Gyproc Metal stud partition (OR EQUAL
APPROVED) Studs: 70 at 600 mm centres.
• Head condition: Fix to structural soffit where compartment wall / generally. Fix
to suspended ceiling K10/335 where specified on the drawings. Deflection
allowance: Up to 15mm.
• Lining(s): 2 layers of 12.Smm tapered edge Wallboard to each side. Fixing: As
clause 590.
• Cavity insulation: Type: Rockwool Acoustic Partition Slab mineral wool
insulation. Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 ENY.
Tel: 01656 868 400. Fax: 01656 868 257. Web: www.rockwool.co.uk
Thickness: 67mm. Density: Not less than 60 kg/cu m.
• Sealant: As clause 510
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A for wallpaper finishing, or
skim coat plaster finish for painted finishing, Primer/sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc
Drywall Primer
• Accessories: Angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements:
- Metal angle beads to be provided on all external corners.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
-
Use Gypframe Service Support Plate & 18mm plywood in areas where heavy
duty wall mounted fixtures are required.
Allow for pattressing to all electrical back boxes
Bearers for Toprail at nominal 2.1m high, height subject to CA confirmation
Bearers for Dado Rail at nominal 0.9m high, height subject to CA confirmation
125C
METAL STUD PARTITIONS 1 HOUR CONSTRUCTION
• Manufacturer and reference: Gyproc Metal stud partition (OR EQUAL
APPROVED).
• Studs: 70 al600 mm centres.
• Head condition: Fix to structural soffit where compartment wall/generally. Fix to
suspended ceiling K10/335 where specified on the drawings. Deflection
allowance: Up to 15mm.
• Lining(s): 12.5mm tapered edge Fireline Wallboard to each side. Fixing: As
clause 590.
• Cavity insulation: Type: Rockwool Acoustic Partition Slab mineral wool
insulation. Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY Tel:
01656 868 400. Fax: 01656 868 257. Web: www.rockwool.co.uk
• Thickness: 67mm, Density: Not less than 60 kg/cu m.
• Sealant As clause 510
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A for wallpaper finishing, or
skim coat plaster finish for painted finishing, Primer/sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc
Drywall Primer
• Accessories: Angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements:
- Metal angle beads to be provided on all external corners.
- Use Gypframe Service Support Plate & 18mm plywood in areas where heavy
duty wall mounted fixtures are required.
- Allow for pattressing to all electrical back boxes
- Bearers for Toprail at nominal 2.1m high, height subject to CA confirmation
- Bearers for Dado Rail at nominal 0.9m high, height subject to CA confirmation
128A
METAL STUD PARTITION(S) - ACOUSTIC
• Drawing reference(s):
• Manufacturer: British Gypsum Limited, East Leaks, Loughborough,
Leicestershire LE12 6JT. Tel: 0870 5456 123 Fax: 0870 5456 356.
• Product reference: Gypwall QUIET. Nominal thickness (excluding finishes):
200mm. Performance criteria:
- Fire resistance to BS 476: Part 22: 90 minutes.
- Sound Insulation: Rw 62 dB.
- Partition duty to BS 5234: Parts 1 and 2: Severe.
- Maximum height based on limiting deflection of L/240 at 200Pa: 7500mm.
• Timber sole plates: 38mm (nominal) x 50 mm, if required.
• Framing: Two independent Gypframe metal stud frames.
• Studs: Gypframe 48 S 60 located in pairs at 600mm centres and at wall
abutments.
• Floor channel: Gypframe 50 DC 60,
• Head channel: Gypframe 50 DC 60.
• Bracing between stud pairs: Gypframe 99 FC 50 channel at 1200mm vertical
centres fixed with Gypframe wafer head screws.
• Fixing strap: Gypframe GFS1 to support horizontal joints in face layer boards.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-
Head condition: To structural steels.
Deflection allowance: TBC, up to 25mm downward deflection using 50 DC 60.
Lining: 2 no. 15mm Gyproc Sound Bloc, sheet width 1200mm, to both sides of
framing.
Fixing: As clause 591A.
Screws: 25 & 42 mm Gyproc Drywall.
Cavity insulation: 50mm Isover APR 1200.
Sealant: As clause 516A.
Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A or skim coat plaster as clause
681A.
Accessories: Gyproc Beads / Stops as clause 695.
Other requirements:
Metal angle beads to be provided on all external corners.
Use Gypframe Service Support Plate & 18mm plywood in areas where heavy
duty wall mounted fixtures are required.
Allow for pattressing to all electrical back boxes
Bearers for Toprail at nominal 2.1m high, height subject to CA confirmation
Bearers for Dado Rail at nominal 0.9m high, height subject to CA confirmation
185A
PAD AND DAB FIXED DRY LINING FOR WALLS GENERALLY
• Background: Various, refer to construction drawing for location and
background.
• Installation: As clause(s) 620.
• Lining: 12.5mm Wallboard.
• Acoustic sealant: As clause 510.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 670 for wallpaper finishing, or skim
coat plaster finish as clause 680 for painted finishing. Primer/sealer: 1 coat of
Gyproc Drywall Primer (OR EQUAL APPROVED).
• Accessories: Angle beads to be used on all corners.
205A
TIMBER STUD PARTITIONS 1/2 HOUR FIRE RESISTING CONSTRUCTION
(SINGLE LAYER PLASTERBOARD BOTH SIDES)
• Background: 75x50mm Timber studs at 600mm centres.
• Lining: 1 layers of 12.5mm thick tapered edge Wallboard lo both sides, as
clause 435 Fixing: As clause 610, using Nails.
• Cavity Insulation: Type: Rockwool Acoustic Partition Slab mineral wool
insulation. Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY.
Tel: 01656 868 400. Fax: 01656 868 257. Web: www.rockwool.co.uk (OR
EQUAL APPROVED) Thickness: 67mm.
• Density: Not less than 60 kg/cu m.
• Sealant: As clause 510.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A or skim coat plaster finish for
painted finishing. Primer/sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc Drywall Primer (OR EQUAL
APPROVED).
• Accessories: Galvanised angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements:
- Use service support plate & 18mm plywood in areas where heavy duty wall
mounted fixtures are required.
- Allow for pattressing to all electrical back boxes
- Bearers for Toprail at nominal 2.1m high, height subject to CA confirmation
- Bearers for Dado Rail at nominal 0.9m high, height subject to CA confirmation
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
205B
TIMBER STUD PARTITIONS 1/2 HOUR FIRE RESISTING CONSTRUCTION
(DOUBLE LAYER PLASTERBOARD BOTH SIDES)
• Location: 'Party' wall between interview rooms
• Background: 75x50mm Timber studs at 600mm centres.
• Lining: 2 layers of 12.5mm thick tapered edge Wallboard to both sides, as
clause 435.
• Fixing: As clause 610, using Nails.
• Cavity insulation: Type: Rockwool Acoustic Partition Slab mineral wool
insulation. Manufacturer. Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY.
Tel: 01656 868 400. Fax: 01656 868 257. Web: www.rockwool.co.uk (OR
EQUAL APPROVED)
• Thickness: 67mm. Density: Not less than 60 kg/cu m.
• Sealant: As clause 510.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A or skim coat plaster finish as
681A for painted finishing.
• Primer / sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc Drywall Primer (OR EQUAL APPROVED)
• Accessories: Galvanised angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements:
- Use service support plate & 18mm plywood in areas where heavy duty wall
mounted fixtures are required.
- Allow for pattressing to all electrical back boxes
- Bearers for Toprail at nominal 2.1m high, height subject to CA confirmation
- Bearers for Dado Rail at nominal 0.9m high, height subject to CA confirmation
205C
TIMBER STUD PARTITIONS 1 HOUR FIRE RESISTING CONSTRUCTION
• Drawing reference(s): For location refer to drawing.
• Background: 75x50mm Timber studs at 600mm centres.
• Lining: 1 layers of 12.5mm thick tapered edge Fireline Wallboard to both sides,
as clause 435 Fixing: As clause 610, using Nails
• Cavity insulation: Type: Rockwool Acoustic Partition Slab mineral wool
insulation. Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY.
Tel: 01656 868400. Fax: 01656 868 257. Web: www.rockwool.co.uk (OR
EQUAL APPROVED)
• Thickness: 67mm. Density: Not less than 60 kg/cu m.
• Sealant: As clause 510.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A or skim coat plaster finish as
clause 681A for painted finishing,
• Primer / sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc Drywall Primer (OR EQUAL APPROVED)
• Accessories: Galvanised angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements:
- Refer to the Architects drawings for special requirements Use service support
plate & 18mm plywood in areas where heavy duty wall mounted fixtures are
required.
- Allow for pattressing to all electrical back boxes
- Bearers for Toprail at nominal 2.1m high, height subject to CA confirmation
- Bearers for Dado Rail at nominal 0.9m high, height subject to CA confirmation
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
225A
SUSPENDED PLASTERBOARD CEILING SYSTEM FOR CEILINGS/BULKHEADS
(DOUBLE GRID)
• Manufacturer: British Gypsum Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED).
• Product reference: British Gypsum CasoLine MF Suspended Ceiling System.
• Structural soffits: existing structure.
• Suspension system: MF5IMF6/MF7 supporting gridwork, MF9 connecting clips.
• Hanger type: MF12/MGA1 suspension hangers (MF12 cleats to be omitted if
ceiling suspended from timber joists). Top fixings: Contractor's choice, to
comply with section Z20.
• Primary grid centres: 1200 mm. Hanger centres: 1200 mm.
• Secondary grid centres: 450.
• Linings: 12.5mm Gyproc Wallboard or 12.5mm Gyproc Fireline if fire resistance
required (see project drawings).
• Insulation: Not required.
• Access units: project specific if required.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A for wallpaper finishing, or
skim coat plaster finish as clause 681A for painted finishing.
• Primer / Sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc Drywall Primer.
• Accessories: Galvanised angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements: project specific.
235A
SUSPENDED PLASTERBOARD CEILING SYSTEM FOR CEILINGS (SINGLE
GRID)
• Manufacturer: British Gypsum Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED).
• Product reference: British Gypsum GypLyner Ceiling,
• Structural soffits: existing structure.
• Suspension system:
• GL1 single grid system with GL8 perimeter track
• Hanger type: Gypframe GL2 Fixing Bracket I Gypframe Gl9 Fixing Bracket for
use when fixing to concrete soffit.
• Gypframe GL5 Timber Connector I Gypframe Gl6 Timber Connector for fixing
to timber joists. Top fixings: Contractor's choice, to comply with section Z20.
• Grid centres: 450 mm. Hanger centres: 1200 mm.
• Linings: 12.5mm Gyproc Wallboard or 12.5mm Gyproc Fireline if fire resistance
required (see project drawings).
• Insulation: Not required.
• Access units: project specific if required.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671Aor skim coat plaster finish as
clause 681A for painted finishing.
• Primer / Sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc Drywall Primer.
• Accessories: Galvanised angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements: project specific.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
245
CEILING LINING ON TIMBER PLASTERBOARD CEILING, 30 minute fire rated
• Background: timber joist.
• Metal resilient (acoustic) bars: At 450 mm centres.
• Linings: 12.5 mm Gyproc Wallboard (OR EQUAL APPROVED).
• Fixings: Gypframe SureFix Bar (or equal approved) fixed to the underside of
timber joists/trusses, running at 90˚ to them using 36mm Gyproc Drywall
Screws. Bars at 450mm maximum centres for 12.5mm thick boards.
• The first and last rows of fixing bar to be fixed as close to the perimeter wall as
possible. Ends of the bars to be overlapped by minimum 75 mm, over a joist.
(Surefix bars may be omitted if just a plasterboard lining over a suspended
ceiling) Boards to be fixed at right angles to the fixing bar with end joints
staggered, with screws at 230 mm centres in the field of the board and at 150
mm centres at board ends using 25 mm Gyproc Drywall screws.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A or skim coat plaster finish as
clause 681A for painted finishing.
• Primer Sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc Drywall Primer, if being decorated (OR EQUAL
APPROVED).
• Accessories: Galvanised angle beads to be used on all corners.
• Other requirements: project specific.
245A
CEILING LINING ON TIMBER PLASTERBOARD CEILING, 60 minute fire rated
• Background: timber joist.
• Meal resilient (acoustic) bars: At 450 mm centres.
• Linings: 2 layers 12.5mm Fireline, staggered joints between first and second
linings.
• Fixings: Gypframe SureFix Bar (OR EQUAL APPROVED) fixed to the
underside of timber joists/trusses, running at 90˚ to them using 36mm Gyproc
Drywall Screws, Bars at 450mm maximum centres for 12.5mm thick boards.
• The first and last rows of fixing bar to be fixed as close to the perimeter wall as
possible. Ends of the bars to be overlapped by minimum 75 mm, over a joist,
(SureFix bars may be omitted if just a plasterboard lining over a suspended
ceiling) Boards to be fixed at right angles to the fixing bar with end joints
staggered, with screws at 230 mm centres in the field of the board and at 150
mm centres at board ends using 25 mm Gyproc Drywall screws.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A or skim coat plaster finish as
clause 681A for painted finishing.
• Primer Sealer: 1 coat of Gyproc Drywall Primer, if being decorated (OR EQUAL
APPROVED).
• Accessories: Galvanised angle beads to be used on all corners.
255C
STRUCTURAL STEEL CASING ON METAL FRAMING, 60 minute fire rating
• Drawing reference(s): project specific
• Structural member(s): steel columns and beams
• Manufacturer and reference: British Gypsum Limited, GypLyner ENCASE (OR
EQUAL APPROVED).
• Type: 3 or 4 sided casing as clauses 491A and 491B
• Fire resistance of complete encasement assembly to BS 476:Part 21: 60
minutes or project specific (see project drawing~).
• Framing system: Gypframe GL1 channels, GL3 channel connectors. GA2
angles, and GL10 framing clips as recommended for the purpose by the board
manufacturer.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
•
•
•
•
255D
Lining: 2 layers Gyproc Fireline 12.Smm
Fixing: As clause 591A and manufacturer's instructions.
Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A or skim coat plaster finish as
clause 681A, refer to project drawings for choice.
Accessories: as required for casing system
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMELESS CASING, 60 minute fire rating
• Drawing reference(s): project specific.
• Structural member(s): steel columns and beams.
• Manufacturer and reference: British Gypsum Limited, FIRECASE (OR EQUAL
APPROVED).
• Type: 3 or 4 sided casing.
• Fire resistance of complete encasement assembly to BS 476:Part 21: 60
minutes or project specific (see project drawings).
• Lining: 15mm Glasroc Firecase S.
• Fixing: As per manufacturer’s instructions.
• Finishing: Taped seamless finish as clause 671A or skim coat plaster finish as
clause 681A, refer to project drawings for choice.
• Accessories: as required for casing system
INSTALLATION
335
ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS
• Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to:
• Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports.
• Fixtures, fittings and service outlets. Mark framing positions clearly and
accurately on linings.
• Board edges and lining perimeters, as recommended by board manufacturer to
suit type and performance of lining.
355
ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS FOR FIXTURES AND FITTINGS
• Provide or ensure provision of accurately positioned and securely fixed framing
to support fixtures, fittings and services. After fixing boards, mark positions of
framing for following trades.
365
ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS FOR BOARD EDGES AND PERIMETERS
• Provide or ensure provision of additional framing, accurately positioned and
securely fixed, to give full support to board edges and lining perimeters in
accordance with board manufacturer's recommendations.
375
NEW WET LAID BASES
• Provide or ensure provision of a continuous strip of bituminous felt DPC or
other approved material under partitions/freestanding wall linings, cut to the full
width of the partition/lining.
385
SERVICE PENETRATIONS
• Ensure that fire resistance and other specified performance requirements are
not impaired by service penetrations. In particular:
• Form framed openings accurately for grouped services, ducts, etc. allowing for
associated fire barriers.
• Provide insulation backings to recessed electrical outlets and switches as
recommended by the plasterboard manufacturer.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
PLASTERBOARD GENERALLY
405
PLASTERBOARD GENERALLY
• To BS 1230: Part 1, types 1 to 5 with exposed surface and edge profiles
suitable to receive the specified finish.
435
DRY LINING GENERALLY
• Fixing, jointing and finishing materials and accessories, where not specified
otherwise, to be as recommended by the board manufacturer.
• Handle and store materials in accordance with BS 8212, section 5. DO not use
damaged boards.
• Use operatives properly trained for dry lining work and who have attended a
recognised training scheme.
• Fix boards only in areas which have been made weathertight. Prevent frost
damage.
• Cut boards neatly and accurately without damage to core or tearing of paper
facing. Keep cut edges to a minimum and position at internal angles wherever
possible. Mask with bound edges of adjacent boards at external corners.
• Fix boards securely and firmly to suitably prepared and accurately levelled
backgrounds. Set heads of fastenings fn a depression: do not break paper or
gypsum core. Finish neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from bowing
and abrupt changes of level.
445
CEILINGS
• Sequence: Fix boards to ceilings before dry lined walls and partitions.
• Orientation of boards: Fix with bound edges at right angles to supports and with
ends staggered in adjacent rows.
• Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.
455
METAL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS/WALL LININGS
• Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb.
• Frame/Stud positions: Equal centres to suit specified linings, maintaining
sequence across openings.
• Additional studs: To support vertical edges of boards.
• Fixing centres at perimeters (maximum): 600 mm.
• Openings: Form accurately.
• Door sets: Use sleeved or boxed metal studs and / or suitable timber framing to
achieve strength grade requirements for framing assembly and adequately
support weight of door.
• Services penetrations: Allow for associated fire stopping.
455A
METAL STUD FRAMING
• Install using components, accessories and methods recommended by the
board manufacturer.
• Set out floor/head channels and perimeter studs to give a framework which is
accurately aligned with a true vertical plane. Fix securely at all perimeters at not
more than 600mm centres.
• Position studs at equal centres to suit specified linings, maintaining sequence
across openings. Provide additional studs as necessary to ensure support to all
vertical edges of boards.
• Accurately form openings to receive doorsets using Gypfrarne metal studs and
suitable timber framing or Gypframe metal studs sleeved with Gypframe
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
channel as necessary to achieve the strength grade requirements of the
framing assembly and adequately support the weight of the door.
475
METAL FURRINGS FOR WALL LININGS
• Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb.
• Vertical furring positions: Equal vertical centres to suit specified linings,
maintaining sequence across openings. Position adjacent to angles and
openings.
• Additional vertical furrings: To support vertical edges of boards and at junctions
with partitions.
• Horizontal furring positions: To provide continuous support to edges of boards.
• Adhesive bedding to furrings:
• Dabs: Length 200 mm (minimum). Located at ends of furrings and thereafter at
450 mm (maximum) centres.
• Junctions with partitions: Continuous bed with no gaps across cavity.
491A
GYP FRAME METAL FRAMING (OR EQUAL APPROVED) FOR THREE SIDED
GYPLYNER STEEL ENCASEMENT
• Fix continuous lengths of Gypframe GA2 angle onto face of innermost steel
flanges Or background using fire resistant fixings at 600 mm centres.
Alternatively, use shot fired fixings at same centres.
• Push fit Gypframe GL10 framing clips onto edges of outermost steel flanges at
800 mm max centres.
• Push fit Gypframe GL1 channel onto each row of Gypframe GL10 clips.
• Install Gypframe GFT1 fixing 'T' or short sections of Gypframe GL1 channel to
support ends of boards in single layer linings, and GFS1 fixing straps to support
ends of boards in the face layer of multiple layer linings.
• Stagger joints between layers in multiple layer boarding.
491B
GYPFRAME METAL FRAMING (OR EQUAL APPROVED) FOR FOUR SIDED
GYPLYNER STEEL ENCASEMENT
• Push fit Gypframe GL10 framing clips onto edge of each steel flange at 800 mm
max centres.
• Push fit Gypframe GL1 channel onto each row of Gypframe GL10 clips.
• Install Gypframe GFT1 fixing 'T' or short sections of Gypframe GL1 channel to
support ends of boards in single layer linings, and GFS1 fixing straps to support
ends of boards in the face layer of multiple layer linings.
• Stagger joints between layers in multiple layer boarding
505
INSTALLING MINERAL WOOL INSULATION
• Fitting insulation: Closely butted joints and no gaps. Use fasteners to prevent
slumping or displacement.
• Services:
• Electrical cables overlaid by insulation: Sized accordingly.
• Ceilings: Cut insulation around electrical fittings, etc.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
510
SEALING GAPS AND AIR PATHS
• Location of sealant: To perimeter abutments and around openings.
• Pressurized shafts and ducts: At board-to-board and board-to-metal frame
junctions.
• Application: To clean, dry and dust free surfaces as a continuous bead with no
gaps,
• Gaps greater than 6 mm between floor and underside of plasterboard: After
sealing, fill with jointing compound.
516A
ACOUSTIC SEALANT
• Manufacturer and reference: British Gypsum Limited, Gyproc Sealant.
• Location: At junctions with adjoining structure, and at other airpaths.
• Apply as a continuous bead to clean, dry, dust free surfaces, leaving no gaps.
• After application of sealant, bulk fill gaps between floor and underside of
plasterboard using Gyproc joint compound.
526D
CAVITY BARRIERS (TWIN FRAME PARTITION)
• Maintain continuity of fire barrier formed by perimeter channels using short
lengths of close fitting Gyproc plasterboard screwed into the web across joints
in channel sections and around service holes, except where:
• The partitions abut plasterboard linings or masonry.
• Timber sole or head plates are fitted.
• Form continuous vertical barriers using 12.5mm Gyproc plasterboard cut to a
good fit and screw fixed to each of a pair of studs, and spanning the whole
cavity width.
555A
FIRE STOPPING
• Seal any gaps at junctions of linings and cavity barriers with perimeter
abutments, service penetrations, etc. using tightly packed stone mineral wool or
fire resisting I intumescent sealant, to prevent penetration of smoke and flame.
560A
JOINTS BETWEEN BOARDS
• Gyproc plasterboards: Lightly butt boards together.
• Square edged Gyproc plasterboards to be finished Gyproc Joint cement
• Glasroc fibre reinforced gypsum boards: Lightly butt boards together.
565
VERTICAL JOINTS
• Joints: Centre on studs.
• Partitions: Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs.
• Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.
570A
HORIZONTAL JOINTS
• Horizontal joints will not be permitted in surfaces exposed to view except where
the height of partition/lining exceeds the maximum available length of board.
Agree positions of joints where not specified.
• For two layer boarding, stagger joints between layers by at least 600mm. If
previous layer of plank plasterboard, stagger joints between layers by 300mm.
• Ensure that edges of boards are supported by additional framing. For two layer
boarding framing must support the outer layer.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
591a
FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO METAL SUPPORTS
• Partitions/linings/casings:
• Face layer: Fix securely 10 all supports at maximum 300 mm centres (reduced
to 200 mm at external angles where recommended by the board manufacturer).
• Previous layer of plank plasterboard: Install with long edges at right angles 10
studs, and fix securely to each stud using two screws.
• Other previous layers: Fix securely to supports around the perimeter of each
board at maximum 300 mm centres.
• Ceilings: Fix securely to all supports at maximum 230 mm centres (reduced to
150 mm at board ends and at lining perimeters where recommended by the
board manufacturer).
• Fix working from the centre of each board. Position screws not less than 13mm
from cut edges and 10 mm from bound edges of boards. Set heads in a
depression: do not break paper or gypsum core.
595
DEFLECTION HEADS
• Do not fix boards to head channels when a deflection head is specified.
610
FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO TIMBER
• Fixing to timber: Securely at the following centres (maximum):
- Nails: 150 mm.
- Screws to partitions / wall linings: 300 mm. Reduce to 200 mm at external
angles.
- Screws to ceilings: 230 mm,
- Position of nails/ screws from edges of boards (minimum):
- Bound edges: 10 mm.
- Cut unbound edges: 13 mm.
• Position of nails/screws from edges of timber supports (minimum): 6 mm.
620
FIXING PLASTERBOARD WITH ADHESIVE DABS
• Selling out boards: Accurately aligned and plumb.
• Fixing to substrates: Securely using adhesive dabs.
• Adhesive dab spacings for each board:
• Horizontally: One row along top edge and one continuous dab along bottom
edge.
• Vertically: One row along each edge and thereafter at intermediate spacings to
suit size of board: Thickness (mm) Width (mm) Dab centres (mm):
- 9.5 (t) 1200 (w) 400 (dc)
- 9.5/12.5 (t) 900 (w) 450 (dc)
- 12.5 (t) 1200 (w) 600 (dc)
• Adhesive dab dimensions (width x length): At least 50-75 mm x 250 mm
• Position of dabs from edges/ends of boards (minimum): 25 mm,
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
FINISHING
650
LEVEL OF DRY LINING ACROSS JOINTS
• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Joint deviations: Measure from faces of adjacent boards using methods and
straight edges (450 mm long with feet / pads) to BS 8212, clause 3.3.5.
• Tapered edge joints: Permissible deviation (maximum) across joints when
measured with feet resting on boards: 3 mm.
• External angles: Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 4 mm,
Internal angles: Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 5 mm.
670
SEAMLESS JOINTING TO PLASTERBOARDS
• Cut edges of boards: Lightly sand to remove paper burrs.
• Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointing compound
and cover with continuous lengths of paper tape, fully bedded.
• Protection of edges / corners: Reinforce external angles, stop ends, etc. with
specified edge/angle bead.
• Finishing: Apply jointing compound. Feather out each application beyond
previous application to give a flush, smooth, seamless surface.
• Nail/screw depressions: Fill with jointing compound to give a flush surface.
• Minor imperfections: Remove by light sanding.
671A
TAPED SEAMLESS FINISH TO PLASTERBOARD
• Manufacturer: British Gypsum Ltd.
• Joint compound: One or more of the following Gyproc products:
- Easi Fill
- Easi FilI 45
- Joint Filler
- Joint Cement
- Ready Mix Joint Cement.
- ProMix LITE Joint Cement.
• Joints/gaps/internal corners: Gyproc Joint Tape.
• External corners: angle beads
• Primer/sealer: apply before decorating
• Lightly sand cut edges of boards to remove paper burrs.
• Fill all Joints, gaps and internal angles with joint compound and cover with
continuous lengths of tape, fully bedded. Reinforce external angles, stop ends,
etc. with the specified bead/corner tape.
• When set, cover with joint compound, feathered out to give a flush, smooth,
seamless surface.
• Spot nail/screw depressions with joint compound to give a flush surface.
• Fill minor indents. After joint, angle and spotting treatments have dried, lightly
sand to remove any minor imperfections.
• Apply specified primer/sealer to give a continuous consistent texture to surface
of boards.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K10
PLASTERBOARD DRY LINING / PARTITIONS / CEILINGS
681A
SKIM COAT PLASTER FINISH
• Manufacturer and reference: British Gypsum Ltd, Thistle (or equal approved)
• Thickness: 2 mm.
• Reinforcement:
• Joints/gaps/internal corners: Gyproc Joint Tape.
• External corners: Thistle Thin Coat Angle Bead or Thin Coat Mini Mesh Bead.
• Edges: Thistle Thin-Coat Plaster Stop Bead to all door and window surrounds.
• Fill and tape all joints except where coincident with metal beads.
• Trowel / float to a tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes
of level or trowel marks.
695
INSTALLING BEADSI STOPS
• Cutting: Neatly using mitres at return angles.
• Fixing: Securely using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line
and level, ensuring full contact of wings with substrate.
• Finishing: After joint compounds/ plasters have been applied, remove surplus
material while still wet from surfaces of beads exposed to view.
725
REPAIRS TO EXISTING PLASTERBOARD
• Filling small areas with broken cores: Cut away paper facing, remove loose
core material and fill with jointing compound.
• Finish: Flush, smooth surface suitable for redecoration.
• Large patch repairs: Cut out damaged area and form neat hole with rectangular
sides. Replace with matching plasterboard.
• Fixing: Use methods to suit type of dry lining, ensuring full support to all edges
of existing and new plasterboard.
• Finishing: Fill joints, tape and apply jointing compound to give a flush. smooth
surface suitable for redecoration.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K11
RIGID SHEET FLOORING / SHEATHING / SARKING / LININGS / CASINGS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
140
HOARDING
• Drawing: As the University of the West of England Contractors Pack.
• Plywood: Manufactured to an approved national standard and 10 BS EN 636,
section 8 (plywood for exterior conditions).
• Paint finish to suit location.
140A
HIGH SECURITY PARTITIONS
• Drawing: As per Drawing Issue Sheet.
• Location: Providing separation between Cash Handling / Storage Areas,
Overnight / External Attack of forming a perimeter of 'high risk' Secure.
• Base: 100x50mm softwood stud framing at 400mm centres and 600mm max.
vertical centres. Walls to be full height (structure to structure) and framing
securely fixed on all edges to suitable structure.
• Partition Heights: up to 2400, 2400 to 2800, 2800 to 3000.
• Panel construction: Attack Face: Sandwich construction to consist of 1 layer of
18mm plywood (outer face); Expanded 3396 raised mesh; 1 layer of 12mm
plywood. Secure Side: 1 layer of 12mm plywood .Rockwool Acoustic Slab (OR
EQUAL APPROVED) mineral wool insulation 67mm thick.
• Plywood: Manufactured to an approved national standard and to BS EN 636,
section 7 (plywood for humid conditions). Thickness: 12mm and 18mm Edges:
Butt jointed. Long edges running along supports.
• Fixing: 12mm plywood - 50mm No.8 screws at 200mm max centres; 18mm
plywood - 75mm No.8 screws at 200mm max. centres (alternate centres to inner
layer).
• Finishing: 12.5mm British Gypsum Wallboard (OR EQUAL APPROVED) nailed
or drywall screwed to plywood in accordance with clause K60/610 and taped
seamless finish as clause K10/671A to both sides of the partition.
140B
SECURE PARTITION GENERALLY timber stud (see 140F for metal stud)
• Drawing: As per Drawing Issue Sheet
• Location: Walls separating secure and public areas or forming Secure rooms
which do not required an overnight attack face.
• Base: 100x50mm softwood stud framing at 400mm centres (max) horizontal and
600mm (max) vertical centres, Walls to be full height (structure to structure) and
framing securely fixed on all edges to suitable structure.
• Partition Heights: up to 2400, 2400 to 2800, 2800 to 3000
• Panel construction: 1 layers of 12mm plywood to both sides, Finished with
12,5mm Wallboard nailed or drywall screwed to plywood in accordance with
clause K10/610 and finished with taped seamless as clause K10/671A,
Rockwool Acoustic Slab (OR EQUAL APPROVED) mineral wool insulation
67mm thick.
• Plywood: Manufactured to an approved national standard and to BS EN 636,
section 7 (plywood for humid conditions), Edges: Butt jointed, Long edges
running along supports.
• Fixing: 200mm maximum centres along edges of boards and maximum 200mm
centres along Intermediate supports with 50mm No. 8 screws,
• Finishing: British Gypsum Wallboard (OR EQUAL APPROVED) taped seamless
finish as clause K10/671A.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K11
RIGID SHEET FLOORING / SHEATHING / SARKING / LININGS / CASINGS
140C
TEMPORARY SECURITY HOARDING.
• Drawing: As per Drawing Issue Sheet
• Location: To form temporary closure to openings within external envelope (i.e.,
temporary)
• Base: 100x50mm softwood stud framing at 400mm centres and 600mm vertical
centres, Panel construction: Attack Face: Sandwich construction to consist of 1
layer of 18mm plywood (outer face): Expanded 3396 raised mesh: 1 layer of
12mm plywood. Secure Side: 1 layer of 12mm plywood. Plywood layers to be
screwed to stud framing.
• Plywood: Manufactured to an approved national standard and to BS EN 636,
section 8 (plywood for exterior conditions). Thickness: 12mm Edges: Butt
jointed. Long edges running along supports.
• Fixing: 200mm maximum centres along edges of boards and maximum 200mm
centres along intermediate supports w1th 50mm No. 8 screws.
• Height: N/A
140D
TEMPORARY EXTERNAL SECURITY ENCLOSURE
• Drawing: As per Drawing Issue Sheet
• Location: To form an external enclosure between secure area of site and any
public area or contractors working area.
• Base: 100x50mm softwood stud framing at 400mm centres and 600mm vertical
centres. Panel construction: Attack Face: Corrugated steel cladding on
sandwich construction to consist of 1 layer of 18mm plywood (outer face):
Expanded 3396 raised mesh: 1 layer of 12mm plywood. Secure Side: 1 layer of
12mm plywood.
• Plywood layers to be screwed to stud framing. Plywood: Manufactured to an
approved national standard and to BS EN 636, section 8 (plywood for exterior
conditions). Thickness: 12mm Edges: Butt jointed. Long edges running along
supports.
• Fixing: 200mm maximum centres along edges of boards and maximum 200mm
centres along intermediate supports with 50mm No. 8 screws.
• Height: To be not less than 2400mm high provide a lean to roof of the same
construction back to the external wall. To be clad in corrugated steel panels
coach bolted though the partition.
140E
SECURE PARTITION GENERALLY metal stud
• Drawing: As per Drawing Issue Sheet
• Location: Walls separating secure and public areas or forming standard Secure
rooms which do not required an overnight attack face.
• Base: Gyproc Metal stud (OR EQUAL APPROVED) partition 72mm frame at
400mm centres max. horizontal and 600mm max. vertical centres. Walls to be
full height (structure to structure) and framing securely fixed on all edges to
suitable structure.
• Partition Heights: up to 2400, 2400 to 2800, 2800 to 3000 Panel construction: 1
layers of 12mm plywood to both sides. Finished with 12.5mm Wallboard nailed
or drywall screwed to plywood in accordance with clause Kl0/610 and finished
with taped seamless as clause K1 01671A.Rockwool Acoustic Slab (OR EQUAL
APPROVED) mineral wool insulation 67mm thick.
• Plywood: Manufactured to an approved national standard and to BS EN 636,
section 7 (plywood for humid conditions). Thickness: 12mm Edges: Butt jointed.
Long edges running along supports.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K11
RIGID SHEET FLOORING / SHEATHING / SARKING / LININGS / CASINGS
•
•
Fixing: 200mm maximum centres along edges of boards and maximum 200mm
centres along intermediate supports with 50mm No. 8 screws.
Finishing: British Gypsum Wallboard (OR EQUAL APPROVED) taped seamless
finish as clause K10/671A.
141
CAVITY BARRIER ABOVE COUNTER LINE FALSE BULKHEAD
• Location: Above counter line where a false bulkhead is required.
• Base: 75 x 50 mm softwood framework.
• Cladding: 18mm MDF (class 0).
• Finishing: Prepared and painted white mat emulsion as M60/110A
315A
PLYWOOD FLOORING refer to project drawings
• Substrate: timber floor joists.
• Additional supports: As clause 930.
• Flooring: Plywood manufactured to an approved national standard.
• Type: Finnish birch plywood or approved alternative.
• Grade: appropriate to situation, seek guidance from manufacturer.
• Nominal thickness/number of plies: project specific, not less than 20mm.
• Edges: Tongued and grooved all edges.
• Other requirements: project specific.
• Setting out: Long edges running across joists. End joints central over joists and
staggered.
• Fixing to joists:
- Fasteners: 50 mm x B gauge wood screws into pilot hole.
• Fixing centres (maximum): Around floor perimeter and along short edges of
each board: 150 mm. Along intermediate supports: 300 mm,
• Fixing distance from edges: 25 mm from long edges and minimum 10 mm from
short edges,
• Joint treatment: none.
• Expansion provision:
- Clear expansion gap around perimeter of floor area and upstands: 1.5 mm
per metre run of floor, with a minimum gap of 10 mm.
- Intermediate expansion/ movement joints: As recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
325
PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING refer to project drawings
• Substrate: timber floor joists.
• Additional supports: As clause 930.
• Flooring: Particleboard to BS EN 312, Type P5.
• Thickness: project specific, not less than 22mm.
• Edges: Tongued and grooved all edges.
• Other requirements: none.
• Setting out: Long edges running across Joists. End joints central over joists and
staggered,
• Fixing to joists:
• Fasteners: 50 mm x 8 gauge wood screws into pilot hole.
• Fixing centres (maximum): Around floor perimeter and along short edges of
each board: 200 mm. Along intermediate supports: 400 mm.
• Fixing distance from edges: 25 mm from long edges and minimum 10 mm from
short edges.
• Joint treatment: none.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K11
RIGID SHEET FLOORING / SHEATHING / SARKING / LININGS / CASINGS
•
•
•
Expansion provision:
Clear expansion gap around floor perimeter of floor area and any upstands: 1.5
mm per metre run of floor, with a minimum gap of 10 mm.
Intermediate expansion movement joints: As recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
WORKMANSHIP
910
INSTALLATION GENERALLY
• Timing: Building to be weathertight before fixing boards internally.
• Moisture content of timber supports (maximum): 18%.
• Joints between boards: Accurately aligned, of constant width and parallel to
perimeter edges.
• Methods of fixing, and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified otherwise.
930
ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS
• Additional studs, noggins and battens:
• Provision: In accordance with board manufacturer's recommendations and as
follows: Tongue and groove jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported
perimeter edges. Butt jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported edges.
- Size: Not less than 50 mm wide and of adequate thickness.
- Quality of timber: As for adjacent timber supports.
- Treatment (where required): As for adjacent timber supports.
940
BOARD MOISTURE CONTENT AND CONDITIONING
• Moisture content of boards at time of fixing: Appropriate to end use.
• Conditioning regime: Submit proposals.
960
FIXING GENERALLY
• Boards/sheets: Fixed securely to each support without distortion and true to line
and level.
• Fasteners: Evenly spaced in straight lines and, unless otherwise recommended
by board manufacturer, in pairs across joints.
• Distance from edge of board/sheet: Sufficient to prevent damage.
• Surplus adhesive: Removed as the work proceeds.
980
OPEN JOINTS
• Perimeter joints, expansion joints and joints between boards: Free from plaster,
mortar droppings and other debris.
• Temporary wedges and packings: Removed on completion of board fixing.
990
ACCESS PANELS
• Size and position: Agree before boards are fixed.
• Additional noggins, battens, etc: Provide and fix as necessary.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K30
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF PARTITION
130A
RELOCATABLE PARTITIONS (non fire rated)
• Drawing reference(s): Manufacturer's detailed drawings.
• Manufacturer and reference: Project Specific
• Fire rating Non fire rated.
• Partition height up to 2400, 2400 to 2800, 2800 to 3000.
• Solid panels 12.5mm square edged plasterboard (wall board).
• Head conditions: Fix to structural soffit where compartment wall. Fix to framing
of suspended ceiling K10/345 generally. Deflection allowance: Up to 15mm.
• Frames/heads/sills/trims: Type(s): Refer to manufacturer’s standard details and
drawings.
• Insulation Sound rating: Glazed partitions RW 40db. Glazed c/w doorset RW
29db.
• Finish/colour: refer to Project drawings.
• Glazed panels: Glazing as clause 480. Type(s): 6mm toughened safety glass.
• Doorsets as clause(s): refer to Section L20 and Project Door Schedule.
• Cable management/outlets: Project Specific.
• Fixings at abutments: Refer to manufacturers standard drawings.
• Accessories: n/a.
• Other requirements: Refer to Project drawings for decorative film requirement to
glazing.
130B
RELOCATABLE PARTITIONS (fire rated)
• Drawing reference(s): Manufacturer's detailed drawings.
• Manufacturer and reference: Project Specific
• Fire rating ½ hour fire resistance.
• Partition height: up to 2400. 2400 to 2800, 2800 to 3000.
• Solid panels 12.5mm square edged plasterboard (wall board).
• Head conditions: Fix to structural soffit where compartment wall. Fix to framing
of suspended ceiling K10/345 generally. Deflection allowance: Up to 15mm.
• Frames/heads/sills/trims: Type(s): Refer to manufacturers standard details and
drawings.
• Insulation Sound rating: Glazed partitions RW 40db. Glazed c/w doorset RW
29db.
• Finish/colour: refer to Project drawings
• Glazed panels: Glazing as clause 480. Type(s): 6mm toughened safety glass
with 6mm clear fire rated glass to opposite side.
• Doorsets as clause(s): refer to Section L20 and Project Door Schedule
• Cable management/outlets: Project Specific.
• Fixings at abutments: Refer to manufacturers standard drawings
• Accessories: n/a
• Other requirements: Refer to Project drawings for decorative film requirement to
glazing
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K30
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
130C
RELOCATABLE PARTITIONS(S) FRAMELESS GLASS PARTITIONING
• Drawing reference(s): Manufacturer's detailed drawings.
• Manufacturer and reference: Project Specific
• Fire resistance of complete system: non-fire rated
• Fire rating for panels: non-fire rated
• Sound insulation: approx 33db depending on glass type
• Partition height: specific to project, up to 3.0m.
• Head condition: 25mm powder coated below ceiling channel, screw fixed to
underside of suspended ceiling.
• Floor condition: [25mm x 25mm powder coated u-channel, screw fixed to floor].
• Deflection allowance: None.
• Framing: All powder-coated sections to be from manufacture's standard colour
range
• Joint treatment: vertical silicone joint.
• Glass type(s): 12mm toughened glass.
• Manifestation: refer to Project drawings.
• Doorsets: frameless glazed doors: hinged or sliding, refer to project door
schedule.
• Doors: frameless glazed doors.
• Ironmongery: refer to project ironmongery schedule.
GENERALLY
340
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
• General: Before, during and after installation, maintain temperature and
humidity levels similar to those that will prevail after building is occupied.
375
NEW WET LAID BASES
• Dpcs: Install under full width of partitions.
- Material: Bituminous sheet or plastics.
INSTALLATION
410
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
• Setting out: Plumb, true to line and level, and free from bowing, undulations and
other planar distortions.
• Joints: Align accurately with no lipping.
• Stability: Fix securely, with additional supports where necessary at perimeters.
• Moisture and thermal movement of framing / panels: Make adequate allowance.
425
INSTALLING RELOCATABLE PARTITIONS
• Site dimensions: Check before installation, Give notice of discrepancies.
• Perimeter abutments: Accommodate deviations whilst maintaining partition
system performance. Form make up / closer pieces accurately around
projections and features.
• Customisation: Do not cut or otherwise alter framing / panels on site, except
where shown on drawings.
• Intermediate Joints in exposed frame members and trims: Keep to a minimum.
• Electrical continuity and earth bonding: To BS 7671 (The lEE Wiring
Regulations)
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K30
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
435
INSTALLING PLASTERBOARD PANEL PARTITIONS
• Timber or metal framing inserts: Size to give a firm press fit into the panel cavity.
• Use for:
- Panel joints
- Floor, wall and ceiling perimeters.
- Support for fixtures and fittings: Mark positions of inserts on panel surface.
- Lining of openings.
• Perimeter fixing:
- Preparation: Fix continuous timber sole plate to floor at 600 mm centres.
- Floor, wall and ceiling: Fix framing inserts to substrates at 600 mm centres.
Locate panels into framing inserts and fix at 300mm centres with screws or
230 mm centres with nails.
436
ADDITIONAL LININGS TO PLASTERBOARD PANEL PARTITIONS
• Generally: Bond additional linings to partitions with 60 mm wide x 5 mm thick
continuous bands of adhesive at 300 mm centres, and centred on joints.
Stagger joints between layers by minimum 150 mm.
445
INSTALLING PLASTERBOARD LAMINATED PARTITIONS
• Timber battens: Size to suit plasterboard core layer. Use for:
- Floor, wall and ceiling perimeters.
- Lining of openings.
- Comers and angle junctions.
• Perimeter fixing:
- Floor, wall and ceiling: Fix timber battens to substrates at 600 mm centres.
• Plasterboard layers:
- Bonding together: Apply adhesive in 60 mm wide x 5 mm thick continuous
bands at 300 mm centres, and centred on joints. Stagger joints between
layers by minimum 150 mm.
- Nailing: Fix first and third layers to timber battens at 300 mm centres.
- Additional mechanical fixings: Provide in accordance with partition
manufacturer's recommendations to achieve specified fire resistance.
• Complete partitions: Protect against movement for minimum four hours.
455
TAPED SEAMLESS FINISH TO PLASTERBOARD PARTITIONS
• Cut edges of boards: Lightly sand to remove paper burrs.
• Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointing compound
and cover with continuous lengths of paper tape, fully bedded.
• Protection of edges / corners: Reinforce stop ends, external angles, etc. with
specified edge / angle bead or tape.
• Finishing: Apply jointing compound. Feather out each application beyond
previous application to give a flush, seamless surface.
• Nail / screw depressions: Fill with jointing compound to give a flush surface.
• Minor imperfections: Remove by lightly sanding.
470
PERIMETER SEALS
• Sealant material: A type recommended by partition / panel manufacturer.
• Application: Continuously, to clean, dry, dust-free surfaces, leaving no gaps. In
accordance with the sealant manufacturer's instructions.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K30
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
475
FIRE STOPPING
• General: Seal gaps at junctions of partitions with perimeter abutments, cavity
barriers, service penetrations etc, to prevent penetration of smoke and flame.
• Materials: Non combustible or intumescent.
480
GLAZING FOR RELOCATABLE PARTITIONS
• Glass standards: To BS 952 and relevant parts of:
- BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 1096 for coated glass.
- BS EN 1748 for borosilicate glass.
- BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened glass.
- BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened glass.
- BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass.
• Pane size: Within ±2 mm of nominal size.
• Pane condition: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, rippling,
dimples and other defects.
• Glazing standard: To BS 6262.
• Pre-glazed panes: To be capable of being re-glazed in situ.
490
IRONMONGERY FOR RELOCATABLE PARTITIONS
• Frames and doors: Prepare accurately to accept ironmongery and associated
fixings.
• Ironmongery installation: Accurate and without damage lo components or
surrounding surfaces.
• Fasteners: Supplied by partition / ironmongery manufacturer. Finish to match
component.
• Completion: Check, adjust and lubricate as necessary for correct operation.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K32
FRAMED PANEL CUBICLES PARTITIONS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
120
PANEL CUBICLES
Drawing reference(s): refer to project drawings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
150
Manufacturer: Bristol Panel Formers; 606 Central Park, Petherton Road,
Hengrove, Bristol BS14 9BZ; Tel 01275 830544.
Product reference: ‘Solid’ Type Cubicles
Panels/ Doors:
- Core material 12mm thick Polyrey solid grade compact laminate.
- Colour:
- Selected by CA from Plain Colours Range (excluding: C031, C062, R036,
Y022). To co-ordinate with duct access system and vanity units
- Edge treatment: Black - Cut and polished on the edges for a furniture finish.
All edges are to be sealed with rounded profile.
Headrails: Powder coated aluminium head rail with post formed insert
Legs: Adjustable polycarbonate support legs.
1950mm overall height from FFL including 150mm floor clearance.
Refer to project drawings for cubicle depth.
Ironmongery / Accessories: polyester powder coated hinges face fixed to both
door and pilaster. Polyester powder coated indicator bolts with emergency
release facility and keep, and with concealed fixings. Polyester powder coated
cleats with concealed fixings, colour co-ordinated coat hook.
Paper Roll Holders – See N13.462
DUCT/ WALL LININGS – PANELS AND PROPRIETARY FRAMES to duct access
panel system
• Manufacturer: Bristol Panel Formers; 606 Central Park, Petherton Road,
Hengrove, Bristol BS14 9BZ; Tel 01275 830544.
- Product reference: Compact Duct Access Panel System
• Panels:
- Core material: Birch ply
- Thickness: 18mm
- Facings: Polyrey laminate
- Colour: Project specific
- Edge treatment: Matching laminate
• Access panels:
• Core material: Compact laminate
- Thickness: 12mm
- Facings: Polyrey laminate
- Colour: Project specific to co-ordinate with cubicles and vanity units
- Edge treatment: Cut and polished
• Fasteners: Drop-on panel clips
• Framing/ Support:
- Duct panels: As manufacturer details
- Wall panels: As manufacturers details
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K32
FRAMED PANEL CUBICLES PARTITIONS
150A
VANITY UNIT FOR INSET BASINS
• Manufacturer: Bristol Panel Formers; 606 Central Park, Petherton Road,
Hengrove, Bristol BS14 9BZ; Tel 01275 830544.
- Product reference: Laminated Vanity Unit for Inset Basins
• Panels:
- Core material: MR MDF
- Thickness: 18mm
- Facings: Polyrey laminate
- Colour: Project specific
- Edge treatment: Matching laminate
• Access panels:
• Core material: Compact laminate
- Thickness: 12mm
- Facings: Polyrey laminate
- Colour: Project specific to co-ordinate with cubicles and duct access system
- Edge treatment: Cut and polished
• Fasteners: Drop-on panel clips
• Framing/ Support:
- Access panels: As manufacturer details
- Base unit: As manufacturers details
210
SAMPLES
• General: Before placing orders submit representative samples of the following:
Laminates
• Delivered materials/ products: To match samples.
230
PROTECTION
• Doors and panels: Stack flat on bearers and separate by spacers where
necessary to prevent damage to or from projections.
• Completed cubicles: Keep clean and dry, and adequately protect from damage
until completion.
250
INSTALLATION
• Programming: Do not install before building is weathertight, wet trades have
finished their work, wall and floor finishes are complete, and the building is well
dried out.
• Accuracy: Set out to ensure frames and / or panels and doors are plumb, level
and accurately aligned.
• Modifications: Do not cut. plane or sand prefinished components except where
shown on drawings.
• Method of fixing: Secure components using methods and fasteners
recommended by the manufacturer. Do not distort frames, panels and doors.
• Hinges: Adjust so that doors hang ajar.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K40
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
TYPES OF CEILING SYSTEM
110
UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
• Drawing references: Refer to Drawing Issue register
• Structural soffits: Irrespective of material
• Ceiling system manufacturer: Armstrong
- Product reference: Dune Supreme Tegular
- Ceiling type: Lay-in grid
- Grid exposure: Exposed 24mm Grid, White.
• Grid spacings: 600 x 600 mm.
• Access: lnfill Units Fully Demountable.
• Ceiling module: 600 x 600 mm.
• Ceiling soffit above finished floor level: As per drawing(s)
• Suspension system: Axiom Canopy Axiom C Canopy
•
Extent of system: To include ALL hangers, fixings, main runners, cross
members, primary channels, perimeter trims, splines, noggins, clips, bracing,
bridging, etc, which are necessary to complete the ceiling system and achieve
performance.
• Top fixings: As recommended by ceiling contractor.
• Hangers: 2mm pre-straightened galvanised mild steel wire
- Perimeter trim: As clause 219.
- Timber edge battens: As clause 218 (if required).
- Infill units: As clause 221.
- Access units: Not Required.
- Insulation: As clause 226 (if required).
- Air plenum barriers: As clause 227 (if required).
- Accessories: by Armstrong
• Integrated services fittings: Install Luminaires, lighting control sensors,
ventilation grilles, air conditioning grilles, smoke/heat detectors etc
• Other requirements: project specific
115
UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS (Lecture Theatres)
• Drawing references: Refer to Drawing Issue register
• Structural soffits: Irrespective of material
• Ceiling system manufacturer: Armstrong
- Ceiling type: Lay-in grid
- Grid exposure: Exposed 24mm Grid, White
• Grid spacings: 600 x 600 mm.
• Access: lnfill Units Fully Demountable.
• Ceiling module: 600 x 600 mm.
• Ceiling soffit above finished floor level: As per drawing(s)
• Suspension system: Axiom Canopy Axiom C Canopy
•
Extent of system: To include ALL hangers, fixings, main runners, cross
members, primary channels, perimeter trims, splines, noggins, clips, bracing,
bridging, etc, which are necessary to complete the ceiling system and achieve
performance.
• Top fixings: As recommended by ceiling contractor.
• Hangers: 2mm pre-straightened galvanised mild steel wire
- Perimeter trim: As clause 219.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K40
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
•
•
- Timber edge battens: As clause 218 (if required).
- Infill units: As clause 221.
- Access units: Not Required.
- Insulation: As clause 226 (if required).
- Air plenum barriers: As clause 227 (if required).
- Accessories: by Armstrong
Integrated services fittings: Install Luminaires, lighting control sensors,
ventilation grilles, air conditioning grilles, smoke/heat detectors etc
Other requirements:
- Ceiling tile: Clean Sound
- Supplier: Hodgson & Hodgson (Construction Division)
Hodgson and Hodgson Group, Crown Business Park, Old Dalby, Melton
Mowbray, Leicestershire, United Kingdom, LE14 3NQ
Tel: +44 (0)1664 821 800 Fax: +44 (0)1664 821 820 Email:
[email protected] www.acoustic.co.uk
- Size: 600x600x40mm
GENERAL PERFORMANCE
203
DEFINITIONS
• Ceiling: Items collectively constituting the ceiling surface i.e. infill units / boards /
stretched fabric, access units and grid.
• Ceiling system: Ceiling plus suspension system and integrated services fittings.
COMPONENTS
218
TIMBER EDGE BATTENS
• Type: Planed softwood to BS EN 942, class J10.
- Moisture content at time of fixing: 15% ± 2%
- Finished size: 32x32mm
- Finish (apply before ceiling grid is installed): Matt black
219
PERIMETER TRIMS
• Type: Painted Perimeter
- Fixings to perimeters: As recommended by ceiling contractor.
- Fixing centres (maximum): 450 mm.
221
INFILL UNITS
• Type: Mineral Fibre
• Form: Lay in tiles
• Sizes: 600 x 600 mm
• Finish: Painted Finish
• Colour: White
226
INSULATION for acoustic control
• Type: Mineral wool (not fibre-glass)
- Thickness: 150 mm
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K40
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
FACINGS / WRAPPINGS: BAGGED
227
AIR PLENUM BARRIERS
• Material: Rigid or semi-rigid non porous sheets with smooth non-dusting
surfaces.
• Fire spread rating: As for ceiling materials exposed within the ceiling void.
INSTALLATION
302
CONTROL SAMPLES
• General: Complete areas of the finished work in the following locations: As
directed by CA
305
SETTING OUT
• General: Set out accurately, continuous, even, and jointed at regular intervals.
Provide level soffits free from undulations, dipping and distortions in grid
members.
• Infill and access units, integrated services: Fit correctly and aligned.
• Edge / perimeter infill units size (minimum): Half standard width or length.
• Grid: Position to suit infill unit sizes. Allow for permitted deviations from nominal
sizes
• lnfill joints and exposed suspension members: Straight, aligned and parallel to
walls. Where building elements and features to which the ceiling systems relate
are not square, straight or level, give notice.
310
BRACING
• General: Secure, with additional bracing and stiffening as necessary to give a
stable ceiling system resistant to design loads and pressures.
315
PROTECTION
• Loading: Do not apply loads for which the suspension system is not designed.
• Ceiling materials: Remove and replace correctly using special tools and clean
gloves, etc. as appropriate.
350
TOP FIXING
• Building structure: Verify suitability.
- Concrete: Drill and insert suitable expanding anchors.
- Aerated concrete: Fix through from the top of the concrete unit and provide
a system of primary channels.
- Structural steel: Drill, or use suitable proprietary clips/adaptors.
- Metal roof decking: Fix to sides of corrugations.
- Timber: Fix to side of joists at least 50 mm from bottom edge. If ceiling
system is intended for fire protection, fix into top third of joists.
- Hollow structural members: Submit fixing proposals.
- Cartridge or powder activated methods: Do not use.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K40
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
360
INSTALLING HANGERS
• Wire hangers: Straighten and tension before use.
• Installation: Install vertical or near vertical without bends or kinks. Do not allow
hangers to press against fittings, services, insulation covering ducts / pipes.
• Obstructions: Where obstructions prevent vertical installation, either:
- brace diagonal hangers against lateral movement: or
- hang ceiling system on an appropriate rigid sub-grid bridging across
obstructions and supported to prevent lateral movement.
• Extra hangers: Provide as required to carry additional loads.
• Fixing:
- Wire hangers: Tie securely at top with tight bends to loops to prevent vertical
movement.
- Angle/strap hangers: Do not rivet for top fixing.
• Spacings: As manufacturer’s recommendations
370
INSTALLING TIMBER EDGE BATTENS
• Fixings: Firmly to perimeter wall or other building structure.
- Type: screws & plugs applicable to background
- Centres (maximum): 450 mm
380
INSTALLING PERIMETER TRIMS
• Jointing: Neat and accurate, without lipping or twisting.
• External and internal corners: Mitre joints.
• For Internal corners overlap joints are acceptable
- Intermediate butt joints: Minimize. Use longest available lengths of trim.
Align adjacent lengths.
• Fixing: Fix firmly to perimeter wall or other building structure.
- Fixing centres: As manufacturer’s recommendations.
382
EXPOSED GRIDS
• Grid fixings: Hangers
• Main runners: Install level. Adjust with supporting hangers taut. Do not adjust by
kinking or bending hangers.
- Spliced joints: Stagger.
- Wire hangers passing through main runners: Sharply bend and tightly wrap
loops.
- Angle / strap hangers: Do not rivet for bottom fixing.
- Angular displacement of long axis of one runner in relation to next runner in
line with it: Not visually apparent.
• Cross members supported by main runners or other cross members: Install to
form a right angle with intersecting runner.
• Cross tees: Flat and coplanar with flange of main runner after panel insertion.
- Cross tees over 600 mm long, cut and resting on perimeter trim: Provide an
additional hanger.
• Holding down clips: Locate to manufacturer's recommendations.
- Fire protecting / resisting ceiling systems: Use clip type featured in the fire
test / assessment.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K40
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
384
CONCEALED GRIDS
• Grid fixings: Hangers
• Primary support channels: Install level. Adjust level with supporting hangers
taut. Do not level by kinking or bending hangers.
- Wire hangers wrapped around primary channels: Wrap twice and tightly
form loops.
- Angle / strap hangers: Do not rivet for bottom fixing.
• Splines: Locate between infill units to level adjacent units and to resist air
movement at joints.
• Spring-tee grids: Do not omit primary channel.
386
INSTALLING INFILL UNITS
• General:
- Cut perimeter infill units: Trim to full space between last grid member and
perimeter trim. Prevent subsequent movement.
- Deeply textured infill units: Minimize variations in apparent texture and
colour. In particular, avoid patchiness.
• Concealed grids: Install infill units uniform, straight and aligned. Avoid
dimension creep.
- Infill units around recessed luminaires and similar openings: Prevent
movement and displacement.
387
INSTALLING METAL INFILL UNITS
• Sound absorbing pads: Fit to prevent upward air movement through infill units.
Cut or fold pads in cut perimeter infill units to full unit size. Reseal cut pads.
• Cut perimeter infill units: Firmly wedge into perimeter trim, or clip down.
• Removal: Do not damage infill units. Use tools designed for the purpose.
389
UPSTANDS AND BULKHEADS
• Vertical ceiling systems: Support and brace to provide alignment and stability.
• High upstands: Provide support at base of upstand.
390
OPENINGS IN CEILING MATERIALS
• Forming: Neat and accurate. Suit sizes and edge details of fittings. Do not
distort ceiling system.
395
INTEGRATED SERVICES
• General: Position services accurately, support adequately. Align and level in
relation to the ceiling and suspension system. Do not diminish performance of
ceiling system.
• Small fittings: Support with rigid backing boards or other suitable means. Do not
damage or distort the ceiling.
- Surface spread of flame rating of additional supporting material: Match
ceiling material.
• Services outlets:
- Supported by ceiling system: Provide additional hangers.
• Independently supported: Provide flanges to support ceiling system.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K40
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
396
CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRES
• Support:
- Independently supported luminaires: Adjustable suspension to line and level
of ceiling.
- Ceiling supported luminaires: Modifications and / or extra support required:
e.g. pattress
• Surface mounted luminaires: Do not inhibit designed grid expansion in fire.
• Modular fluorescent recessed luminaires: Comparable with ceiling module.
Extension boxes must not foul ceiling system.
• Recessed rows of luminaires: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units,
unless mounted above grid flanges. Retain in place with lateral restraint.
• Fire protecting/resisting ceiling systems: luminaires must maintain protection
integrity of ceiling system.
• Access: Provide access for maintenance of luminaires.
397
TRUNKING
• Recessed flunking: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unless
mounted above grid flanges. Retain in place with lateral restraint.
398
MECHANICAL SERVICES
• Fan coil units:
- Inlet and outlet grilles: Trim ceiling grid and infill units to suit.
- Space beneath: Sufficient for ceiling system components.
- Suspension and connections: Permit accurate setting out and levelling of fan
coil units.
• Air grilles and diffusers:
- Setting out: Accurate and level.
- Linear air diffusers: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units.
Provide for displacement of ceiling grid. Retain in place with lateral restraint.
- Grille / diffuser ceiling joints: Provide smudge rings and edge seals.
• Smoke detectors and PA speakers:
- Infill units: Scribe to suit.
- Independent suspension
- Flexible connections: Required.
400
INSTALLING INSULATION
• Fitting: Fit accurately and firmly with closely butted joints and no gaps.
• Insulation within individual infill units: Fit closely. Secure to prevent
displacement when infill units are installed or subsequently lifted. Reseal cut
dustproof sleeving.
• Width: Lay insulation in the widest practical widths to suit grid member spacings.
• Services: Do not cover electrical cables not sized accordingly. Cut insulation
carefully around electrical fittings, etc. Do not lay insulation over luminaires.
• Sloping and vertical areas of ceiling system: Fasten insulation to prevent
displacement.
405
CEILING SYSTEMS INTENDED FOR FIRE PROTECTION
• Junctions of ceiling systems with perimeter abutments and service penetrations:
Seal gaps with tightly packed mineral wool or intumescent sealant to prevent
penetration of smoke and flame.
• Ceiling system/wall junctions: Maintain protective value of ceiling system.
- Fixings and grounds: Non-combustible.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
K40
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
•
•
Metal trim: Provide for thermal expansion.
Access and access panels: Maintain continuity of fire protection.
410
INSTALLING CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS – Project Specific all in accordance with
Building Regulations
• Fire resistance to BS 476-20:
- Integrity / insulation: ___ minutes.
• Material: Project Specific.
• Ceiling void subdivision areas (maximum): ___ m2.
• Fixing:
- General: Fix firmly to channels or angles at abutments to building structure.
- At perimeters and joints: Secure. Provide permanent stability and continuity
with no gaps. Provide a complete barrier to smoke and flame.
• Joints: Form to preserve integrity in fire.
• Service penetrations: Cut and pack to maintain barrier integrity. Sleeve flexible
materials. Adequately support services passing through the barrier.
• Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting
performance of ceiling system.
• Ceiling systems not intended for fire protection: Do not mechanically interlink
barriers with ceiling system.
420
INSTALLING SOUND BARRIERS – Project Specific
• Material: Project Specific
• Setting out: align accurately with partition heads.
• Fixing: Fix tightly and secure at perimeters and joints. Use methods
recommended by the barrier manufacturer, including steel support sections as
appropriate. Provide permanent stability and continuity with no gaps.
• Gaps at junctions with partition heads, ceiling system, structural soffit, walls,
ducts, pipes, etc.: Seal with mineral wool or suitable sealants.
430
INSTALLING AIR PLENUM BARRIERS
• Fixing: Fix tightly and secure at perimeters and joints. Use methods
recommended by the barrier manufacturer to ensure permanent stability.
• Edges and joints: Seal effectively to prevent air leakage.
COMPLETION
520
USER INSTRUCTIONS
• Contents: Include the following:
- Correct methods for removing and replacing infill units and other
components.
- Cleaning methods and materials.
- Recommendations for redecoration.
- Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Limitations placed on
subsequent alterations and maintenance procedures, to ensure that their fire
performance is not impaired.
- Maximum number, position and value of point loads that can be applied to
ceiling system after installation.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L10
WINDOWS I ROOFLIGHTS I SCREENS / LOUVRES
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION / REQUIREMENTS
109
TIMBER PROCUREMENT
• Timber and wood products should be sourced from forest areas certified under
a credible timber certification scheme (such as FSC, ISO 14001, PEFC) which
are based on publicly available forestry standards drawn up in a fully
participatory, transparent and objective manner and backed by independent
auditing.
• Where independently certified timber is not available, the timber should be
procured from a supplier that has adopted a formal Environmental Purchasing
Policy (e.g. Forests Forever Policy or WWF 95+ Group) and can provide
evidence of commitment to that policy.
120
SITE DIMENSIONS
• Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions,
record on shop drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
• Designated items: All bespoke joinery.
200
COMPOSITE WINDOWS – ALUMINIUM CLAD WOOD
• Manufacturer: Velfac
• Product reference: V212 Top Hung Projecting Window
• Materials:
- Exterior frame/ sash cladding: Aluminium
- Finish: PPC colour RAL7040 (Mid Grey)
- Interior frame/ sash section: North European Pine
- Finish: VACUMAT preservative
• Glazing details:
- As V212 system, details of solar control glass project specific.
• Ironmongery/ Accessories:
- Espagnolette with lock, high level windows to be operated with manual
flexible drive with turn handle at low level.
windows to be controlled by the BMS with concealed motorised actuators –
project specific..
• Fixing:
- As recommended by manufacturer.
• Other: Solid rainscreen panels to match external frame colour and insulated to
suit required U-Value.
210
COMPOSITE WINDOWS – ALUMINIUM CLAD WOOD
• Manufacturer: Velfac
• Product reference: V200 Fire window
• Materials:
- Exterior frame/ sash cladding: Aluminium
- Finish: PPC colour RAL7040 (Mid Grey)
- Interior frame/ sash section: North European Pine
- Finish: VACUMAT preservative
- Glazing details:
- To meet 60 minute FR integrity and insulation.
• Fixing: As recommended by manufacturer
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L10
WINDOWS I ROOFLIGHTS I SCREENS / LOUVRES
440
ROOFLIGHTS
• Manufacturer: Monovent
• Product reference: SunCatcher
• Type: Domed
• Kerb: to suit roof profile
• Glazing details: Polycarp
• Other requirements: to provide ventilation to meet Approved Document K.
• Fixing: As manufacturers recommendations
480
BRISE SOLEIL
• Manufacturer: Levolux
• Product reference: 9000 Range, non motorised 300mm extruded profile.
• Materials/ Finish as delivered:
• Louvre blades: Anodised aluminium
• Side support arms: Anodised aluminium
• Mounting brackets: Anodised aluminium
• Support struts: Anodised aluminium
• Fasteners: Anodised aluminium
110
EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE:
• Provide independently certified evidence that all specified variants of
components comply with specified performance requirements.
• The frames are to comply with all relevant British Standard Specifications,
Codes of Practice, and Statutory Requirements (including all revisions and
amendments), as well as the guides and recommendations laid down by the
relevant trade organisation relating to their performance, constituent materials,
methods of assembly and use. Any exceptions to the above are to be advised in
writing by the specifier.
• The window extrusion systems manufacturer must hold British Standard
Kitemark licenses for BS4873 “Specification for Aluminium Alloy Windows” and
BS7950 “Specification for enhanced security performance of casement and
tilt/turn windows in domestic applications”. Prior to commencement of work on
site, the Specialist Contractor shall forward copies of the Kitemark Certificates
or equivalent to the Contract Administrator.
• All frames and other sections to be extruded to BS EN 755-9: 2001,
Specification 6060 or 6063 T6.
• All materials and ancillary products are to be used and fitted entirely in
accordance with the instructions of the relevant manufacturer.
120
DESIGN, SITE DIMENSIONS AND SURVEY
Design
•
•
•
•
Issue: 1.0
Window configurations are to be as depicted within the Window Schedule/
Drawings.
Specialist Contractor shall provide drawings to the Main Contractor depicting all
profiles, glazing, weather seals, gaskets fixings and sealants to be used and the
relationship of the above to the adjacent structural detail for each window type
Specialist Contractor is to provide drawings showing the relationship of framing
to structure, including all profiles, sealants, fixings, trims and weatherseals.
Notwithstanding any information within this Specification, all framing and infills
shall be capable of withstanding the design wind loadings calculated in
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L10
WINDOWS I ROOFLIGHTS I SCREENS / LOUVRES
•
•
•
•
accordance with BS6399 Pt2: 1997, and imposed loads as defined in BS6399
Pt1: 1996, and the Specialist Contractor shall carry out calculations to
demonstrate this.
Opening lights within 1100mm of FFL should be guarded in accordance with
BS6180 and BS6399:1.
Any packing sections or materials required to compensate for misaligned
apertures shall be agreed by the Contract Administrator prior to manufacture.
Allow for anomalies and variations in the size of the openings, and for out-ofsquare openings. This is to include for the manufacture of ‘specials’ as
necessary.
All frames and other sections to be extruded to BS EN 755-9: 2001,
Specification 6060 or 6063 T6.
Site DimensionsUnits to be manufactured to suit prepared openings.
• Window Fabricator / Installer (Specialist Contractor) to make an inspection of all
relevant drawings and documents in order to ascertain all relevant conditions,
structural details and site layout. No additional claim will be entertained for
items that would be apparent from an inspection of documents.
Survey
•
•
Specialist Contractor must allow in his tender for the supply of all items specified
and/or required.
Specialist Contractor to allow in his price for a survey visit to site in order to take
the dimensions and adjacent structural details of every window that is to be
installed.
COMPONENTS
330
ALUMINIUM WINDOWS:
• MANUFACTURER AND REFERENCE: To be manufactured as Sapa Building
Systems Ltd (Ashchurch, Tewkesbury, Gloucestershire, GL20 8NB; Tel: 01684853500) Dualframe 55mm Casement Window System.
• CONSTRUCTION: The sections forming the windows are to incorporate a
thermal break, achieved using an extruded glass reinforced polyamide profile
mechanically joined to the profiles.
• Dualframe casement window frames are to be fabricated using 45o mitred joints.
Corners to be reinforced with stainless steel corner ties and two extruded
aluminium cleats, joined with two part adhesive, and secured by mechanical
crimping.
• Joints to be sealed with sealants as specified by the aluminium systems
company fabrication manual.
• All windows to have drip-trim fitted to head of frame
• DRAINAGE: The frames are to incorporate an adequate means of self-drainage.
This is to be achieved using a sub-cill carrier and suitable pressing, allowing
drainage through frame of window and exiting via hidden drainage holes in subcill carrier.
• PERFORMANCE: All framing including mullions, transoms and couplers shall
be capable of withstanding the design wind loadings calculated in accordance
with BS6399 Pt2: 1995, and the Specialist Contractor shall provide calculations
to demonstrate this if requested by the Contract Administrator.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L10
WINDOWS I ROOFLIGHTS I SCREENS / LOUVRES
•
•
Aluminium window system to have been tested in accordance with BS.5368, to
meet Exposure Category shown below as defined by BS 6375:1 1989, and to
have achieved the following:
Dualframe Casement Windows:
Air Permeability Water Penetration
Wind Resistance* Category
600 Pa
600 Pa
2400 Pa*
2400 Special
* figures may vary from the design maximum wind loading which should be
calculated in accordance with BS6399: Part2: 1997
334
GLAZING:
• All glazing to casement windows to be secured by means of external glazing
beads. Glazing to be hermetically sealed double-glazed 28.4mm units.
• Composition of units to be 6.4mm laminated low-e clear glass inner pane, and
4mm toughened clear glass externally. Cavity to be argon filled. Producing a low
emissivity sealed unit combining with the frames to give an “area weighted
average” u-value of 2.2W/m²K or less.
• All windows to toilet areas and basement stairs to have obscured glazing
opposed to clear glass.
• Spandrel ‘look a like’ panels to be fitted at lower levels at ground floor.
• Note: To conform to Approved Document L, the specifier should check with the
glass supplier that sufficient solar control is being achieved so as to comply with
the solar gain requirements.
• All glass within 800mm from FFL shall be toughened or laminated. (Below
1500mm if within a door or 300mm of a door).
• All glass and glazing shall conform to:
EN 12600:
Specification for Impact Performance;
BS.6262: Parts 1-6:2005
Code of Practice for Glazing Buildings;
BS.952: 1978:
Glass for Glazing;
BS EN 1279:
Glass in buildings. Insulating Glass Units.
Part 1: 2004 Generalities, dimensional tolerances and rules for the system
description.
Part 2: 2005 Long term test method and requirements for moisture penetration
Part 3: 2005 Long term test method and requirements for gas leakage rate and
for gas concentration tolerances.
Part 4: 2002 Methods of test for the physical attributes of edge seals
Part 5: 2005 Evaluation of conformity.
Part 6: 2002 Factory production control and periodic tests.
Recommendations of the Glass and Glazing Federation should be adhered to.
335
IRONMONGERY /ACCESSORIES
• All opening lights shall be fitted with stainless steel friction stays restricted to
100mm opening.
• Maco Mk2 Eurogroove shootbolt espagnolette locking system comprising two
rods, moving in opposite directions from side of the sash frame into keeps
securely fixed to perimeter frame, and with additional centre cam unit. All keeps
to be profile related. Handles to be key lockable.
• Window inserts to Tower curtain walling screens, to be fitted with winding gear
operated from ground floor level
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L10
WINDOWS I ROOFLIGHTS I SCREENS / LOUVRES
•
The Specialist Contractor is to obtain the written confirmation of the Contract
Administrator as to the type and position of all ironmongery before commencing
manufacture.
336
TRICKLE VENTILATION
• Type and Position
• Colour-matched powder coated aluminium trickle ventilators, to meet Approved
Document F1. Sapa head ventilator to be used throughout.
• Where necessary, a frame extension profile, or extended leg framing, is to used
to ensure that trickle ventilators are clear of internal finishes. Frame extension
sections to be of an identical material and finish to framing, and designed to
locate in grooves within the frame extrusion.
• Where the window is of insufficient width to accommodate the level of ventilation
required by Approved Document F1 the Specialist Contractor shall bring this to
the attention of the Contract Administrator.
• Trickle ventilation shall also comply with Approved Document J and BS5540
Part 2 with respect to ventilation of gas burning appliances. This requirement
shall take precedence over the requirements of Approved Document F1.
337
FINISH:
• All aluminium sections to be polyester powder coated to BS EN 12206-1:2004,
in standard RAL matt finish to be agreed. Minimum thickness of powder to be 40
microns.
• To be supplied by Sapa Building Systems Ltd, using Interpon D systems
polyester powder.
339
Tilt and Turn Windows
- Manufacturer: NorDan UK Ltd. Web: www.nordan.co.uk Email:
[email protected] Tel: +44 (0)1452 883131, Fax: +44 (0)1452 883739,
Address: NorDan House, Green Farm Business Park, Falcon Close,
Quedgeley, Gloucestershire GL2 4LY.
- Product reference: ND Tilt and Turn /NDAN Tilt and Turn Secondary Sash
/NDS Side Hung /NDB Bottom Hung /NDEV Tilt and Turn
- Size : Project specific
- Finish as delivered: Clear lacquer /Clear lacquer internally, Aluminium
cladding powder-coated to RAL7040 or project specific
- Glazing: As L10.334
- Ironmongery: Project specific
- Accessories: As required /Blinds /Fly screen etc
INSTALLATION
710
PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS:
• Do not deliver to site components which cannot be put immediately into suitable
clean, dry, floored and covered storage. Stack near vertical on level bearers,
separated with spacers to prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery,
beads, etc.
750
BUILDING IN
• Will not be permitted except where specifically stated on the drawings.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L10
WINDOWS I ROOFLIGHTS I SCREENS / LOUVRES
765
WINDOW INSTALLATION:
• Install windows into prepared openings, maintaining a gap of 6 mm between the
frame edge and the surrounding construction.
• Install windows without twist or diagonal racking.
• Window framing to be securely fixed direct to the building structure, no further
than 150mm from each corner and at centres not exceeding 600mm, as laid
down in procedures issued by the systems company.
• All windows to be secured back to structure using Sapa Dualframe fixing lugs.
770
PREPARED OPENINGS: Ensure that dpc’s are positioned correctly in relation to
frames and are not displaced during fixing operations.
810
SEALANT JOINTS:
• Sealant: Seal all external joints between framing and structure with low
modulus neutral cure silicon sealant to BS5899 (1989)
• Colour: To be confirmed
• Prepare joints and apply sealant as section Z22.
820
IRONMONGERY:
• Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using tamper proof or concealed
fastenings with matching finish supplied by ironmongery manufacturer. Prevent
damage to ironmongery and adjacent surfaces. At completion check, adjust
and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.
821
CLEANING AND OPERATIONAL CHECK:
• Upon completion of the installation, all glazing, frames, handles and all other
surfaces are to be cleaned with a mild detergent. All components are to be
checked for security of fixings, adequacy of clearances, adjustment of hinges,
locks etc. as may be necessary to leave the window units in good working order.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
110
EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE: Provide independently certified evidence that all
specified variants of components comply with specified performance requirements.
• The frames are to comply with all relevant British Standard Specifications,
Codes of Practice, and Statutory Requirements (including all revisions and
amendments), as well as the guides and recommendations laid down by the
relevant trade organisation relating to their performance, constituent materials,
methods of assembly and use. Any exceptions to the above are to be advised in
writing by the specifier.
• All frames and other sections to be extruded to BS EN 755-9: 2001,
Specification 6060 or 6063 T6.
• All materials and ancillary products are to be used and fitted entirely in
accordance with the instructions of the relevant manufacturer.
112
TIMBER PROCUREMENT
• Timber and wood products should be sourced from forest areas certified under
a credible timber certification scheme (such as FSC, ISO 14001, PEFC) which
are based on publicly available forestry standards drawn up in a fully
participatory, transparent and objective manner and backed by independent
auditing.
• Where independently certified timber is not available, the timber should be
procured from a supplier that has adopted a formal Environmental Purchasing
Policy (e.g. Forests Forever Policy or WWF 95+ Group) and can provide
evidence of commitment to that policy.
115A
FIRE RESISTING DOORS/DOORSETS/ASSEMBLIES
• All fire door assemblies and doorsets shall be to the appropriate file resistance
period and shall be manufactured by a member of either BM TRADA Q-Mark
scheme or the BWF-CERTIFIRE Fire Door and Doorset Scheme and If they
require modification (glazed apertures or fire door frames) be modified by an
approved modifier who is also accredited by these certification schemes.
• Alternative approach: (Must have CA approval) Provide certified evidence, in the
form of a product conformity certificate, directly relevant fire test report or
engineering assessment, that each door / doorset / assembly supplied will
comply with the specified requirements for fire resistance if tested to BS 476-22,
BS EN 1634-1 or BS EN 1634-3, Such certification must cover door and frame
materials, glass and glazing materials and their installation, essential and
ancillary ironmongery, hinges and seals.
150
SITE DIMENSIONS
• Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions,
record on shop drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
• Designated items: All bespoke joinery.
230A
INTERNAL FD30 FIRE RESISTING AND SMOKE STOP TIMBER FLUSH DOORS
OAK FACED.
• Standard detail(s): B01/2/3
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reference: FD30S Doors (refer to project Door Schedule for door size)
Core: Solid
Facings: American White Oak veneered (unless specified differently within the
project door schedule).
Lippings: 2 vertical edges.
Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%.
Glazing details: Where glazed 7mm Pilkington Pyrodur Plus, Refer to door
schedule for location and instance.
Finish as delivered: Sealed and polished by manufacturer.
Other requirements: Door assembly to incorporate intumescent / smoke seals
and comply with clause 115A. For ironmongery details refer to the door
schedule.
230B
INTERNAL FD60 FIRE RESISTING AND SMOKE STOP TIMBER FLUSH DOORS
OAK FACED
• Standard detail(s): B01/2/3
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Reference: FD60S (refer to project Door Schedule for door size)
• Core: Solid
• Facings: American White Oak veneered (unless specified differently within the
project door schedule).
• Lippings: 2 vertical edges.
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%
• Glazing details: Where glazed 6mm Schott Pyran S. Refer to door schedule for
location and instance.
• Finish as delivered: Sealed and polished by manufacturer.
• Other requirements: Door assembly to incorporate intumescent/smoke seals
and comply with clause 115A. For ironmongery details refer to the door
schedule.
230C
INTERNAL TIMBER FLUSH DOORS OAK FACED
• Standard detail(s): B01/2/3
• Manufacturer: HiTec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2, City
Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD. Tel:
01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Reference: Refer to project Door Schedule for door size
• Core: Solid
• Facings: American White Oak veneered (unless specified differently within the
project door schedule).
• Lippings: 2 vertical edges
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%
• Glazing details: Toughened or laminated safety glass. Refer to door schedule
for location and instance.
• Finish as delivered: Sealed and polished by manufacturer.
• Other requirements: For ironmongery details refer to the door schedule.
230D
INTERNAL FD30 FIRE RESISTING AND SMOKE STOP TIMBER FLUSH DOORS
FOR PAINTING
• Standard detail(s): B01/2/3
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
Reference: Designer range (refer to project Door Schedule for door size)
Core: Solid
Facings: M.D.F or equal approved.
Lippings: 2 vertical edges
Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%
Glazing details: 6mm clear Pilkington Pyroshield Safety glass. Refer to door
schedule for location and instance.
Finish as delivered: Primed and sealed by manufacturer.
Other requirements: Door assembly to incorporate intumescent/smoke seals
and comply with clause 115A. For ironmongery details refer to the door
schedule.
230E
INTERNAL FD60 FIRE RESISTING AND SMOKE STOP TIMBER FLUSH DOORS
FOR PAINTING
• Standard detail(s): B01/2/3
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Reference: (refer to project Door Schedule for door size)
• Core: Solid
• Facings: 10mm FR Chipboard
• Lippings: 2 vertical edges
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%.
• Glazing details: Where glazed 6mm Scholt Pyran S. Refer to door schedule for
location and instance.
• Finish as delivered: Primed and sealed by manufacturer.
• Other requirements: Door assembly to incorporate intumescent/smoke seals
and comply with clause 115A. For ironmongery details refer to the door
schedule.
230F
INTERNAL TIMBER FLUSH DOORS FOR PAINTING
• Standard detail(s): B01/2/3
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Reference: Refer to project Door Schedule for door size
• Core: Solid
• Facings: MDF or equal approved.
• Lippings: 2 vertical edges
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%
• Glazing details: Laminated safety glass. Refer to door schedule for location and
instance.
• Finish as delivered: Primed and sealed by manufacturer
• Other requirements: For ironmongery details refer to the door schedule.
• Finish as delivered: Polished by manufacturer
• Fixing: screw fixed and pelleted as clause 780.
• Ironmongery: refer to section P21
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
230G
EXTERNAL TIMBER FLUSH DOORS FOR PAINTING
• Standard detail(s): B01
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Reference: Refer to project Door Schedule for door size
• Core: Solid
• Facings: Ply faced or equal approved.
• Lippings: 4 edges
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%
• Finish as delivered: Primed and sealed by manufacturer
• Other requirements: Draught strip and weather bar; for ironmongery details refer
to the door schedule.
• Finish as delivered: Polished by manufacturer
• Fixing: screw fixed and pelleted as clause 780.
• Ironmongery: refer to section P21
310A
INTERNAL TIMBER DOOR FRAMES FOR PAINTING
• Standard detail(s): TBC
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Reference: Refer to project Door Schedule for door size
• Timber species: MDF or Softwood.
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%.
• Finish as delivered: Sealed and primed by manufacturer.
• Fixing: Screwed and plugged with dowels to match frame.
310B
INTERNAL TIMBER DOOR FRAMES - OAK
• Standard detail(s): TBC
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Timber species: American White Oak
• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%.
• Finish as delivered: Sealed and polished by manufacturer.
• Fixing: Screwed and pelleted with light oak dowels to match frame.
310C
FIRE RESISTING DOOR FRAMES FOR PAINTING
• Standard detail(s): TBC
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• To comply with clause 115A. To incorporate intumescent and smoke seals
including hinge protection.
• Timber to BS 1186:Part 1. Species: Softwoood or M.D.F. Class: 1.
• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%.
• Finish as delivered: Sealed and rimed by manufacturer.
• Fixing: Screwed and pelleted with dowels to match frame.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
310D
FIRE RESISTING DOOR FRAMES - OAK
• Standard detail(s): TBC
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• To comply with clause 115A. To incorporate intumescent and smoke seals
including hinge protection.
• Timber species: American White Oak
• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%.
• Finish as delivered: Sealed and rimed by manufacturer.
• Fixing: Screwed and pelleted with dowels to match frame.
330
INTERNAL TIMBER DOOR FRAMES OAK TO BE USED ONLY FOR
MATCHING/REPAIR OF EXISTNG
• Standard detail(s): Project specific
• Timber species: American light oak.
• Moisture content on delivery: 8 to 12%.
• Finish as delivered: Sealed and polished by manufacturer.
• Fixing: Screwed and pelleted with light oak dowels to match frame.
410
WOOD DOORSETS INTERNAL - NON FIRE RATED
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Product reference: Designer Range Doorset
• Door leaf:
- Facings: Primed for painting.
- Lippings: Vertical edges only.
- Finish as delivered: Primed for painting.
• Frame & architraves: Barum in softwood/MDF, precise profile project specific.
- Finish as delivered: Primed for paint.
• Preservative treatment: Not required.
• Glazing details: Project specific.
• Ironmongery: Refer to ironmongery schedule.
• Perimeter seals: Not required.
• Other requirements: Fixing: Plugged and screwed.
410A
WOOD DOORSETS INTERNAL - FD30S RATED
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Product reference: Designer Range Doorset. To comply with clause 115A.
• Door leaf:
- Facings: Primed for painting.
- Lippings: Vertical edges only.
- Finish as delivered: Primed for painting.
• Frame & architraves: Barum in softwood/MDF, precise profile project specific.
- Finish as delivered: Primed for paint.
• Preservative treatment: Not required.
• Glazing details: Project specific.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
•
•
•
410B
Ironmongery: Refer to ironmongery schedule.
Perimeter seals: Separate intumescent and smoke seals.
Other requirements: Fixing: Plugged and screwed.
WOOD DOORSETS INTERNAL - FD60S RATED
• Manufacturer: Hi-Tec joinery Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED) Address: Unit 2,
City Business Centre, Sudmeadow Road, Hempsted, Gloucester, GL2 5HD.
Tel: 01452 386 444 Fax: 01452 386 555.
• Product reference: Designer Range Doorset. To comply with clause 115A.
• Door leaf:
- Facings: Primed for painting.
- Lippings: Vertical edges only,
- Finish as delivered: Primed for painting.
• Frame and architraves: Barum in softwood I MDF, precise profiles project
specific.
- Finish as delivered: Primed for paint.
• Preservative treatment: Not required.
• Glazing details: Project specific.
• Ironmongery: Refer to ironmongery schedule.
• Perimeter seals: Separate intumescent and smoke seals.
• Other requirements: Fixing: Plugged and screwed.
METAL DOORS
480
DOORSETS - SECURITY DOORS
• Manufacturer: Jeld-Wen UK Ltd - Retford Road, Woodhouse Mill, Sheffield,
South Yorkshire, S13 9QH. (OR EQUAL APPROVED)
Tel: 0845 1222890 Web: www.jeld-wen.co.uk
• Product reference: Steel security Doorset.
• Facings: Steel
• Finish as delivered: Grey powder coat.
• Ironmongery: Project Specific.
• Perimeter seals: Rubber seals.
• Fixing: As per Manufacturers Instructions
485
GLAZED METAL FIRE RESISTING DOORSETS
• Manufacturer: AccentHansen Limited, Greengate Industrial Park, Greenside
way, Middleton, M24 1SW (OR EQUAL APPROVED)
Tel: 0161 284 4100 Web: www.accenthansen.co.uk
• Product reference: FireShield FL™ Doorset
• Door leaf and frame: 60 minute fire resistance
• Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coat
• Glazing details: 10mm or 12mm Pyran S dependant on leaf size
- Manifestation: sandblast, screen print, filming or other
• Ironmongery:
- closer to suit application
- vertical pulls, fixing through glass
- electro-magnetic for access control
• Perimeter seals: smoke seals.
• Other requirements: Manual or automatic operation to suit application
• Fixing: Plugged and screwed.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
480A
ALUMINIUM DOORS:
• Manufacturer and reference: To be manufactured as Sapa Building Systems Ltd
(Ashchurch, Tewkesbury, Gloucestershire, GL20 8NB; Tel: 01684-853500)
Sapa Proframe 202 commercial entrance doors throughout.
• General: All Doors and frames are to comply with all relevant British Standard
Specifications, Codes of Practice, and Statutory Requirements (including all
revisions and amendments), as well as the guides and recommendations laid
down by the relevant trade organisation relating to their performance,
constituent materials, methods of assembly and use. Any exceptions to the
above are to be advised in writing by the specifier. All doors and frames are to
be extruded to BS EN 755-9: 2001, Specification 6060 or 6063 T6. Aluminium
door profiles to be manufactured to BS EN ISO.9001/9002. All framing including
mullions, transoms and couplers shall be capable of withstanding the design
wind loadings calculated in accordance with Current British Standards &
Eurocodes, and the Specialist Contractor shall provide calculations to
demonstrate this if requested by the Contract Administrator.
• Width of all doors to give a clear access to comply with Approved Document M.
• Appearance: Door perimeter frame shall comprise 102mm outer frame, suitable
for fixing direct to the building structure, or fixed directly into curtain walling
pockets using special outer frame.
• Glazing details: Glazing to conform to BS.6262 for thickness and type, and to
conform to Parts N and L of the Building Regulations. 28.4mm insulated glass
sealed units, tested in accordance with BS.5713: 1979. Composition of units to
be 6.4mm laminated low-e clear glass inner pane, and 4mm toughened clear
glass externally. Cavity to be argon filled. All units to produce a low emissivity
sealed unit to give a “centre pane” u-value of 1.2W/m²K.
• All glass and glazing shall conform to: Current British Standards & Eurocodes
• Installation:
• Door framing to be securely fixed direct to the building structure, no further than
100mm from each corner and at centres not exceeding 450mm, as laid down in
procedures issued by the systems company.
• Upon completion of the installation, all glazing, frames, handles and all other
surfaces are to be cleaned with a mild detergent. All components are to be
checked for security of fixings, adequacy of clearances, adjustment of hinges,
locks etc. as may be necessary to leave the door units in good working order.
• Ironmongery:
• All communal entrance doors to be hung on free swinging pivots. Door closers
as Ref Dorma Power Assisted - see P21.411. Also to include Adams Rite
MS2200 Hooklock Deadlock operated by double cylinder. 2-no. 400mm
Cranked D handles, fixed back-to-back inside and out on main entrance doors
only. Flush bolts to slave leaf if applicable.
• The Specialist Contractor is to obtain the written confirmation of the Contract
Administrator as to the type and position of all ironmongery before commencing
manufacture.
• Access Control: Project Specific
• Finish: All aluminium sections to be polyester powder coated to BS EN 122061:2004, in standard RAL matt finish. Minimum powder thickness 40 microns.
• To be supplied by Sapa Building Systems Ltd, using Interpon D systems
powder.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
490
AUTOMATIC DOORS - ALUMINIUM
• Type: Single or double swing doors
• Manufacturer: Dorma UK Limited, Automatics Division, Wilbury Way, Hitchen,
Herts, SG4 0AB
Tel: 01462 477600
Email: [email protected]
• Materials/ finishes:
- Doors: Extruded aluminium, powder coat finish
- Frames: Extruded aluminium, powder coat finish
- Screens: Extruded aluminium, powder coat finish
• Glazing/ Infill details: double glazed
- Manifestation: TBC by CA and to conform to Approved Document N.
• Activation and control system:
- ED100 swing door operator
- Push pad or swipe/proximity card
- Safety devices: IRS233; IRS290 sensors
- Breakout facility: Not required
• Locking mechanism: Hook lock for perimeter external door
• Signs: to warn of automatic operation
• Barriers: As required by location
• Other requirements:
- key switch
- 2 directional radar
- Monitored, self-testing battery back-up
520
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS - ALUMINIUM
• Manufacturer: Dorma UK Limited, Automatics Division, Wilbury Way, Hitchen,
Herts, SG4 0AB
Tel: 01462 477600
Email: [email protected]
• Arrangement: into glazed pocket
- Track system: By manufacturer
• Door leaf:
- Finish as delivered: Powder coated
- Glazing details: Double glazed
- Manifestation: TBC by CA and to conform to Approved Document N.
• Operation:
- ES200 sliding door operator
- Active8 radar/safety sensing device
• Ironmongery: Hook lock
• Other requirements:
- Key switch
- Push pad or swipe/proximity card access controls
- Monitored, self-testing battery back-up
- Electromagnetic lock as required by location/use
545
SLIDING STACKING PANEL PARTITIONS
• Manufacturer: Dorma UK Limited, Style South, Consort House, Princes Road,
Ferndown, Dorset, BH22 9JG
Tel: 01202 874044
Email: [email protected]
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
547
Product reference: Moveo.
Performance: 49db RW or Project Specific
Operation: Semi Automatic
Dimensions (nominal): Project specific
Stacking: Single point suspension
- Solution: Project Specific
Track system:
- Type R or Project Specific
- Polyester powder coat finish
- Wall jamb/ Abutments: By manufacturer
Panels:
- Construction: Project Specific
- Finish as delivered: Project specific
- Joint detail: By manufacturer
- Finish: Project Specific
- Vision panels: NA
Pass doors: Integrated
Ironmongery: By manufacturer
Junctions/ Corners: By manufacturer
Glass manifestation: Project Specific
Other requirements: Acoustic baffles in ceiling void to be supplied and fitted by
others to match acoustic performance of the moveable partition
DESIGN, SITE DIMENSIONS AND SURVEY
• Design
- Specialist Contractor shall provide drawings to the Main Contractor depicting
all profiles, glazing, weather seals, gaskets fixings and sealants to be used
and the relationship of the above to the adjacent structural detail for each
door type
- Specialist Contractor is to provide drawings showing the relationship of
framing to structure, including all profiles, sealants, fixings, trims and
weatherseals.
Notwithstanding any information within this Specification, all framing and
infills shall be capable of withstanding the design wind loadings calculated in
accordance with BS6399 Pt2: 1997, and imposed loads as defined in
BS6399 Pt1: 1996, and the Specialist Contractor shall carry out calculations
to demonstrate this.
- NOTE: Calculate inertia value of framing using Biblio/BRE and Table 4 of
BS6399Pt1 (HUDLL in Kn/m – column 3). For thickness of glazed infills,
refer to BS6180 Table 2 or glass manufacturer’s information.
- Any packing sections or materials required to compensate for misaligned
apertures shall be agreed by the Contract Administrator prior to
manufacture.
- Allow for anomalies and variations in the size of the openings, and for outof-square openings. This is to include for the manufacture of ‘specials’ as
necessary.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L20
DOORS / SHUTTERS / HATCHES
INSTALLATION
710
PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS
• General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately
or placed in clean, dry, floored and covered storage.
• Stored components: Stacked on level bearers, separated with spacers to
prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.
730
PRIMING / SEALING
• Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Primed or sealed as specified
before fixing components.
790
FIXING OF WOOD FRAMES
• Spacing of fixings (frames not predrilled): Maximum 150 mm from ends of each
jamb and at 600 mm maximum centres.
809
FIRE RESISTING AND / OR SMOKE CONTROL DOORS/DOORSETS
• Installation: By a firm currently registered under a third party accredited fire door
installer scheme in accordance with instructions supplied with the product
conformity certificate, test report or engineering assessment.
820
SEALANT JOINTS
• Sealant:
• Manufacturer: Dow Corning or equal approved.
• Product reference: Firestop 400 silicone sealant.
• Colour: White.
• Application: As section Z22 to prepared joints. Triangular fillets finished to a flat
or slightly convex profile.
830
FIXING IRONMONGERY GENERALLY
• Fasteners: Supplied by Ironmongery manufacturer.
• Finish Corrosion resistance: To match ironmongery.
• Holes for components: No larger than required for satisfactory full operation.
• Adjacent surfaces: Undamaged.
• Moving parts: Adjusted, lubricated and functioning correctly at completion.
840
FIXING IRONMONGERY TO FIRE RESISTING DOOR ASSEMBLIES
• General: All items fixed in accordance with door leaf manufacturer's
recommendations ensuring that integrity of the assembly, as established by
testing, is not compromised.
• Holes for through fixings and components: Accurately cut.
• Clearances: Not more than 8 mm unless protected by intumescent paste or
similar.
• Lock/Latch cases for FD60 doors: Coated with intumescent paint or paste
before installation.
850
LOCATION OF HINGES
• Primary hinges: Where not specified otherwise, positioned with centre lines 250
mm from top and bottom of door leaf.
• Third hinge: Where specified, positioned on centre line of door leaf.
• Hinges for fire resisting doors: Positioned in accordance with door leaf
manufacturer's recommendations.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L40
GENERAL GLAZING
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
130
REMOVAL OF GLASS/PLASTICS FOR REUSE
• Existing glass/plastics and glazing compound, beads, etc: Remove carefully,
avoiding damage to frame, to leave clean, smooth rebates free from
obstructions and debris.
• Deterioration of frame surround: Submit report on defects revealed by removal
of glazing.
• Affected areas: Do not re-glaze until instructed.
• Reusable materials: Clean glass/plastics, beads and other components that are
to be reused.
150
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
• Glazing generally: To BS 6262.
• Integrity: Glazing must be wind and watertight under all conditions with full
allowance made for deflections and other movements.
• Dimensional tolerances: Panes/sheets to be within ± 2 mm of specified
dimensions.
• Materials:
- Compatibility: Glass/plastics, surround materials, sealers, primers and
paints/clear finishes to be used together to be compatible. Avoid contact
between glazing panes/units and alkaline materials such as cement and
lime.
- Protection: Keep materials dry until fixed. Protect insulating glass units and
plastics glazing sheets from the sun and other heat sources.
152
PREPARATION
• Surrounds, rebates, grooves and beads: Clean and prepare before installing
glazing.
155
GLASS GENERALLY
• Standards: To BS 952 and relevant parts of:
- BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 1096 for coated glass.
- BS EN 1748-1 for borosilicate glass.
- BS EN 1748-2 for ceramic glass.
- BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
- 5S EN 12337 for chemically strengthened soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 13024 for thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass.
- BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass and laminated safety glass.
• Panes/sheets: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, cracks, rippling,
dimples and other defects.
• Edges: Generally undamaged. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep and
extending not more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
L40
GENERAL GLAZING
180
BEAD FIXING WITH PINS
• Pin spacing: Regular at maximum 150 mm centres, and within 50 mm of each
corner.
• Exposed pin heads: Punched just below wood surface.
• Screw spacing: Regular at maximum 225 mm centres, and within 75 mm of
each corner.
181
BEAD FIXING WITH SCREWS TYPES OF GLAZING
250
BEAD FIXED SINGLE GLAZING TO TIMBER SCREENS AND DOORS (USED TO
MATCH EXISTING ONLY)
• Pane material: 6mm thick laminated safety glass (up to 1500mm wide) or 8mm
toughened safely glass (up to 2000mm wide), manifestation as per clause
L40/610C
• Surround bead: Painted softwood or American White Oak (to match finish of
door)
• Preparation: Sealed and polished.
• Bead fixing: Pinned. Beads fixed on both sides.
• Glazing system: Tape: Proprietary glazing tap. Bead bedding sealant: Dow
Corning silicone sealant. Capping sealant: Dow Coming silicone sealant.
• Apply tape of sufficient thickness to produce not less than 3 mm bed on both
sides of the glazing after compression. Butt joint tape at corners leaving no
gaps. Tape to finish approximately 6 mm short of sight line on external side of
glazing to receive capping sealant.
• Locate glazing centrally in the surround using setting and location blocks.
• Bed beads in sealant, press firmly into position to compress tape, and fix
securely.
• Carefully trim excess tape on internal side to a smooth chamfer.
• Apply capping sealant to fill void between bead and glazing and finish to a
smooth chamfer.
610
WINDOW FILM: PARTIALLY OPAQUE PRIVACY FILM
• Intended use: Privacy or manifestation
• Manufacturer: Contractors choice
• Application to be carried out by a firm approved by the film manufacturer in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Applicator's personnel must
be suitably trained and experienced in applying specified materials. Provide
evidence of competence and experience to the CA on request.
• Factory roll numbers to be recorded in accordance with the manufacturer's
warranty procedures.
• Complete a sample area if requested by CA, being part of the finished work, in
an approved location and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
• Install film when the ambient air temperature is above 5˚C.
• Installed film to be fully adhered to the glass with no peeling and free from
bubbles, wrinkles, cracks or tears or finger marks.
• Avoid further contact with applied films until bonding adhesive has cured.
• Film width 1220mm therefore panels over that width will have a joint
• Provide the CA with copies of cleaning and maintenance instructions.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M10
CEMENT:SAND/CONCRETE SCREEDS/GRANOLITHIC SCREEDS/TOPPING
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
TYPES OF SCREED
115A
CEMENT:SAND SCREEDS To project specific
• Base: concrete floor structure.
• Screed type: Partially bonded as clause 270.
• Reinforcement for crack control: Not required.
• Nominal thickness: project specific.
• Thickness (minimum): 50 mm.
• Mix:
- Aggregates: Standards as clause 305.
- Proportions (cement:sand): 1:3 - 4.5.
- Admixture: As clause 307.
• In situ crushing resistance (ISCR): As clause 335.
• Mass of test weight 4 kg.
• Depth of indentation (maximum): 3 mm.
• Datum levels: project specific.
• Flatness/surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation when measured as
clause 355: SR1.
• Finish:
- Method: Trowelled as clause 540.
- To receive: Varies, as project finishes schedule.
• Other requirements: None.
115B
PROPRIETARY QUICK DRYING (24HR) SCREED (NON-WEARING, TO
RECEIVE PROTECTIVE FLOOR FINISH) TO project specific
• Base: concrete floor structure (must incorporate a dpm if ground bearing)
prepared (and primed if necessary) as per manufacturer's instructions.
• Cement manufacturer: ARDEX UK Ltd, Homefield Road, Haverhill, Suffolk CB9
BOP. Tel: 01440 714939, Fax: 01440 716640, Email: [email protected] Web
address: www.ardex.co.uk (OR EQUAL APPROVED).
• Product reference: ARDEX A35, to be used in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
• Screed type: Fully bonded as per manufacturer's instructions.
• Reinforcement for crack control: Not required.
• Nominal thickness: project specific.
• Thickness (minimum): 25 mm.
• Mix:
- Cement: 1:5.
- Aggregates: Standards as clause 305.
• Coarse aggregate single size: To BS 8204-1:2003 Annex B, 10 mm. For screed
thicknesses greater than 50 mm. For screed thicknesses less than 50 mm,
delete item.
• Proportions: To manufacturer's recommendations.
• In situ crushing resistance (lSCR): As clause 335.
• Mass of test weight: Consult ARDEX technical literature for details of
classifications.
• Depth of indentation (maximum): 3mm.
• Datum levels: project specific.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M10
CEMENT:SAND/CONCRETE SCREEDS/GRANOLITHIC SCREEDS/TOPPING
•
•
•
Flatness/surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation when measured as
clause 355: fit for purpose.
Finish:
- Method: Smooth floated as clause 530 or trowelled as clause 540,
dependant on floor finish.
- To receive: Varies, as project finishes schedule.
Other requirements: None.
115C
PROPRIETARY QUICK DRYING (24HR) SCREED (HIGH STRENGTH,
WEARING) TO project specific
• Base: concrete floor structure (must incorporate a dpm if ground bearing)
prepared (and primed if necessary) as per manufacturer's instructions.
• Cement manufacturer: ARDEX UK Ltd, Homefield Road, Haverhlll, Suffolk CB9
80P Tel: 01440 714939 Fax: 01440 716640 Email: [email protected] Web:
www.ardex.co.uk (OR EQUAL APPROVED).
• Product reference: ARDEX EB2, to be used in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
• Screed type: Fully bonded as per manufacturer's instructions.
• Reinforcement for crack control: Not required.
• Nominal thickness: project specific.
• Thickness (minimum): 20 mm.
• Mix: Cement: 1:4.
- Aggregates: Standards as clause 305.
- Coarse aggregate single size: To BS 8204-1:2003 Annex B, 10 mm. For
screed thicknesses greater than 50 mm. For screed thicknesses less than
50 mm, delete item.
• Proportions: To manufacturer's recommendations,
• In situ crushing resistance (ISCR): As clause 335.
• Mass of test weight: Consult AROEX technical literature for details of
classifications.
• Depth of indentation (maximum): 3mm.
• Datum levels: project specific.
• Flatness Surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation when measured as
clause 355: fit for purpose.
• Finish:
- Method: Smooth floated as clause 530 or trowelled as clause 540,
dependant on floor finish.
- To receive: Varies, as project finishes schedule.
• Other requirements: None.
190A
SMOOTHING / LEVELLING COMPOUND (WATER BASED. DRY IN 24HRS) TO
EXISTING IN·SITU FLOORS
• Base: Existing screeds or concrete, prepared (and primed if necessary) in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
• Manufacturer and reference: Ardex Ardit K13, to be used in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
• Thickness: feather edge to 5mm.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M10
CEMENT:SAND/CONCRETE SCREEDS/GRANOLITHIC SCREEDS/TOPPING
190B
SMOOTHING / LEVELLING COMPOUND (WATER BASED, DRY IN 24HRS) TO
EXISTING IN· SITU FLOORS
• Base: Existing screeds or concrete, prepared (and primed if necessary)in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions
• Manufacturer and reference: Ardex Ardit K15 (over a base of K15-B for
thicknesses over 7mm), to be used In accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
• Thickness: feather edge to 35mm.
190C
SMOOTHING / LEVELLING COMPOUND (WATER BASED, DRY IN 1.5HRS) TO
EXISTING IN·SITU FLOORS
• Base: Existing screeds or concrete, prepared (and primed if necessary)in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• Manufacturer and reference: Ardex Ardit 55, to be used in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
• Thickness: feather edge to 10mm or greater with the addition of Ardex
Aggregate.
190D
SMOOTHING / LEVELLING COMPOUND (LATEX BASED, DRY IN 4HRS) TO
EXISTING IN-SITU FLOORS.
• Base: Existing screeds or concrete or timber, prepared (and primed if
necessary) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• Manufacturer and reference: Ardex Arditex, to be used in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. TO BE USED ONLY WHEN WATER BASED
COMPOUNDS ARE NOT SUITABLE. CONTRATOR TO OBTAIN PRIOR
APPROVAL FROM CA.
• Thickness: feather edge to 8mm or greater with the addition of Ardex
Aggregate.
GENERALLY/PREPARATION
210
SUITABILITY DF BASES
• General:
- Suitable for specified levels and flatness/regularity of finished surfaces.
Consider permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of screeds.
- Sound and free from significant cracks and gaps.
• Cleanliness: Remove plaster, debris and dirt.
• Moisture content: To suit screed type. New concrete slabs to receive fully or
partially bonded construction must be dried out by exposure to the air for
minimum six weeks.
220
PROPRIETARY LEVELING/WEARING SCREEDS
• General: Materials, mix proportions, mixing methods, minimum/maximum
thicknesses and workmanship must be in accordance with recommendations of
screed manufacturer.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M10
CEMENT:SAND/CONCRETE SCREEDS/GRANOLITHIC SCREEDS/TOPPING
251
CONDUITS CAST INTO OR UNDER SCREEDS
• Reinforcement: Overlay with reinforcement selected from:
- 500 mm wide strip of steel fabric to BS 4483, reference D49, or
- Welded mesh manufactured in rolls from mild steel wire minimum 1.5 mm
diameter to BS 1052, mesh size 50 x 50 mm.
• Placing reinforcement: Mid depth between top of conduit and the screed
surface.
• Screed cover over conduit (minimum): 25 mm.
260
FULLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION
• Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1.
• Removing mortar matrix: Shortly before laying screed, expose coarse aggregate
over entire area of hardened base.
• Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a full bond over
complete area.
• Bonding coat: As recommended by screed manufacturer.
270
PARTIALLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION
• Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1
• Base surface: Brushed finish with no surface laitance.
• Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a bond over complete
area.
• Bonding coat: As recommended by screed manufacturer.
275
CEMENT SLURRY BONDING
• Slurry type: SBR polymer modified cement.
• Application: Shortly before laying screed, thoroughly wash clean the surface and
keep well welted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in cement
slurry bonding coat of creamy consistency.
• Screeding: While slurry is still wet.
280
UNBONDED CONSTRUCTION
• Separation: Lay screed over a suitable sheet dpm or a separating layer.
• Type: Polyethylene sheet not less than 65 micrometres thick (250 gauge).
Building paper to BS 1521, Grade B1F.
• Installation of separating layer: Lay on clean base. Turn up for full depth of
screed at abutments with walls, columns, etc. Lap 100 mm at joints.
BATCHING/MIXING
305A
AGGREGATE STANDARDS
• Cement Portland to BS EN 197-1, class 42.5 or Portland blast furnace to BS
146, class 42.5.
• Sand: To BS EN 13139.
• For thin bonded levelling screeds a 0/4 fine aggregate, having a fines category
1, with range MP and having a grading between 20% and 66% passing a 500
sieve.
• For levelling screeds thicker than 50mm use 0/8 fine aggregate with fines
category 1 with range MP
• Coarse aggregate: To BS EN 12620.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M10
CEMENT:SAND/CONCRETE SCREEDS/GRANOLITHIC SCREEDS/TOPPING
307
ADMIXTURE STANDARD
• Type: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2.
• Calcium chloride: Do not use in admixtures.
310
BATCHING WITH DENSE AGGREGATES
• Mix proportions: Specified by weight.
• Batching: Select from:
- Batch by weight.
- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established weight
volume relationships of the particular materials. Use accurate gauge boxes.
Allow for bulking of damp sand.
330
MIXING
• Water content Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to
prevent excessive water being brought to surface during compaction.
• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistence. Mixes other than nofines must be mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a
free fall drum type mixer.
• Consistency: Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
• Ready-mixed retarded screed mortar: Use within working time and site
temperatures recommended by manufacturer. Do not retemper.
335
IN SITU CRUSHING RESISTANCE (ISCR)
• Standards and category: To BS 8204-1 table 5.
• For testing at bonded screeds refer la Annex C.
• For testing of floating screeds refer to Annex D.
• Class Service Indentation conditions depth.
• A: Heavy use 3 mm. B: Normal use 4 mm. C: Light use 5 mm.
340
ADVERSE WEATHER
• Screeds surface temperature: Maintain above 5˚C for a minimum of four days
after laying.
• Hot weather: Prevent premature setting or drying out.
LAYING
345
LEVELS OF SCREEDS SURFACES
• Permissible deviation: ±10 mm from datum (allowing for thickness of coverings).
355
FLATNESS / SURFACE REGULARITY OF FLOOR SCREEDS
• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 3 m straightedge (between
points of contact), placed anywhere on surface using a slip gauge to BS 8204-1
or -2 (or equivalent).
• Surface regularity standards:
- SR1: 3 mm high standard.
- SR2: 5 mm normal standard.
- SR3: 10 mm utility standard.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M10
CEMENT:SAND/CONCRETE SCREEDS/GRANOLITHIC SCREEDS/TOPPING
375
COMPACTION OF SCREEDS
• General: Compact thoroughly over entire area.
• Screeds over 50 mm thick: Lay in two layers of approximately equal thickness.
Roughen surface of compacted lower layer then immediately lay upper layer.
405
JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS GENERALLY
• Laying screeds: Lay continuously using 'wet screeds' between strips or bays.
Minimize defined joints.
• Daywork joints: Form with vertical edge.
FINISHING/CURING
510
FINISHING GENERALLY
• Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to setting
and hardening of screed material.
• Prohibited treatments to screed surfaces:
- Wetting to assist surface working.
- Sprinkling cement.
530
SMOOTH FLOATED FINISH
• Finish: Even texture with no ridges or steps
540
TROWELLED FINISH TO LEVELLING SCREEDS
• Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps.
• Trowelling: To a uniform, smooth but not polished surface, free from trowel
marks and other blemishes, and suitable to receive specified flooring material.
650
CURING
• General: Prevent premature drying. Immediately after laying, protect surface
from wind, draughts and strong sunlight. As soon as screed has set sufficiently,
closely cover with polyethylene sheeting.
• Curing period: Keep polyethylene sheeting in position for a minimum of period
recommended by screed manufacturer.
• Drying after curing: Allow screeds to dry gradually. Do not subject screeds to
artificial drying conditions that will cause cracking or other shrinkage related
problems.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M20
PLASTERED / RENDERED / ROUGHCAST COATINGS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
TYPES OF COATING
110
CEMENT / LlME / SAND RENDER GENERALLY
• Background: brickwork / blockwork.
- Preparation: In accordance with BS 5262 and BS8000-10.
• Undercoats:
• Lime:sand: Ready-mixed to BS 4721.
- Sand: To BS 1199, type A.
- Mix (cement:lime:sand): Mix designation 2 to BS 5262:1991 (requires a fairly
strong background, refer to BS for weak backgrounds.
- Other requirements:
- Thickness (excluding dubbing out): 8-12mm.
• Final coat:
- Lime:sand: Ready-mixed to BS 4721.
- Sand: To BS 1199, type A.
- Lime:sand manufacturer: Contractor's choice.
- Product reference: Contractor's choice.
- Mix (cemenl:lime:sand): 1:4.
- Other requirements:
- Thickness: 8-10mm.
- Finish: plain wood float unless specified otherwise.
• Accessories: Bell cast stops and beads as clause 636.
160
PROPRIETARY RENDER One-coat decorative coloured scratch render.
• Background: brickwork / blockwork.
• Preparation: Remove all loose dust and other surface contaminants. All existing
render and paints to be fully removed. Dub out if necessary to give level surface
and allow to cure. Mortar joints to be raked lightly to provide a key. Where
necessary, consolidate and seal substrate with a proprietary Acrylic sealer
internally or SBR sealer externally, in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Apply SBR slurry coat to dense impervious concrete substrates.
Seal lightweight concrete blocks with a very high suction with an Acrylic or an
SBR type sealer before coating, it is also recommended rendering onto the
sealed surface whilst the sealer is still tacky.
• Manufacturer: Lafarge Cement United Kingdom, Manor House, Chilton OX11
ORN. Tel: 01235 448 400, Fax: 01235 448 600, Email:
[email protected] Web: www.lafargecement.co.uk (or equal
approved).
• Product reference: Blue Circle Rendaplus Colourtex S Coat. Refer to finishes
schedule for colour.
• Undercoats:
- Types: not required.
- Thickness (excluding dubbing out): n/a.
• Final coat:
- Thickness: 16mm. When ashlar cutting is required, ensure that minimum
10mm of Colourtex S remains between the cut and the substrate.
- Finish: Apply Colourtex S to a minimum of 16 mm in two passes, using a
maximum of 12 mm in each pass. Rule off to a flat surface using a darby or
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M20
PLASTERED / RENDERED / ROUGHCAST COATINGS
•
long spatula. Texture finish applied when render has set but not fully
hardened using a scraping float.
Accessories: Bell cast stops and beads as clause 636.
200
GYPSUM PLASTER ON CEMENT GAUGED RENDER UNDERCOATS
• Background: brickwork / blockwork.
• Preparation: In accordance with BS 5262 and B58000-10.
• Undercoats:
- Sand: To BS 1199, type A.
- Mix: mix designation 2 of BS 5492:1990.
- Other requirements:
- Thickness (excluding dubbing out): 12mm.
• Final coat: Gypsum plaster to BS 1191-1, class B.
- Manufacturer: British Gypsum Ltd, East Leake, Loughborough, Leics. LE12
6JT. Tel: 0670 545 6123 Fax: 0870 545 6356. (or equal approved).
- Product reference: Thistle Plaster Finish.
- Thickness: 3mm.
- Finish: Smooth as clause 777.
• Accessories: as clause 630.
210
LIGHTWEIGHT GYPSUM PLASTER
• General replastering applications
• Background: brickwork / blockwork - existing.
• Preparation: In accordance with BS 5262 and BS8000-10.
• Undercoats: To BS 1191-2.
- Manufacturer: British Gypsum Ltd, East Leake, Loughborough. Leics. LE12
6JT Tel: 06705 456123, Fax: 06705 456356. (or equal approved)
- Product reference: Thistle Renovating.
- Thickness (excluding dubbing out): 11mm.
• Final coat: Finish plaster to BS 1191-1, class B.
- Manufacturer: as undercoat.
- Product reference: Thistle Renovating Finish.
- Thickness: 2 mm.
- Finish: Smooth as clause 777.
• Accessories: as clause 630.
210A
LIGHTWEIGHT GYPSUM PLASTER General new-build plastering
• Background: brickwork / blockwork - new build.
• Preparation: In accordance with BS 5262 and BS8000-10.
• Undercoats: To BS 1191-2.
• Manufacturer: British Gypsum Ltd, East Leake, Loughborough, Leics. LE12 6JT
Tel: 06705 456123, Fax: 06705 456356. (or equal approved).
• Product reference: Thistle Browning.
• Thickness (excluding dubbing out): 11mm.
• Final coat: Finish plaster to BS 1191-1, class B.
• Manufacturer: as undercoat.
• Product reference: Thistle Plaster Finish.
• Thickness: 2 mm.
• Finish: Smooth as clause 777.
• Accessories: as clause 630.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M20
PLASTERED / RENDERED / ROUGHCAST COATINGS
280
GYPSUM PLASTER SKIM ON PLASTERBOARD
• Background: project specific, generally stud framework.
• Backing: plasterboards.
- Preparation: as clause 612.
• Plaster: Board finish/finish plaster to BS 1191-1, class B.
- Manufacturer: British Gypsum Ltd. East Leake, Loughborough, Leics. LE12
6JT. Tel: 0670 545 6123 Fax: 0670 545 6356 (or equal approved).
- Product reference: Thistle Board Finish.
- Thickness: 2mm.
- Finish: Smooth as clause 777.
• Accessories: beads to external corners.
GENERAL
436
CEMENTS FOR RENDER MORTARS
• Cement:
- Standard: To BS EN 197-1.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I. Portland slag cement, CEM II / B-S.
Portland fly ash cement. CEM II / B-V.
- Strength class: 42.5 or 52.5.
• Sulfate resisting cement:
- Standard: To BS 4027.
- Strength class: 42.5 or 52.5.
• Masonry cement
- Standard: To BS 5224.
- Class: MC 12.5 (with air entraining agent).
• Certification for all cements: BSI Kitemark scheme.
449
ADMIXTURES FOR CEMENT GAUGED RENDER MORTARS
• Suitable admixtures: Select from:
- Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS 4887-1 and compatible with
other mortar constituents.
- Other admixtures: Submit proposals.
• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride and any admixture containing calcium
chloride.
453
MIXING
• Render mortars (site prepared):
- Batching: By volume. Use dean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.
- Mix proportions: Based on damp sand. Adjust for dry sand.
• Mixes: Of uniform consistence and free from lumps, Do not retemper or
reconstitute mixes.
• Contamination: Prevent/keep plant and banker boards clean.
474
COLD WEATHER
• General: Do not use frozen materials or apply coatings to frozen or frost bound
backgrounds.
• External work: Avoid when air temperature is at or below 5˚C and falling or
below 3˚C and rising. Maintain temperature of work above freezing until
coatings have fully hardened.
• Internal work: Take all necessary precautions to enable internal coating work to
proceed without damage when air temperature is below 3˚C.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M20
PLASTERED / RENDERED / ROUGHCAST COATINGS
481
READY PREPARED LIME PUTTY
• Type: Slaked directly from CL 90 (high calcium) quicklime to SS a90, using an
excess of water.
- In pits/containers that allow excess water to drain away.
- Density of matured lime putty: 1.3 - 1.4 kg/litre.
• Maturation period before use (minimum): 90 days.
• Storage: Prevent drying out or welting and protect from frost.
PREPARING BACKGROUNDS
510
SUITABILITY OF BACKGROUNDS
• General: Suitable to receive coatings/backings.
- Soundness: Free from loose areas and significant cracks and gaps.
- Cutting, chasing, making good, fixing of conduits and services outlets and
the like: Completed.
- Tolerances: Permitting specified flatness/regularity of finished coatings.
• Cleanliness: Remove dirt, dust, efflorescence and mould, and other
contaminants incompatible with coatings.
538
STIPPLE KEYING MIX
• Materials:
- Cement: Portland.
- Sand: Clean coarse.
- Admixture: SBR bonding agent, Agrément certified.
• Mix proportions (cement:sand): 1:1.5 - 2.
• Consistency: Thick slurry kept well stirred.
• Application: Vigorously brushed on and stippled to form deep close textured
key.
• Curing: Controlled to achieve a firm bond to background.
541
BONDING AGENT
• Manufacturer: Safeguard Chemicals Ltd. Redkiln Close, Redkiln Way, Horsham,
West Sussex, RH13 5QL. Tel: 01403 210204, Fax: 01403 217529 Email:
[email protected] Web: www.safeguardchem.com (or equal approved)
• Product reference: SWS Bondaid Plus.
• Application: Evenly across background to achieve effective bond or
plaster/render coat to background. Protect adjacent joinery and other surfaces.
556
REMOVING DEFECTIVE EXISTING RENDER
• Render for removal: Loose, hollow, soft, friable, badly cracked, affected by
efflorescence or otherwise damaged.
• Patches: Cut out rectangular areas with straight edges.
- Horizontal and vertical edges: Square cut or slightly undercut.
- Bottom edges to external render: Do not undercut.
- Render with imitation joints: Cut back to joint lines.
• Cracks (other than hairline cracks): Cut out to a width of 75 mm (minimum).
• Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed backgrounds and edges.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M20
PLASTERED / RENDERED / ROUGHCAST COATINGS
568
EXISTING DAMP AFFECTED PLASTER/RENDER
• Plaster affected by rising damp: Remove to a height of 300 mm above highest
point reached by damp or 1 m above dpc, whichever is higher.
• Perished and salt contaminated masonry:
- Mortar joints: Rake out.
- Masonry units: Seek instructions.
• Faults in background (structural deficiencies, additional sources of damp, etc.):
Seek instructions.
• Drying out backgrounds: Established drying conditions. Leave walls to dry for as
long as possible before plastering.
• Dust and loose material: Remove from exposed backgrounds and edges.
BACKINGS / BEADS / JOINTS
605
GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD BACKINGS
• Type: To BS 1230, type 1.
• Core density (minimum): 650kg/m3.
• Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified plaster finish.
610
FIXING PLASTERBOARD BACKINGS TO TIMBER BACKGROUNDS
• Fixings, accessories and installation methods: As recommended by board
manufacturer.
• Fixing: At following centres (maximum):
- Nail fixing: 150 mm.
- Screw fixing to partitions / walls: 300 mm reduced to 200 mm at external
angles.
- Screw fixing to ceilings: 230 mm.
• Position of nails/screws from edges of boards (minimum):
- Bound edges: 10 mm.
- Cut unbound edges: 13 mm.
• Position of nails/screws from edges of supports (minimum): 6 mm.
• Nail/screw heads: Set in a depression. Do not break paper or gypsum core.
612
JOINTS IN PLASTERBOARD BACKINGS
• Ceilings:
- Bound edges: At right angles to supports and with ends staggered in
adjacent rows.
- Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.
• Partitions/walls:
- Vertical joints: Centre on studs. Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs.
- Two layer boarding:
- Stagger joints between layers.
- Horizontal joints: Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at
least 600 mm. Support edges of outer layer.
- Joint widths (maximum): 3 mm.
630
BEADS/STOPS FOR INTERNAL USE
• Material: Galvanized steel to BS 6452-1.
636
BEADS/STOPS FOR EXTERNAL USE
• Stainless steel: To BS EN 10088-1
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M20
PLASTERED / RENDERED / ROUGHCAST COATINGS
640
BEADS/STOPS GENERALLY
• Location: External angles and stop ends except where specified otherwise.
• Corners: Neat mitres at return angles.
• Fixing: Secure, using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line
and level, ensuring full contact of wings with background.
• External render: Fix mechanically.
• Finishing: After coatings have been applied, remove surplus material while still
wet, from surfaces of beads/stops which are exposed to view.
646
CRACK CONTROL AT JUNTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR SOLID
BACKGROUNDS
• Locations: Where defined movement joints are not required. Where dissimilar
solid background materials are in same plane and rigidly bonded or tied
together.
• Crack control materials:
- Isolating layer: Building paper to BS 1521.
- Metal lathing: stainless steel ribbed expanded metal.
• Installation: Fix lathing over isolating layer at staggered centres along both
edges.
• Width of installation over single junctions:
- Isolating layer: 150 mm.
- Lathing: 300 mm.
• Width of installation across face of dissimilar background material (column,
beam, etc. with face width not greater than 450 mm):
- Isolating layer: Not less than 25 mm beyond junctions with adjacent
background.
- Lathing: Not less than 100 mm beyond edges of isolating layer.
659
PLASTERBOARD JOINTS
• Joint reinforcement Applied to joints and angles except where coincident with
metal beads.
• Installation: Continuous lengths of tape pressed well into filled joints, flat and
smooth.
PLASTERING
710
APPLICATION GENERALLY
• General: Apply coatings firmly and in one continuous operation between angles
and joints.
• Achieve good adhesion.
• Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling,
hollows, ridges, cracks and crazing.
• Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and
corners to a right angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals
plumb and square.
• Drying out: Prevent excessively rapid or localised drying out.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M20
PLASTERED / RENDERED / ROUGHCAST COATINGS
715
FLATNESS / SURFACE REGULARITY
• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Deviation of plaster surface: Measure from underside of a straight edge placed
anywhere on surface.
• Permissible deviation (maximum) for plaster not less than 13 mm thick: 3 mm in
any consecutive length of 1800 mm
720
DUBBING OUT
• General: To correct background inaccuracies.
• Smooth dense concrete and similar surfaces: Dubbing out prohibited unless
total plaster thickness is within range recommended by plaster manufacturer.
• Thickness of anyone coat (maximum): 10 mm.
• Mix: As undercoat.
• Application: Achieve firm bond. Allow each coat to set sufficiently before the
next is applied. Cross scratch surface of each coat.
725
UNDERCOATS GENERALLY
• General: Rule to an even surface. Cross scratch to provide a key for the next
coat.
• Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key.
• Undercoats gauged with Portland cement: Do not apply next coat until drying
shrinkage is substantially complete.
777
SMOOTH FINISH
• Appearance: A tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of
level or trowel marks. Avoid water brush, excessive towelling and over polishing.
RENDERING
810
APPLICATION GENERALLY
• General: Apply coatings firmly and in one continuous operation between angles
and joints. Achieve good adhesion.
• Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling,
hollows, ridges, cracks and crazing.
• Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and
corners to a right angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals
plumb and square.
• Drying: Prevent excessively rapid or localised drying out.
815
FLATNESS / SURFACE REGULARITY OF RENDERING TO RECEIVE CERAMIC
TILES
• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Deviation of render surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straight edge
placed anywhere on surface.
• Permissible deviation (maximum): 3 mm.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M20
PLASTERED / RENDERED / ROUGHCAST COATINGS
820
DUBBING OUT FOR RENDERING
• General: To correct background inaccuracies.
• Thickness of anyone coat (maximum): 16 mm.
• Total thickness (maximum): 20 mm. Seek instructions where this will be
exceeded.
• Mix: as undercoat.
• Application: Achieve firm bond. Allow each coat to set sufficiently before the
next is applied. Comb surface of each coat.
840
UNDERCOATS GENERALLY
• General: Rule to an even surface, Comb to provide a key for the next coat. Do
not penetrate the coat.
• Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key.
856
FINAL COAT PLAIN FLOATED FINISH
• Finish: An even, open texture free from laitance.
861
FINAL COAT SCRAPED FINISH
• Finish: Scraped to expose aggregate and achieve an even texture.
880
CURING AND DRYING
• General: Prevent premature setting and uneven drying or each coat.
• Curing coatings: Keep each coat damp by covering with polyethylene sheet and
/ or spraying with water.
• Curing period (minimum): 4 days.
• Final coat: Hang sheeting clear of the final coat.
• Drying: Allow each coat to dry thoroughly, with drying shrinkage substantially
complete before applying next coat.
• Protection: Protect from frost and rain.
885
CURING AND DRYING OF NON-HYDRAULIC LIME RENDER
• General: Prevent premature setting and uneven drying of each coat.
• Curing coatings: Keep each coat damp by covering with sheeting and spraying
with water until sufficiently firm. Hang sheeting clear of coatings.
• Sheeting: contractor's choice.
• Shrinkage: Thoroughly consolidate / scour each coat one or more times as
necessary to control shrinkage.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M31
FIBROUS PLASTER
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
MOULDINGS/DECORATIVE PLASTERWORK
680
FIBROUS PLASTER MOULDINGS
• Where indicated on project drawings.
• Type: To match existing unless otherwise specified, supplied and installed by
specialist contractor to CA approval.
• Noggins, bearers. etc. to support mouldings: Accurately position and securely
fit:
• Insulation: True to line and level,
• Fixing: Specialist contractor's choice for approval by CA.
• Framing, fixing points and joints: Reinforce.
• Finishing: Flush and smooth to correct profile.
Issue: 1.0
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M40
STONE / CONCRETE / QUARRY / CERAMIC TILING / MOSAIC
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
TYPES OF TILING/ MOSAIC
110
TILING TO WALLS
• Tiles: ceramic wall tiles to BS 6431: Part 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17 and 19.
• Manufacturer/Supplier: Johnson Tiles, Harewood Street, Tunstall, Stoke on
Trent ST6 5JZ
• Product reference: Prismatics.
• Finish: Glazed.
• Size: 152x152mm, 200x200mm, 200x100mm.
• Thickness: 6.5mm.
• Background/ Base: Existing and new plaster/plasterboard wall surfaces.
• Preparation: In accordance with this section and any specific requirements of
the tile manufacturer.
• Bedding: Thin bed adhesive - ribbed, as clause 650.
• Adhesive: As recommended by tile manufacturer.
• Joint width: As spacer lugs.
• Grout: type recommended by tile manufacturer. Colour - white. Accessories:
exposed edges to be fully glazed or use matching colour corner beads.
110A
TILING TO FLOORS – TOILET AREAS
• Tiles: Porcelain floor tiles to BS 6431: Part 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 19, and 22.
• Manufacturer/Supplier: Johnson Tiles, Harewood Street, Tunstall, Stoke on
Trent ST6 5JZ
• Product reference: Kerastar Solid Colour ‘Crius’
• Finish: as required to meet the desired slip resistance.
• Min standard for toilet areas to be 36+ in accordance with the pendulum test (to
BS 7976) or classification A or B (R10)
• Size: 200x200mm
• Thickness: 8.5mm, 10mm.
• Background/ Base: Existing and new cement: sand screed
• Preparation: As clauses 310 & 320
• Intermediate substrate: Not required
• Bedding: Thick Bed Solid Bed Floor Trowel as clause 710
• Adhesive: As recommended by tile manufacturer
• Joint width: Minimum 3mm, maximum 10mm.
• Grout: As recommended by tile manufacturer
• Movement joints: Movement joints should extend through the tiling and its bed
and coincide with any structural movement joints. British Standard BS 5385:
Part 3: 1989 recommends that movement joints should be provided around the
perimeter of the tiled installation with intermediate movement joints being
provided in larger areas at 8m to 10m intervals. On suspended floors stress
relieving joints should be provided over supporting walls or beams where there
is a risk of flexing.
• Accessories: Kerastar coved skirting, angles and step edgings
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M40
STONE / CONCRETE / QUARRY / CERAMIC TILING / MOSAIC
110B
TILING TO FLOORS – WET AREAS
• Tiles: Porcelain floor tiles to BS 6431: Part 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 19, and 22.
•
Manufacturer/Supplier: Johnson Tiles, Harewood Street, Tunstall, Stoke on
Trent ST6 5JZ
• Product reference: Kerastar Rocktop ‘Triton’
• Finish: as required to meet the desired slip resistance.
• Min standard for wet areas to be 36+ in accordance with the pendulum test (to
• BS 7976) or Classification B or C (R11).
• Size: 200x200mm
• Thickness: 8.5mm, 10mm.
• Background/ Base: Existing and new cement: sand screed
• Preparation: As clauses 310 & 320
• Intermediate substrate: Not required
• Bedding: Thick Bed Solid Bed Floor Trowel as clause 710
• Adhesive: As recommended by tile manufacturer
• Joint width: Minimum 3mm, maximum 10mm.
• Grout: As recommended by tile manufacturer
• Movement joints: Movement joints should extend through the tiling and its bed
and coincide with any structural movement joints. British Standard BS 5385:
Part 3: 1989 recommends that movement joints should be provided around the
perimeter of the tiled installation with intermediate movement joints being
provided in larger areas at 8m to 10m intervals. On suspended floors stress
relieving joints should be provided over supporting walls or beams where there
is a risk of flexing.
• Accessories: Kerastar coved skirting, angles and step edgings
GENERALLY
210
SUITABILITY OF BACKGROUNDS/ BASES
• Background/ base tolerances: To permit specified flatness/ regularity of finished
surfaces given the permissible minimum and maximum thickness of bedding to
BS 8204 -1.
• Suitable and sufficiently strong to receive and support a tiled finish.
• Suitable for the conditions to which it will be exposed.
• Fully dry and free from contamination, laitance etc.
• New background drying times to BS 8204-2 or (minimum):
• Concrete walls: 6 weeks.
• Brick/ block walls: 6 weeks.
• Rendering: 2 weeks.
• Gypsum plaster: 4 weeks.
• New base drying times (minimum):
• Concrete slabs: 6 weeks.
• Cement:sand screeds: 3 weeks.
215
FALLS IN BASES
• General: Give notice if falls are inadequate.
260
CONTROL SAMPLES
• General: Complete sample areas, being part of finished work, in locations as
directed by CA
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M40
STONE / CONCRETE / QUARRY / CERAMIC TILING / MOSAIC
PREPARATION
310
EXISTING BACKGROUNDS/BASES GENERALLY
• Efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material: Remove.
• Deposits of oil, grease and other materials incompatible with the bedding:
Remove.
• Tiles, and nonporous surfaces: Clean.
• Painted surfaces are unsuitable paint is to be removed as BS 5385-1.
• Wet backgrounds: Dry before tiling.
320
CONCRETE/SCREEDS
• New concrete must be a minimum 6 weeks old before application of a cement:
sand screed or tiled finish.
• New cement: sand screeds should be cured for at least 7 days prior to being
subjected to continuous air drying for a further 2 weeks before tiling commences
(minimum total drying time = 3 weeks) unless specified otherwise by the screed
manufacturer.
• Loose or hollow portions: Cut out.
• Making good: as per section M10.
• Dusty or porous concrete/screeds should be thoroughly dry brushed and then
primed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
330
EXISTING PLASTER
• Plaster which is loose, soft, friable, badly cracked of affected by efflorescence:
Remove. Cut back to straight horizontal and vertical edges.
• Making good: Use plaster or non-shrinking filler.
370
NEW IN SITU CONCRETE
• Mould oil, surface retarders and other materials incompatible with bedding:
Remove.
380
NEW PLASTER
• Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter.
• Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
390
PLASTERBOARD BACKGROUNDS
• Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings and face to
receive decorative finish exposed.
FIXING
510
FIXING GENERALLY
• Colour/shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/room are
not permitted.
- Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly.
• Adhesive: Compatible with background/base. Prime if recommended by
adhesive manufacturer.
• Cut tiles: Neat and accurate.
• Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/base and tile backs.
• Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary
to give true, regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final
lighting conditions.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M40
STONE / CONCRETE / QUARRY / CERAMIC TILING / MOSAIC
•
Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing
tiles.
530A
SETTING OUT
• Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps.
- Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners.
- Joints in floors: Parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.
• Cut tiles: Minimise number, maximise size and locate unobtrusively.
• Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align
• Joints in adjoining floors and skirting: Align.
• Movement joints: If locations are not indicated, submit proposals.
• Setting out of tiling: Drawing references: project specific. Or submit proposal for
CA approval
540
LEVEL OF FLOOR TILING
• Permissible deviation in level from datum not to exceed 15mm over total area.
550
FLATNESS/ REGULARITY OF TILING
• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge placed
anywhere on surface. The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles
and no gap should be greater than 3 mm.
560
LEVEL OF TILING ACROSS JOINTS
• Deviation (maximum) between tile surfaces either side of any type of joint:
- 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide.
- 2 mm for joints 6 mm or greater in width.
570
MORTAR FOR BEDDING
• Bedding mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
- Sand for walls: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading designation 0/2 (CP or MP) category 2 fines.
- Sand for floors: To BS EN 13139
- Grading designation 0/4 (MP) category 1 fines and between 20% - 66%
passing a 0.5 sieve.
• Batching: Select from:
- Batch by weight.
- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established weight:
volume relationships of the particular materials. Use accurate gauge boxes.
Allow for bulking of damp sand.
• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistence. Use a suitable forced
action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type mixer.
• Application: At normal temperatures use within two hours. Do not use after initial
set. Do not re-temper.
590
COVED TILE SKIRTINGS
• Sequence: Bed solid to wall before laying floor tiles.
• Bedding: As manufacturers recommendations.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M40
STONE / CONCRETE / QUARRY / CERAMIC TILING / MOSAIC
650
THIN BED ADHESIVE - RIBBED (WALLS)
Only recommended for internal walls where dry conditions will prevail after tiling is
completed. This method gives approximately 50% bond.
• Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of
approximately 1 m². Trowel to ribbed profile.
• Tiling: Press tiles firmly onto float coat.
710
THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (FLOORS)
Not normally suitable for areas subjected to heavy wheeled traffic.
• Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb surface.
• Tiling: Apply coat of adhesive to backs of tiles filling depressions or keys. Press
tiles firmly onto float coat.
• Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.
720
CEMENT: SAND MORTAR BEDDING (FLOORS)
• Mortar bedding mix: 1:3-4 cement sand.
• Consistency: Stiff plastic.
• Laying: lay suitable small working area of screeded bed.
• Compact thoroughly to level.
• Finished bed thickness:
• For tiles up to 10mm thick: 10-15mm.
• For tiles greater than 10mm thick: 15-20mm.
• Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with
adhesive. Press tiles firmly into position.
• Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.
MOVEMENT JOINTS / GROUTING / COMPLETION
805
SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH METAL EDGINGS.
• Edging material: As specified.
- Size. As specified
• Bedding: Bed in 1:3 cement sand.
• Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.
• Fixing to base: (e.g. brass screws at 600mm centres) all as manufacturer's
recommendations.
• Joint width: To match that of structural movement joint in base.
• Sealant: As specified in BS EN ISO 11600 or BS 6213 for smaller joints etc.
• Colour: As specified.
• Preparation and application: As Section Z22 (Sealants)
815
SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS
• Joints: Extend through tiles and bedding to base/background.
• Centre over joints in base/background.
• Width: For walls as BS 5385-1 and floors as BS 5385-3
• Sealant: As specified
• Colour: As specified.
• Preparation and application: As section Z22. (sealants)
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M40
STONE / CONCRETE / QUARRY / CERAMIC TILING / MOSAIC
855
CEMENT SAND GROUTING MIX
• Grout mix:
• Cement: Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
• Sand: Joint widths of 6 mm or greater: To BS EN 13139, grading designation
0/2 (FP or MP) category 2 fines.
• Joint widths of 3 - 6 mm: To BS EN 13139, grading designation 0/2 (FP or MP)
category 3 fines.
• Proportions (cement:sand): will vary according to use.
• i.e. for floor joints:
• 2-3 mm wide, use 1;1.
• 3-6 mm wide, use 1:2.
• Above 6mm wide, use 1:3.
• For walls a 1:3 or 1:3-4 mix is normally suitable.
• Pigment: project specific.
• Admixture; as recommended by manufacturer.
• Mixing: Mix thoroughly. Use the minimum of clean water needed for workability.
875
GROUTING
• Sequence: Grout when bed/adhesive has set sufficient to prevent disturbance of
tiles.
• Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris.
• Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from
blemishes.
• Profile: Flush.
• Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.
885
COLOURED GROUT
• Staining of tiles: Not permitted.
• Evaluating risk of staining: Apply grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. If
discoloration occurs apply a protective sealer to tiles and repeat trial.
910
PROTECTION
• Adequately protect and keep clean all completed areas. Clean off any droppings
immediately.
920
TRAFFICKING
• Keep floors clear of all traffic for at least four days and permit only light traffic for
the next ten days.
940
BUILDER'S CLEAN following completion of clause 110 floor tiling
• The floor must be swept and vacuumed and all dust and debris removed and
cleaned in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
• Use a wet vacuum to pick up to the soiled water.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.
TYPES OF COVERING
110
PVCu LININGS TO WALLS:
• Location: Showers, kitchen areas and toilets
• Substrate: Ceramic wall tiles, plaster, sand/cement rendering and partitioning.
• Preparation: As clauses 410, 410A, 420, 430, 430A, 440, 440A, 440B, 470,
470A, 480A as necessary.
• Sheet: Extruded semi-rigid PVCu sheet, EU Grade
• Maximum service temp: 60°C
• Fire rating:
- BS 476 Part 7 (1987) surface spread of flame - Class 1
- BS 476 Part 6 (1989) fire propagation - Class 0* (*when fixed to a noncombustible substrate)
- EN 13501-1 B S3 do
• Manufacturer / Product reference: Altro Whiterock™ / Altro Whiterock
Chameleon™ wall cladding by Altro Limited, telephone +44(0)1462 707600,
fax +44 (0)1462 707515, email [email protected]
• Width: 1220 mm
• Length: 2500 or 3000mm
• Thickness: 2.5 mm
• Colour/Pattern: Pure Innocence LRV-92
• Adhesive: As clauses 640, 640A, 641A or 641B as necessary.
• Joints: As clauses 680, 680A, 731A, 740A, 740B, 740C, 740G, 773,
• Accessories: As clauses 740
• Skirtings: As clauses 771A, 771B
• Finishing: As clauses 640, 640A, 641A, 641B, 680, 680A 740,740A-740C,
740G, 773, 773A-773D, 773F, 773G, 810, 821B, 870, 880.
• Special requirements: As specified.
130A
CARPET TILING
• Location: Classrooms, Offices and General Areas.
• Base: Sand cement screed or timber
• Preparation: For existing surfaces, refer to clauses 410 to 560 as applicable and
manufacturers recommendations.
• Base: Existing raised access flooring systems.
• Preparation: Ensure flooring system is clean and suitable for carpet laying.
Tessera carpet tiles must be laid in accordance with best practice techniques as
detailed in the Contract Flooring Association’s guidelines and BS5325. Consult
with Forbo technical literature for further details.
• Underlayment: Existing timber floors 6mm plywood as clause 560 where required
• Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring UK Ltd. PO Box 1, Kirkcaldy, Fife KY1 2SB. Tel;
0800 0935 258; email: [email protected]
• Product ref: Tessera Mix
• Type: Heavy Contract textured loop pile carpet tile.
• EN 1307 Classification, Class 33, Suitable for Heavy Contract application.
• Size: 500 x 500 x 6.5mm
• Colour: Project Specific, CA to advise selected from; 954 woodash, 955 grit, 961
gravel, or 958 lazuli
• Method of laying: random, in accordance with carpet manufacturer's recommendations
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
•
•
Adhesive: 542 Eurofix Tack Plus
Accessories: as clause 740 - 750
130B
CARPET TILING
• Location: Circulation areas, corridors and stairs.
• Base: Sand cement screed or timber
• Preparation: For existing surfaces, refer to clauses 410 to 560 as applicable and
manufacturers recommendations.
• Base: Existing raised access flooring systems.
• Preparation: Ensure flooring system is clean and suitable for carpet laying.
Tessera carpet tiles must be laid in accordance with best practice techniques as
detailed in the Contract Flooring Association’s guidelines and BS5325. Consult
with Forbo technical literature for further details.
• Underlayment: For existing timber floors 6mm plywood as clause 560 where
required
• Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring UK Ltd. PO Box 1, Kirkcaldy, Fife KY1 2SB. Tel;
0800 0935 258; email: [email protected]
• Product ref: Tessera Apex 640
• Type: Heavy Contract Level Loop Pile carpet tile.
• EN 1307 Classification, Class 33, Suitable for Heavy Contract application.
• Size: 500 x 500 x 6.0 mm
• Colour: Project Specific, CA to advise selected from; 257 Pool, 263 Storm or
272 Stone.
• Method of laying: Laid broadloom, quarter turn or tessellated.
• Adhesive: 542 Eurofix Tack Plus.
• Accessories: as clause 740 – 750
140
CARPET
• Location: Heavily Trafficked Circulation Areas
• Base: Sand cement screed or timber.
• Preparation: as clause 410 to 560, Sub floors should be clean, dry and flat and
prepared in accordance with BS 5325 or BS 8203. Obtain recommendations of
manufacturer for specific instructions
• Underlayment: Where existing timber floor boards the floor should be covered
with ply. as clause 560
• Manufacturer and reference: Forbo “Coral Brush”' or equal approved.
• Manufactured by Forbo Flooring UK Ltd. PO Box 1, Kirkcaldy, Fife KY1 2SB.
Telephone 01592 643999.
• Material: 10mm thick.
• Type: Tufted cut pile.
• BS 1307 Class 33, Suitable for Commercial Heavy Contract application.
• Widths: 2.0 m, 1.5m, 1.0m and various mats.
• Colour: 5507 Night Blue,.
• Method of laying: In accordance with carpet manufacturer's recommendations.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
145
RUBBER TILING
• Location: Lifts.
• Preparation: clauses: 410 – 560
•
Fabricated underlay: As recommended by sheet manufacturer
Manufacturer: Altro Limited - Works Road, Letchworth Garden City,
•
Hertfordshire, SG6 1NW. Tel: +44 (0) 1462 480480, Email: [email protected]
• Product reference: Altro Mondopave MPE.
• Size: 500 x 500mm
• Thickness: 2.5mm
• Colour: Shadow MPE2528945
• Adhesive and primer if applicable: Altrofix A41
150
LINOLEUM FLOORING
• Location: Circulation areas, corridors, classrooms and stairs.
• Base; Screed and timber.
• Preparation: clauses: 410 – 560
• Fabricated underlay: As recommended by sheet manufacturer
• Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring UK Ltd. PO Box 1, Kirkcaldy, Fife KY1 2SB. Tel;
0800 0935258
• Product reference: Marmoleum Real 3.2mm.
• BS EN 685 class:34
• Description: Homogeneous linoleum floor covering on jute backing.
• Width: 2.0m
• Thickness: 3.5mm
• Slip Resistance R9
• Colour/pattern: To be Selected by CA from: 3032 Mist Grey, 3053 Dove Blue,
3055 Fresco Blue or 3146 Serene Grey
• Adhesive and primer if applicable: Consult with Forbo for recommendations.
• Seam welding: Weld with Forbo linoleum colour coded weld rod
• Accessories: As specified
• Finishing: As specified
• Special requirements: As specified
152A
VINYL SHEET FLOORING FOR GENERAL USE IN DAMP / NON WET AREAS
OPTION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Issue: 01
Location: Workshops, staff and student kitchens, vending areas and toilet areas
Base: Screeds and timber.
Preparation: Clauses 410, 420, 430, 440, 462A, 470, 530, 531A
Fabricated underlay: as clause 541A-C, 560
Flooring roll: Homogenous PVC to BS EN 13845.
Manufacturer and product reference: Altro Walkway 20 2mm thick Safety Floor
by Altro Floors, telephone 01462 480480, fax 01462 707568.
BS EN 685 class 34/43.
Slip potential: Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum) / Pendulum test value
(PTV) (minimum) to BS7976: ≥36 (wet).
Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134: ≥20 (wet)
Recycled content: 20%
Width: 2000 mm
Thickness: 2mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
152B
Colour: To be Selected by CA from: Blizzard, Blue, Lupin, Tarragon or Whale.
Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): AltroFix™ 19 Plus
Seam welding: Hot-welding with matching Altro Welding Rod, as clause 680A.
Accessories: Clauses 740, 750A, 750B, 750E, 751F
Skirting: Clauses 770A, 770B, 771A
Maintenance and Finishing: As clauses 810-880 and manufacturers
recommendations
Special requirements: Where the flooring is used to form the coved skirting,
make certain that the wall background is smooth, clean and dry enough to allow
full adhesion of the system.
VINYL SHEET FLOORING FOR USE IN DAMP, NON- WET AREAS.
OPTION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
155A
Location: Workshops, staff and student kitchen areas, vending area and toilets
Base: Screed and timber.
Preparation: Clauses 410, 420, 430, 440, 462A, 470, 530, 531A
Fabricated underlay: as clause 541A-C, 560
Flooring roll: Heterogeneous PVC to BS EN 13845.
Manufacturer and product reference: Altro Suprema II 2mm thick Safety Floor
by Altro Floors, telephone 01462 480480, fax 01462 707568.
BS EN 685 class 34/43.
Slip potential: Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum) / Pendulum test value
(PTV) (minimum) to BS7976: ≥36 (wet).
Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134: ≥20 (wet)
Recycled content: 5%
Width: 2000 mm
Thickness: 2mm
Colour: To be Selected by CA from: Bluewater, Moon, Platinum or Fossil
Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): AltroFix™ 19 Plus
Seam welding: Hot-welding with matching Altro Welding Rod, as clause 680
Accessories: Clauses 740, 750A, 750B, 750E, 751F
Skirting: Clauses 770A, 770B, 771A
Maintenance and Finishing: Clauses 810-880 and as manufacturers’
recommendations
Special requirements: Where the flooring is used to form the coved skirting,
make certain that the wall background is smooth, clean and dry enough to allow
full adhesion of the system.
PVC SHEET FLOORING IN WET AREAS:
• Location: Staff and student areas for shoes and bare foot in wet environments.
• Base: Screed and timber.
• Preparation: Clauses 410, 420, 430, 440, 462A, 470, 530, 531A
• Fabricated underlay: as clause 541A-C, 560
• Flooring roll: Homogenous PVC to BS EN 13553. by Altro Floors, telephone
01462 480480, fax 01462 707568.
• Manufacturer and product reference: Altro Aquarius 2mm thick Safety Floor
• Identity Code: W2
• BS EN 685 class 34/43.
• Slip potential: Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum) / Pendulum test value
(PTV) (minimum) to BS7976: ≥36 (wet).
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134: ≥20 (wet)
Recycled content: 10%
Width: 2000 mm
Thickness: 2mm
Colour: To be Selected by CA from: Blue Penguin or Swan
Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Altrofix A19 Plus
Seam welding: Hot-welding with matching Altro Welding Rod, as clause 680A.
Accessories: Clauses 740, 750A, 750B, 750E, 751F
Skirting: Clauses 770A, 770B, 771A
Maintenance and Finishing: As manufacturers recommendations
Special requirements: Where the flooring is used to form the coved skirting,
make certain that the wall background is smooth, clean and dry enough to allow
full adhesion of the system.
Special requirements: Where the flooring is used to form the coved skirting,
make certain that the wall background is smooth, clean and dry enough to allow
full adhesion of the system.
156
PLASTICS FLOORING
• Location: Kitchens
• Base: Screed and timber
• Preparation: As Manufacture’s Requirements
• Fabricated underlay: as clause 541A-C, 560
• Flooring roll: Homogenous PVC to BS EN 13845.
• Manufacturer and product reference: Altro Stronghold 30 3mm thick Safety
Floor by Altro Floors, telephone 01462 480480, fax 01462 707568.
• BS EN 685 class 34/43.
• Slip potential: Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum) / Pendulum test value
(PTV) (minimum) to BS7976: ≥36 (wet).
• Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134: ≥20 (wet)
• Recycled content: 10%
• Width: 2000 mm
• Thickness: 3.0mm
• Colour: To be Selected by CA from: Monsoon, Skyline, Dolphine or Surf.
• Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Altrofix 19
• Seam welding: Hot-welding with matching Altro Welding Rod, as clause 680A.
• Accessories: Clauses 740, 750A, 750B, 750E, 751F
• Skirting: Clauses 770A, 770B, 771A
• Special requirements: Where the flooring is used to form the coved skirting,
make certain that the wall background is smooth, clean and dry enough to allow
full adhesion of the system.
157
ANTI STATIC VINYL FLOORING.
• Location: This is project specific
• Manufacturer and product reference: Altro will provide product details upon
request
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
170A
ENTRANCE MATTING
• Location: Internal Primary Entrance.
• Base: Sand cement screed or timber.
• Preparation: as clause 410 to 560, Sub floors should be clean, dry and flat and
prepared in accordance with BS 5325 or BS 8203. Obtain recommendations of
manufacturer for specific instructions
• Underlayment: Where existing timber floor boards the floor should be covered
with ply as clause 560
• Manufacturer and reference: Forbo 'Coral Duo or equal approved.
• Manufactured by Forbo Flooring UK Ltd. PO Box 1, Kirkcaldy, Fife KY1 2SB.
Telephone 01592 643 999.
• Material: 10mm thick.
• Type: Tufted cut pile.
• BS 1307 Class 33, Suitable for Commercial Heavy Contract application.
• Luxury rating LC2/LC3
• Width: 2.0 m
• Colour: 9807 Marine.
• Method of laying: In accordance with carpet manufacturer's recommendations.
170B
ENTRANCE MATTING
• Location: Internal Primary Entrance.
• Base: Sand cement screed or timber.
• Preparation: as clause 410 to 560, Sub floors should be clean, dry and flat and
prepared in accordance with BS 5325 or BS 8203. Obtain recommendations of
manufacturer for specific instructions
•
Underlayment: Where existing timber floor boards the floor should be covered
with ply. as clause 560
• Manufacturer and reference: Forbo 'Coral Brush Active' or equal approved.
• Manufactured by Forbo Flooring UK Ltd. PO Box 1, Kirkcaldy, Fife KY1 2SB.
Telephone 01592 643 999.
• Material: 10mm thick.
• Type: Tufted cut pile.
• BS 1307 Class 33, Suitable for Commercial Heavy Contract application.
• Luxury rating LC2/LC3
• Width: 2.0 m
• Colour: 5827 Marine.
170C
ENTRANCE MATTING
• Location: Internal Secondary Entrance and Heavily Trafficked areas.
•
Base: Sand cement screed or timber.
• Preparation: as clause 410 to 560, Sub floors should be clean, dry and flat and
prepared in accordance with BS 5325 or BS 8203. Obtain recommendations of
manufacturer for specific instructions
• Underlayment: Where existing timber floor boards the floor should be covered
with ply. as clause 560
• Manufacturer and reference: Forbo “Coral Classic”' or equal approved.
• Manufactured by Forbo Flooring UK Ltd. PO Box 1, Kirkcaldy, Fife KY1 2SB.
Telephone 01592 643999.
• Material: 10mm thick.
• Type: Tufted cut pile.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
•
•
•
•
BS 1307 Class 33, Suitable for Commercial Heavy Contract application. Luxury
rating LC3
Widths: 2.0 m, 1.5m, 1.0m and various mats.
Colour: 4707 Night Blue,.
Method of laying: In accordance with carpet manufacturer's recommendations.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
210
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY:
• All bases must be rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease, dirt and other
contaminants before coverings are applied.
• Finished coverings must be accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded,
smooth and free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.
230
CONTROL SAMPLE(S):
• Complete area(s) of the finished work in approved location(s) as directed by CA,
and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding:
250
LAYOUT:
• Agree setting out of seams before ordering roll materials for sheeting type(s)
M50/150.
• Agree setting out of pattern (if applicable). Set out sheet coverings so that
seams and cross seams are kept to a minimum. Cross seams will not be
permitted.
251A
WHITEROCK LAYOUT:
• Set out sheet coverings so that joints are kept to a minimum.
• Internal and external corners to be thermoformed on site, limiting the number of
joints required.
260
MOISTURE CONTENT OF BASE
• Where flooring is to be laid on a new concrete or screed base:
- Ensure that drying aids & under floor heating has been turned off for not less
than 4 days, then perform the following.
- Test for moisture content, using an accurately calibrated surface hygrometer
in accordance with BS8203:2001, Appendix A.
- Take readings in all corners, along edges, and at various points over the
area being tested.
- Do not lay flooring until all readings show 75% relative humidity or less, or
the subfloor has been prepared correctly using a suitable Surface Damp
Proof Membrane system.
280
EXISTING TIMBER FLOORING
• Ensure that all boards are securely fixed and acceptably level. Punch in or
countersink protruding fastenings and plane, sand or apply smoothing
compounds as necessary, to provide a smooth, flat level surface.
• Apply a suitable fabricated underlay Plywood e.g. 4 - 9 mm Exterior grade
• Or once the 75% RH figure is reached, the heating system should be operated
for at least two weeks in conjunction with suitable ventilation, to ensure that all
traces of residual moisture have been removed, prior to installation of flooring.
• For glue down systems, please contact manufacturer’s Technical Department
for adhesive recommendations.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
310
MARKING:
• Ensure that materials are delivered to site in original packing, clearly marked
with batch number.
320
STORAGE:
• Store materials in a clean, warm, dry, well ventilated place. Keep in original
packing until conditioning commences.
330
COMMENCEMENT:
• Do not lay materials until building is weather tight, wet trades
- Have finished their work, the building is well dried out, all paintwork is
finished and
- Dry, conflicting overhead work completed, and floor service outlets, duct
covers and
- Other fixtures around which the materials are to be cut have been fixed.
Inform CA
- Not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.
340
CONDITIONING:
• Before laying commences thoroughly condition materials by unpacking and
separating in the spaces where they are to be laid. Maintain resilient flooring
rolls in an upright position, unroll carpet and keep flat on a supporting surface.
Minimum conditioning time and temperature to be as recommended by
manufacturer. Extend period by a factor of 2 for materials stored or transported
at a temperature of less than 10°C immediately prior to laying.
340A
WHITEROCK
• Sheets should be stored flat, fully supported and left for 24 hours to attain the
ambient room temperature prior to installation (min 14°C). Minimum conditioning
time to be increased by a factor of 2 for materials stored or transported at a
temperature of less than 100C immediately prior to installing
350
ENVIRONMENT:
• Before, during and after laying, provide adequate ventilation and maintain
temperature and humidity approximately at levels which will prevail after the
building is occupied.
• The minimum temperature of the subfloor should be 15°C.
• The air temperature must be between 18°C and 27°C 48 hours before, during
and 24 hours after installation.
350B
ENVIRONMENT: Heat
• Areas where open cooking or open flame equipment is being used should
comply with the following:
- Altro Whiterock panels once installed should not be exposed to
temperatures above 60 degrees Centigrade.
- Before the testing of Kitchen equipment which is likely to expel severe heat,
extraction systems must be operational. Failure to do so may result in
expansion problems.
- With the construction of a dry wall system in a kitchen area or where the
area has been adapted to form a wall behind cooking ranges. Altro Walls
recommends the substrate or dry wall lining should be constructed with a
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
360
Calcium Silica board. Stainless steel panels should then be used to clad
these areas.
Hot pipes and steam pipes should be insulated and a 3-5mm expansion gap
should be created when installing panels around these pipes.
UNDERFLOOR HEATING:
• In accordance with BS8203 Under floor heating should be switched off 48 hours
prior to laying the floor covering. The heating should not be turned on until at
least 48 hours after laying and peak temperature should be avoided for a further
7 days.
PREPARING BASES
410
SUITABILITY OF NEW BASES AND CONDITIONS:
• Laying of coverings will be taken as joint acceptance by the Main Contractor
and Subcontractor of the suitability of the bases and conditions within any given
area.
410A
SUITABILITY OF NEW SUBSTRATES AND CONDITIONS (WHITEROCK):
• Fitting of coverings will be taken as joint acceptance by the Main Contractor and
Subcontractor of the suitability of the substrates and conditions within any given
area.
420
SUITABILITY OF EXISTING BASES AND CONDITIONS:
• Before commencing work the subcontractor must confirm (through the Main
Contractor) that existing bases will, after the specified preparation, be suitable to
receive the specified coverings.
• Laying of coverings will be taken as further acceptance of the suitability of the
bases and also of the conditions within any given area.
430
DAMPNESS:
• Where coverings are to be laid on new wet-laid bases:
- Ensure that drying aids have been turned off for not less than 4 days, then
- Test for moisture content using an accurately calibrated hygrometer in
accordance with BS 5325, Annexe A or BS 8203, Annexe A.
- Take readings in all corners, along edges, and at various points over the
area being tested.
- Do not lay coverings until all readings show 75% relative humidity or less.
430A
DAMPNESS (WHITEROCK):
• Where linings are to be fitted on new wet-laid substrates:
- All substrates to be dried to minimum of 16% WME (Wood Moisture
Equivalent) on Protimeter ‘Surveymaster’ equipment or similar.
- Take readings in all corners, along edges, and at various points over the
area being tested.
440
SUBSTRATES:
• The specifications for trowelled finishes to receive thin floor coverings require:
- A uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and other blemishes, and
suitable to receive the specified floor finish material.
- Adequate protection from construction traffic.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
440A
SUITABLE SUBSTRATES (WHITEROCK): GENERAL
• The specifications for finishes to receive PVCu wall cladding require:
- Good quality fair faced brick or block work. Well aligned joints bagged up
flush. Straight to within 3mm over a 2m straight edge and bricks/blocks flush
with ones adjacent.
- Sand & cement rendering 1:3 to steel trowel finish.
- 12.5mm thick plasterboard. (do not seal with sealers as for decorating). If
wall is affords fire protection ensure joints between plasterboard sheets filled
with appropriate fillers.
- Minimum 9mm W.B.P. resin bonded plywood fixed at 200mm centres to
suitable studwork or direct to solid substrate.
- Minimum 9mm MDF dense wood based panels fixed at 200mm centres to
suitable studwork, or direct to solid substrate.
- Ceramic tiles which are clean and securely bonded to substrate.
- Certain sound painted surfaces (an adhesive test is advisable to ascertain
compatibility).
- Plastered surfaces - finished with steel trowel. (pink lightweight plasters
generally not suitable).
- Porous surfaces to be thoroughly sealed with diluted PVA applied to the
surface 12 hours prior to the installation. The sealer should be used in a
diluted ratio of 1:10. Alternatively use Altro Primer Seal Ref: AGCPNF/01
440B
SUITABLE SUBSTRATES (WHITEROCK) - WELDED FINISH:
• Surface straight to within 3mm over a 2m straight edge.
• Sand & cement rendering 1:3 to steel trowel finish.
• 12.5mm thick plasterboard. (do not seal with sealers as for decorating). If wall is
affords fire protection ensure joints between plasterboard sheets filled with
appropriate fillers.
• Minimum 9mm W.B.P. resin bonded plywood fixed at 200mm centres to suitable
studwork or direct to solid substrate.
• Minimum 9mm MDF dense wood based panels fixed at 200mm centres to
suitable studwork or direct to solid substrate.
• Certain sound painted surfaces (an adhesive test is advisable to ascertain
compatibility).
• Plastered surfaces - finished with steel trowel. (pink lightweight plasters
generally not suitable).
• Porous surfaces to be thoroughly sealed with diluted PVA applied to the surface
12 hours prior to the installation. The sealer should be used in a diluted ratio of
1:10. Alternatively use Altro Primer Seal Ref: AGCPNF/01
462A
SMOOTHING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND:
• Manufacturer and ref: Ardex UK Ltd, Arditex ‘NA’ smoothing compound.
• Apply to base at a minimum thickness of 3mm in accordance with
manufacturer’s product data sheet incorporating aggregate for applications
more than 12mm thick.
• Allow to dry before laying floor tiling/sheeting.
470
EXISTING FLOOR COVERING TO BE REMOVED:
• Completely remove covering and as much adhesive as possible. Skim with
smoothing underlayment compound to give a smooth, even surface.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
470A
SUBSTRATE PREPARATION (WHITEROCK) - EXISTING WALL FINISH TO BE
REMOVED:
• All loose paint and dust to be removed.
• Friable surfaces should be removed or made sound.
• (Please consult Altro regarding approved sealing treatments)
• Make good as needed by local patching or filling with a repair mortar or sand
and cement with Unibond mix, to give a smooth, even surface.
• Straight to within 3mm over a 2m straight edge
480
EXISTING FLOOR COVERING TO BE OVERLAID:
• Make good by local re-sticking and patching or filling with smoothing
underlayment compound to give a smooth, even surface.
480A
EXISTING WALL FINISH TO BE OVERLAID (WHITEROCK):
• Make good as needed by local patching or filling with a repair mortar or sand
and cement with Unibond mix, to give a smooth, even surface.
• Ceramic tiles to be thoroughly degreased, using suitable degreasing agent and
scouring pad, rinsed with clean water and allowed to dry. Tiles to be abraded
with diamond disc & all dust removed. Loose tiles to be removed and the area
made good using Ardurapid 45 repair mortar or sand & cement with Unibond
mix, if drying time permits. Alternatively, suitable thickness WBP plywood,
screwed & plugged, (max 200mm centres) may be used.
520
TIMBER BOARDING/ STRIP FLOORING
• Substrate: Boards securely fixed and acceptably level with no protruding
fasteners. Plane, sand or apply smoothing underlayment compound to give a
smooth, even surface.
530
PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING
• Substrate: Boards securely fixed, level and free from surface sealers and
contaminants.
- Gaps between boards: Not more than 1 mm.
- Priming: As required by covering adhesive manufacturer.
• Equilibrium moisture content at time of laying covering: As in service conditions.
531A
SURFACE DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE:
• Manufacturer and reference: AltroProof epoxy surface damp proof membrane
by Altro Floors.
• At readings between:
- 75 - 95% R.H. Altroproof Solo 1 coat
- 95 - 97% R.H. Altroproof Duo 2 coat
• Apply in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
• NB: Do not use if subfloor contains underfloor heating.
541A
SHEET UNDERLAY:
• Manufacturer and reference: Altro Everlay A by Altro Floors.
- Width: 2000 mm
- Thickness: 1.2 mm
• Set out in same direction as that planned for the sheet floorcovering, with butt
joints staggered to avoid seems in floorcovering. Lay loose and flat with no
distorting bumps, and cut into perimeter.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
541B
SHEET UNDERLAY:
• Manufacturer and reference: Altro Everlay B by Altro Floors.
- Width: 2000 mm
- Thickness: 4 mm
• Set out in same direction as that planned for the sheet floor covering, with butt
joints staggered to avoid seems in floor covering. Lay loose and flat with no
distorting bumps, and cut into perimeter.
541C
SHEET UNDERLAY:
• Manufacturer and reference: Altro Acoustic Underlay 1101 by Altro Floors.
- Width: 1.15m
- Thickness: 3mm
• The underlay can be laid in either the same direction or at 90 degrees to the
surface material, but with joints not corresponding. Please adhere to
manufacturer’s instructions.
560
PLYWOOD UNDERLAY:
• To an approved national standard.
• Bonding quality to BS EN 314: Part 2: Class 3
• Thickness: 6 mm.
• Sheet size: 2400 x 1200mm.
• Ensure that existing floor boards are securely fixed and acceptably level.
Remove or
• fill any gross irregularities. Punch in any protruding fasteners.
• Lay sheets with cross joints staggered such that no joint within the base and
• underlay is coincident and with a 0.5-1 mm gap between sheets.
• Fix with 25 mm ring shanked or twisted shank nails or divergent staples,
commencing at the centre of one side of each sheet, at 150 mm grid centres
over the area of each sheet and at 100 mm centres along perimeter, set in 12
mm from edge.
• Ensure that fasteners are driven well in, with heads set flush with surface, and
do not project through underside of base. Remove and replace fasteners that
deform while being driven.
LAYING COVERINGS
611A
SET OUT ALTRO MONDO RUBBER FLOOR TILES:
• in alternate rows of ‘all left hand’ and ‘all right hand’ tiles, with the arrows printed
on the reverse side of each tile pointing towards the right hand side.
620
COLOUR CONSISTENCY:
• In any one area/room use only coverings from the same production batch to
prevent banding or patchiness resulting from colour/flash variation.
640
ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY:
• Adhesive: when not specified otherwise, type to be as recommended by
covering/
- Underlay manufacturer as appropriate or, in the absence of such
- Recommendation, type to be approved.
- Use a primer where recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Allow to dry
thoroughly before applying adhesive.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
-
Spread adhesive evenly and lay covering, pressing down firmly and rolling
laterally and
Transversely (if recommended) to ensure full contact and a good bond
overall. Reroll (if recommended) within 30 minutes.
Remove all surplus adhesive from exposed faces of coverings as the work
proceeds.
Trowel ridges and high spots caused by particles on the substrate will not be
accepted.
640A
ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY (WHITEROCK):
• Adhesive should not be stored at temperatures below 5°C.
• Recommended ambient temperature of 14°C / 57°F for all installation areas.
• Back of sheets to be cleaned using Altro Whiterock cleaner/thinner (Ref: A808)
or Desolvit wipes (Ref: A817).
• Adhesive should be applied with the recommended notched trowel applicable to
the adhesive selected.
• Apply firm even pressure with suitable roller to whole surface area of the panel
as work proceeds, to ensure adequate adhesive transfer and good overall bond.
• Use Altro double sided tape Ref A815 or A915 (for welded system) as support
whilst adhesive cures.
641A
ADHESIVE FIXING – BY ALTROFIX W139: WHITEROCK
• Use AltroFix W139 (Ref: A814) two-part polyurethane adhesive spread with a
5mm square notched trowel (Ref: A860).
• Support the panel on double sided tape (Ref: A815 or A915 or welded system)
whilst adhesive cures (approx. 3-5 hours - full cure 24 hours)
641B
ADHESIVE FIXING – BY ALTROFIX W157: WHITEROCK
• NB. This adhesive is only suitable for porous surfaces, for non-porous surfaces
refer to AltroFix W139
• Apply AltroFix W157 (Ref: A818) water based synthetic polymer adhesive to the
back of the sheet using a 3mm deep x 5mm wide square notched trowel (Ref:
A860/4).
• On application immediately apply sheet to the wall.
• Support the panel on double sided tape (Ref: A815 or A915 or welded system)
whilst adhesive cures.( can be 24hours and upwards)
• NB. On completion, the installation should not be subject to an increase in
ambient temperature to more than 30°C until the adhesive is fully cured. Full
cure will be dependent on porosity of substrate
641C
ADHESIVE FIXING – ALTRO SHEET FLOORING:
• Place the material in position on the floor, allowing at least 25 mm each end for
trimming, and overlapping at least 15 mm at joints.
• Cut-in material along joints.
• Fold (do not roll) the material back along half its length. When adhesive is
ready, refold material back onto adhesive. Repeat for second half of material.
• Consult data sheet on rolling requirements.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
641D
ADHESIVE FIXING USING ALTROFIX 41:
• Mix component parts A and B until a uniform consistency is obtained
throughout and spread over the substrate as soon as possible and before
adhesive thickens.
• Mix component parts A and B until a uniform consistency is obtained
throughout and spread over the substrate as soon as possible and before
adhesive thickens..
• Spread evenly with a notched trowel 1.5mm deep x 5mm centres.
• Place floor covering into wet adhesive and expel all trapped air. The material
should be rolled after approximately 1 hr to ensure all air pockets have been
removed and the floor covering is lying perfectly flat using a 50 kg roller.
NB: Please be advised whilst rubber tiles do not normally require weighting
in position, if however any corners or edges lift or stand proud while the
adhesive is setting these must be weighted by use of a sandbag or
equivalent and left in position for at least 24 hours after completion of work.
650
SEAMS
• Patterns: Matched.
• Joints: Tight without gaps.
670
BORDERS / FEATURE STRIPS of sheet material:
• Cut strips along the length of the sheet to prevent curl.
• Mitre joints at corners.
680
SEAM WELDING:
• Do not commence welding of coverings until a minimum of 24 hours after laying
or until adhesive has completely set.
• Cut groove 3mm wide by 2/3 the depth of material, evenly along each joint using:
- Altro hand grooving tool or Automatic grooving machine fitted with diamond
blade.
- Hot-weld using hot air welding gun (fitted with high speed welding nozzle)
and Altro welding rod. Select colour of rod to match floor covering. Cut off
surplus weld rod with spatula. Do not chemical weld.
• Form a neat, smooth, strongly bonded joint, flush with finished surface.
680A
SEAM WELDING COVERINGS (WHITEROCK):
• Do not commence welding of coverings until a minimum of 24 hours after fitting
or until adhesive has completely set.
• Use Altro double sided tape (Ref: A915) applied to the wall bridging the joint to
be welded. Bring the edges of the sheets to be welded together leaving a
1.5mm - 2mm gap between sheets. Hot weld using hot air welding gun and Altro
Whiterock welding rod. Clean off flush with sheet face to form a neat, smooth,
strongly bonded joint. Recommended tool is Mozart trimming knife.
720
DOORWAYS
• Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
731
SEALANT
• Manufacturer and reference: Altro-mastic 100 by Altro Floors, colour to match
floor covering.
• Location: To all exposed edges of flooring material around all protrusions
through floor and pipe work as necessary.
731A
SEALANT
• Manufacturer and reference: Altro Whiterock silicone sealant (Ref: A802 white
or A806 coloured) contact Altro Limited, telephone +44(0)1462 707600, fax +44
(0)1462 707515, email [email protected]
740
EDGINGS / COVER STRIPS:
• Manufacturer and reference(s): Gradus
• aterial/finish: Aluminium / PVC
• Fix securely in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
740A
EDGINGS / COVER STRIPS: ALTRO PVC JOINT STRIP WHITEROCK
• All joints should be covered with high impact PVCu ‘H’ joint sections (Ref: A831
two-part joint trim, or G831 single part joint trim).
• Internal/external corners: Altro Whiterock to be thermoformed on-site as
needed, so limiting the number of joints required.
• Vulnerable external corners are usually over-clad with stainless steel corner
protectors, to a height of 1200mm.
740B
EDGINGS / COVER STRIPS: Altro FlexiJoint WHITEROCK
• Double sided tapes (Ref: A815) applied 3mm in from the edge of the panel
• Install the panels with a specific joint gap of 3.4mm (utilising Altro spacer bars).
• Apply a uniform (2mm) bead of Altro AP600 polymer sealant to the substrate
within the joint gap.
• Fit Altro Flexi-Joint (FJ01) into the joint gap and roll with a small wooden hand
roller
- See Altro Whiterock detail drawing W11.
• Internal/external corners: Altro Whiterock to be thermoformed on-site, so limiting
the number of joints required.
• Vulnerable external corners are usually over-clad with stainless steel corner
protectors, to a height of 1200mm.
740C
EDGINGS / COVER STRIPS: Altro SILICONE JOINT WHITEROCK
• Form a flush joint using a 3-4mm bead of Altro Whiterock silicone sealant. (Ref:
A802 white, or A806 coloured).
• Joints to be primed with Altro cleaner Ref A810/ALU before sealant is applied.
• Internal/external corners: Altro Whiterock to be thermoformed on-site, so
reducing the number of joints needed.
• Vulnerable external corners are usually over-clad with stainless steel corner
protectors, to a height of 1200mm.
740G
EDGINGS / COVER STRIPS: ACCESSORIES WHITEROCK
• High impact PVCu two-part start and edge trim (Ref: A833)
• High impact PVCu single part heavy duty start and edge trim (Ref: G833).
• White powder coated aluminium ‘H’ joint sections (Ref: A854)
• White powder coated aluminium start and edge trim (Ref: A853/25).
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
741A
EDGING TO ALTRO SAFETY FLOOR AND OTHER SURFACES
• Manufacturer and reference: Visedge VR Edge Strip by Howe Green Ltd.
• Size: 9 mm deep x 30 mm wide.
• Cut recess in base, bed edge strip level in epoxy mortar, and securely screw to
base with neatly mitred joints.
• Make good base by filling with smoothing compound to give a smooth, even
surface.
• Cut, groove and hot weld PVC insert to Altro safety flooring.
- See Altro detail drawing D12.
741B
EDGING TO GULLY DRAIN
• Use disc cutter to form 25 mm deep x 4 mm wide channel at junction with
adjacent floor finish.
• Manufacturer and reference: Gully Angle GA25/35 by Altro Floors.
742
DRAIN OUTLET / CHANNEL
• Drain outlet / channel to be clamping ring type gulley/type channel such as
those supplied by Wade International, Tel: 01787 475151. The Altro flooring
should be dressed into the drain outlet/channel and be clamped by the clamping
ring/clamping section.
- See detail drawing D13 (ring type gully)
- Alternatively drawing reference D14 (channel type)
750A
STAIR NOSINGS/TRIM, VINYL FLOORING WITH VERTICAL RISERS
• Manufacturer and reference(s): Gradus or equal approved.
Gradus, Macclesfield, Cheshire, SK11 7LZ. Tel: 01625 428922 Fax: 01625
433939. Website: www.gradusworld.com Email: [email protected]
• Fix securely and level with neatly mitred joints, adjusting to suit thickness of
covering with continuous packing strips of hardboard or plywood. Both packing
strips and nosings must be fully bedded in gap-filling adhesive recommended by
the nosing manufacturer. Screw fixing with matching plugs is required.
750B
STAIR NOSINGS/TRIM, VINYL FLOORING WITH ANGLED RISERS
• Manufacturer and reference(s): Gradus or equal approved.
• Fix securely and level with neatly mitred joints, adjusting to suit thickness of
covering with continuous packing strips of hardboard or plywood. Both packing
strips and nosings must be fully bedded in gap-filling adhesive recommended by
the nosing manufacturer. Screw fixing with matching plugs is required.
750C
STAIR NOSINGS/TRIM, CARPET FLOORING WITH VERTICAL RISERS
• Manufacturer and reference(s): Gradus or equal approved.
• Fix securely and level with neatly mitred joints, adjusting to suit thickness of
covering with continuous packing strips of hardboard or plywood. Both packing
strips and nosings must be fully bedded in gap-filling adhesive recommended by
the nosing manufacturer. Screw fixing with matching plugs is required.
750D
STAIR NOSINGS/TRIM FOR CARPET FLOORING WITH ANGLED RISERS
• Manufacturer and reference Gradus or equal approved.
• Fix securely and level with neatly mitred joints, adjusting to suit thickness of
covering with continuous packing strips of hardboard or plywood. Both packing
strips and nosings must be fully bedded in gap-filling adhesive recommended by
the nosing manufacturer. Screw fixing with matching plugs is required.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
750E
VINYL LEVELLING STRIP
• Manufacture and reference: Gradus or equal approved.
• Fixing: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
751F
LANDING TRIM:
• Manufacturer and reference: Altro HPT2S38
• Fixing: Securely bond with top edge straight and aligned with floor. Accurately
mitre at corners.
• Adhesive: Laybond Gripfill / Similar Approved.
760
STAIR COVERINGS:
• Neatly cut and tightly fit risers first, then treads.
761A
STAIR COVERINGS:
• Fit tread and riser in one piece on stairs with coved tread/riser.
• Cove former: Altro Type 20R. Securely bond to base and background with
Altrofix 25NF adhesive.
770A
SET-IN COVED SKIRTINGS:
• Manufacturer and reference(s): Altro PRCS100.
• Size: 100mm high x 25mm wide at base.
• Colour: Black 208 / Dove 001 / White WHT
• Securely bond with top edge straight and parallel with floor. Accurately mitre at
corners.
• Adhesive: Altro-fix 25NF.
• Hot weld to edge of floor with matching Altro Welding Rod. Do not chemical weld.
• Seal mitred corners using Altro-mastic 100.
- See Altro detail drawing D3.
770B
SIT-ON COVED SKIRTINGS:
• Manufacturer and reference(s): Gradus SO 100.
• Size: 100 mm high x 19 mm wide at base.
• Colour: TBA
• Seal between wall & floor perimeter with Altro-mastic 100, prior to fixing skirting.
• Securely bond with top edge straight and parallel with floor. Accurately mitre at
corners.
• Adhesive: Altrofix 25NF.
- See Altro detail drawing D2.
771A
SELF-COVED SKIRTINGS - GENERAL:
• Cove former: Altro 38R.
• Securely bond to base and background.
• Turn flooring material up wall and securely bond to cove former and
background, with top edge straight.
• Accurately mitre at corners.
• Height: Minimum 100mm
• Top edge: Altro: C7 Capping Seal / C8 Captile Strip / C11 Quarry Tile Seal
• Adhesive: Altrofix 25NF.
• Hot weld joints and mitred corners with matching Altro welding rod. Do not
chemical weld.
- See Altro detail D4 (C7) / D5 (C8) D6 (C11)
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
771B
SELF-COVED SKIRTINGS - WHITEROCK:
• Cove former: Altro 38R.
• Securely bond to base and background.
• Turn flooring material up wall and securely bond to cove former and
background, with top edge straight.
• Accurately mitre at corners.
• Height: Minimum 150mm
• Top edge: Overlap by 50mm
• Adhesive: Altrofix 25NF.
• Hot weld joints and mitred corners with matching Altro welding rod. Do not
chemical weld.
• Seal underside of Whiterock sheet using Altro-mastic 100 clear.
- See Altro detail drawing WF8
772
FLAT SKIRTINGS:
• Manufacturer: Gradus, Park Green, Macclesfield, Cheshire, SK11 7LZ. Tel:
01625 428922 Fax: 01625 433939. Website: www.gradusworld.com Email:
[email protected]
• Reference: FS 100 B
• Material: Flexible pvc
• Height: 100mm
• Colour: TBA
• Adhesive fix – as per manufacturers instructions.
773
ABUTMENTS: GENERAL
• To window frame, door frames, architraves, ceiling & quarry tile - wipe clean &
prime the edges with Altro cleaner (Ref A810/ALU) and seal with Altro
Whiterock silicone sealant (Ref: A802 white, or A806 coloured) 3-4mm width
joint.
- See Altro Whiterock detail drawings W1, W2 and WF3.
773A
JUNCTIONS BETWEEN SELF-COVED SKIRTINGS AND DOOR
FRAMES/ARCHITRAVES:
• Trim back of cove formers in proximity to door openings, and terminate selfcoved skirtings against side of architraves.
- See Altro detail drawing D9.
773B
ABUTMENTS: TREATMENT TO SERVICE PREPARATIONS
• All holes to be cut to allow 3-4mm silicone seal around all penetrations. Clean
with Altro cleaner (Ref: A810/ALU) and seal with Altro Whiterock silicone
sealant (Ref: A802 white or A806 coloured).
773C
ABUTMENTS: PVC FLOORING
• To PVC flooring with coved skirting - joint to be covered with high impact PVCu
transition strip (Ref: A832 two-part trim, or G832 single part trim).
- Ask for Altro Whiterock detail drawing WF2.
• Alternatively use Altro concealed wall/floor transition strip with overlap detail
(Ref G835 / 25) mechanically fixed or bonded to the wall with adhesive (Ref
Altro AP600).
- Ask for relevant Altro Whiterock detail drawing
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
773D
ABUTMENTS: PVC FLOORING, SHOWER/WET AREAS
• To PVC flooring with coved skirting overlapped by 50mm with Altro Whiterock,
close bottom of sheet with silicone (Ref: A803 clear).
- Ask for Altro Whiterock detail drawing WF4.
773E
ABUTMENTS: RESIN FLOORING:
• To resin flooring with coved skirting, close bottom of sheet with single part high
impact PVCu trim section (Ref: G834/25)
- Ask for Altro Whiterock detail drawing WF6.
• Alternatively, close bottom of sheet with high impact PVCu transition strip (Ref:
A832 two-part trim, or G832 single part trim) to resin cove upstand.
- Ask for Altro Whiterock detail drawing WF5
• Alternatively cove resin skirting feather out to nothing overlap by minimum
50mm with Altro Whiterock seal out bottom edge of sheet with Altro clear
silicone sealant (Ref A803)
773F
ABUTMENTS: TO SHOWER TRAY
• Use Altro Shower trim (Ref A918 bedded onto wall and shower tray with Altro
Adhesive (Ref AP600)
- See Drawing WS3.
773G
ABUTMENTS: TO SHOWER TRAY WITH INTEGRAL UPSTAND.
• Apply Altro Whiterock over upstand ensuring sheet adhered to upstand leave
3mm gap between bottom of sheet and tray. Clean with Altro Cleaner (REF
A810/ALU )seal with Altro Silicone sealant (REF A802, A803 or A806)
775A
STAIR STRINGER:
• Manufacturer and reference: Altro PRS3 Stringer
• Adhesive: Altro-fix 25NF.
• Seam welding to treads/risers: Hot-welding with matching Altro welding rod.
780A
TRAFFIC:
• After laying, keep floor covering free from traffic until adhesive is set.
COMPLETION
810
CLEANING GENERALLY:
• Remove all scrap, dust and dirt. Carefully remove adhesive and other marks
from coverings and adjacent surfaces, using approved cleaning agents and
methods.
821A
FINISHING PLASTICS FLOORING:
• Wash floor with water containing Altro-Clean 44 or equivalent alkaline cleaner.
Use deck scrubber on small or lightly soiled areas and machine with nylon
brushes synthetic pads on large or heavily soiled areas.
• Thoroughly rinse with clean water to remove detergent, and allow floor to dry.
821B
FINISHING PVC WALL CLADDING:
• Protective film to be removed.
• Wipe off any marks and dirt using Altro Whiterock cleaner/thinner (Ref: A808) or
Desolvit wipes (Ref: A817).
• When dry, apply antistatic solution to all surfaces (Ref: A809).
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M50
RUBBER / PLASTICS / CORK / LINO / CARPET TILING / SHEETING
870
PROTECTION:
• Cover flooring with clean dust sheets, or other non-staining suitable material to
prevent damage from dirt and traffic prior to Practical Completion. Ensure any
material with printed information on one face is laid with printed face uppermost.
880
WASTE / RECYCLING: ALTRO RECOFLOOR™
• Clean, adhesive-free off-cuts to be removed from site and taken to an Altro
Reco-floor collection points for recycling.
- Contact Altro for further details of this scheme and the Reco-wall recycling
scheme. Altro Limited, tel: +44(0)1462 707600, fax: +44 (0)1462 707515,
email: [email protected], website www.altro6steps.com
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
To be read with Preliminaries / General conditions.
COATING SYSTEMS
EMULSION PAINT
110
DULUX TRADE VINYL DIAMOND MATT on walls subject to high wear and tear
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Colour: 50BG83009
• Surface(s): New or existing plaster or wallpaper.
• Preparation: As clauses 400-440, 572A, 572B, 560-622 and 711
• Initial coat(s): 1 thinned coat or primer/sealer as clause 450 if necessary
• Finishing coats: 2 coats, additional coats may be required for strong change
of colour.
110A
DULUX TRADE VINYL MATT EMULSION on walls and ceilings
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing plaster or wallpaper.
• Preparation: As clauses 400-440, 572A, 572B, 560-622 and 711
• Initial coat(s): 1 thinned coat or primer/sealer as clause 450 if necessary
• Finishing coats: 2 coats, additional coats may be required for strong change
of colour.
110B
DULUX TRADE ACRYLIC EGGSHELL on walls and ceilings in damp and wet
areas:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing plaster or wallpaper.
• Preparation: As clauses 400-440, 572A, 572B, 560-622 and 711
• Initial coat(s): 1 thinned coat or primer/sealer as clause 450 if necessary.
• Finishing coats: 2 coats, additional coats may be required for strong change
of colour.
110C
DULUX TRADE FAST MATT on drying plaster after 24 hours:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing plaster
• Preparation: As clauses 400-440, 572A, 572B, 560-622 and 711
• Initial coat(s): 1 thinned coat if necessary.
• Finishing coats: 2 coats, additional coats may be required for strong change
of colour.
110D
COATINGS TO EXISTING SUSPENDED CEILING:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): Existing mineral fibre suspended ceiling tiles.
• Preparation: Include for masking all ceiling light fittings etc. and protection to
furniture and equipment below.
• Coatings: Proprietary water based spray applied coatings applied by fully
trained personnel in strict accordance with own company method statement.
110E
JOHNSTONE’S STOPMOULD on walls and ceilings affected by mould
• Manufacturer: PPG Architectural Coatings UK Limited, Huddersfield Road,
Birstall, Batley, West Yorkshire, WF17 9XA. Tel: 01924 354 000. Fax: 01924
Issue 02
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
354 001. Web: www.johnstonestrade.co.uk Sales Order Line: Tel: 01924 354
600. Fax: 01924 354 601. Technical Advisory Department: Tel: 01924 354
100. Fax: 01924 354 101.
Product reference: Johnstone's Stopmould.
Surfaces: on ceilings & walls, plaster, concrete, brick, stone, blockwork,
plywood
Preparation: As clauses 400-440, 572A, 572B, 580, 590, 622 and 711.
Preparation: Remove all loose and flaking material and any heavy growth,
moss, etc. with a stiff brush. Rub down previously gloss painted surfaces with
fine waterproof abrasive paper and rinse thoroughly. Wear a suitable face
mask when dry sanding. Surfaces already contaminated with mould growth
should be treated with Johnstone’s Sterilisation Wash as directed. Do not
apply in temperatures below 5°C. Use only in accordance with the directions
on the label. For further advice contact PPG Architectural Coatings UK
Limited Technical Advisory Department.
Initial coats: Johnstone's Stopmould. Application: Stir well before use. Seal
porous surfaces with a coat of Johnstone's Stopmould thinned with water (1
part water:5 parts Stopmould). Apply single coat by brush or roller. Number of
coats: One coat
Finishing coats: Johnstone's Stopmould. Colour: Brilliant White / Magnolia.
Application: Brush, roller or spray applied. Allow 2-4 hours between coats.
Number of coats: 2 coats of Johnstone's Stopmould.
GLOSS PAINT
130 A
DULUX TRADE HIGH GLOSS FINISH white spirit based paint for interior timber
and metal:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing timber and metal.
• Preparation: 400-440, 451-541, 622, 631, 640, 651 and 711.
• Initial coat(s): primer as clauses 450, 720-751, 770, 780
• Undercoats: 1 coat Dulux Trade Undercoat,
• Finishing coats: 2 coats Dulux Trade High Gloss.
130 B
DULUX TRADE WEATHERSHIELD EXTERIOR HIGH GLOSS FINISH for exterior
timber and metal:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing timber and metal.
• Preparation: 400-440, 451-541, 622, 631, 640, 651 and 711.
• Initial coat(s): primer as clauses 450, 720-751, 770, 780
• Undercoats: 2 coats Weathershield Exterior Flexible Undercoat
• Finishing coats: 1 coat of Weathershield Exterior High Gloss.
EGGSHELL / SATIN PAINT.
150
Issue 02
DULUX TRADE QUICK DRYING EGGSHELL FINISH water based paint for interior
plaster and masonry.
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing timber and metal.
• Preparation: 400-440, 451-541, 622, 631, 640, 651 and 711.
• Initial coat(s): appropriate primer for surface as clauses 450,720-751,770,780
• Finishing coats: 2 coats.
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
150 A
DULUX TRADE SATINWOOD white spirit based paint for interior timber and metal:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing timber and metal.
• Preparation: 400-440, 451-541, 622, 631, 640, 651 and 711.
• Initial coat(s): primer as clauses 450, 720-751, 770, 780
• Undercoats: 1 coat Dulux Trade Undercoat (only required where there is a
strong colour change).
• Finishing coats: 2 coats Dulux Trade Satinwood.
150B
DULUX TRADE Dry Fall Eggshell for spray application to suspended ceilings only:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface (s): existing acoustic suspended ceilings
• Preparation and application: As Manufacturer’s instructions
• Finishing Coats: 1 coat application
DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN/VARNISH/PRESERVATIVES.
160
POLYURETHANE VARNISH: for interior joinery
• Manufacturer: Dulux
• Surface(s): Existing and new timber as defined on finishes schedule
• Preparation : Timber surfaces must be thoroughly sanded, clean and dry, with
dust, dirt, wax and grease removed. Moisture content of timber must not
exceed 14%. Degrease all timber surfaces using a cloth dampened with
methylated spirits or cellulose thinners.
• Existing varnish to be lightly sanded. See also clauses 400-440, 456-481,
481, 622, 711 and 760.
• Initial coat(s): 1 coat, thinned as per manufacturer's instructions.
• Finishing coats: 2 coats, brush applied, lightly sanded between coats.
160A
WEATHERSHIELD YATCH VARNISH: for external joinery
• Manufacturer: Dulux
• Surface(s): Existing and new timber as defined on finishes schedule
• Preparation : Timber surfaces must be thoroughly sanded, clean and dry, with
dust, dirt, wax and grease removed. Moisture content of timber must not
exceed 14%. Degrease all timber surfaces using a cloth dampened with
methylated spirits or cellulose thinners.
• Existing varnish to be lightly sanded. See also clauses 400-440, 481, 622,
711 and 760.
• Initial coat(s): 1 coat, thinned as per manufacturer's instructions.
• Finishing coats: 2 coats, brush applied, lightly sanded between coats.
160B
EXTRA DURABLE WOODSTAIN for exterior joinery
• Manufacturer: Sadolin
• Surface(s): Existing and new timber as defined on finishes schedule
• Preparation: Remove dirt, mould and algal growth with a fungicidal wash
and/or warm soapy water, rinse off all residue with clean water. Prepare
surface by gently rubbing down, remove any loose coatings. See also clauses
400-440, 481, 622, 711 and 751
• Finishing coats: 2 coats Extra Durable Wood stain
Issue 02
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
160B
POLISHING OF HARDWOODS NEW
• Manufacturer: As per finishes schedule/drawing.
• Preparation: Remove machine marks and blemishes. fine fill and dents or
knot etc with coloured filling wax or brummer
• Apply one brushed coat of Shellac Sanding sealer (clear)
• Initial coats: After drying apply 2/3 coats of White Polish. Allow to thoroughly
dry, de-nib between coats with Scotch-brite pads or fine wire wool or 320 grit
silicone carbide paper.
• Apply a fine paste wax, Toluene Free
• Final application of white polish and wax finishing to be undertaken to
completed joinery on site as applicable
160C
POLISHING OF EXISTING HARDWOODS IN REASONABLE DECORATIVE
ORDER
• Manufacturer: As specified.
• Surface: Existing hardwood timber.
• Preparation: Wipe down using mentholated spirit to remove scuff marks etc
(submit method statement to CA for approval).
• Initial coats: Apply coat of wax ( shade to suit existing joinery). Take a clean
cloth, sponge or brush and apply in the direction of the wood grain where
possible. To obtain a uniform colour always wipe evenly, blending the mellow
wax over the whole surface area by exerting a small degree of pressure. Take
care to lightly remove any excess wax immediately with a separate clean
absorbent cloth. Leave to dry for approximately 10 min and buff with a soft
cloth.
• Finishing coats: Additional coats may be required depending on condition of
timber.
MASONRY COATING.
170
DULUX TRADE WEATHERSHIELD SMOOTH MASONRY PAINT for exterior walls:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing masonry and render. Preparation: As clauses 400,
440, 572C, 572D and 711.
• Initial coat(s): stabilising solution if required as clause 450
• Finishing coats: 2 coats Weathershield masonry paint smooth.
170 A
DULUX TRADE WEATHERSHIELD TEXTURED MASONRY PAINT for exterior
walls:
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• Surface(s): New or existing masonry and render.
• Preparation: As clauses 400-440, 572C, 572D, 560-622 and 711
• Initial coat(s): stabilising solution if required as clause 450
• Finishing coats: 2 coats Weathershield masonry paint textured.
Issue 02
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
175
PYROSHIELD BASECOAT
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel
• For use where because of build up of existing wall finishes, the Class 1 or
Class O fire rating cannot be maintained. Use only where existing finishes are
well adhered.
• Surface: existing walls/ceilings
• Preparation: in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• Application: 2 coats for Class 1 rating, 3 coats for Class O rating
• Finishing coats: as clause 110A
175 A
ELECTROSTATIC COATING OF EXISTING METALWORK
• Manufacturer: As per finishes schedule/drawing.
- Product reference: Electrostatic coating, using airless spraying and HLVP
reduced atomisation spraying.
• Surfaces: existing pre-finished metalwork.
• Preparation: Previous coatings prepared with proprietary products following
manufacturer's instructions. .
• Initial coats: two-pack epoxy polyamide cured primer where required, applied
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• Finishing coats: Two-pack acrylic top coat , applied in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, colour as specified in project finishes schedule,
final lacquered finish.
FLOOR COATINGS
180
FLOOR PAINT. white spirit based paint for concrete floors
• Manufacturer: As per finishes schedule/drawing
• Surface: Existing concrete/screeded floor
• Preparation: as recommended by manufacturer
• Finishing coats: 2 coats as required
180 A
2 PACK EPOXY WATER BASED FLOOR PAINT water based paint for concrete
floors
• Manufacturer: : As per finishes schedule/drawing
• Surface: Existing concrete/screeded floor
• Preparation: as recommended by manufacturer
• Finishing coats: 2 coats as required (first coat thinned as per manufacturer's
instructions)
SPECIAL COATINGS
195
Issue 02
ICI 504 ROAD LINE PAINT for marking demarcation zones, car parking etc
• Manufacturer: As per finishes schedule/drawing.
• Surface: existing pavement/car park
• Preparation: as per manufacturer's instructions
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
195 A
ROAD MARKINGS Preformed thermoplastic road markings for marking
demarcation zones, car parking etc
• Manufacturer: As per finishes schedule/drawing.
• Product ref: As per finishes schedule/drawing.
• Colour: Yellow or white or project specific
• Torch applied all as per manufacturer's instructions. Contractor's method
statement to be approved by CA
195 B
ANTI-GRAFFITI PAINT SYSTEM OPAQUE
• Manufacturer: As per finishes schedule.
• Surfaces: Painted external surfaces.
• System: 3-part system of Anti-Graffiti Sealer, Anti-Graffiti Primer and AntiGraffiti Finish, colour - white and selected BS 4800 colours.
• Preparation and application to be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
• Subsequent removal of graffiti from treated surface: Graffiti Remover used in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
195 C
ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING TRANSPARENT
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel.
• System: Anti-Graffiti coating. Preparation and application to be in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
• Subsequent removal of graffiti from treated surface: usually with hot water
pressure-washer
195 D
GRAFFITI REMOVAL SMALL AREA
• Graffiti Stain Remover depending on surface
• Application to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
• Do not allow chemicals to be washed into drains (foul or surface water).
195 E
GRAFFITI REMOVAL LARGE AREA
• Product depends on base type and paint type • Application to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
• Do not allow chemicals to be washed into drains (foul or surface water).
GENERALLY
203
COLOUR RANGE
UWE STANDARD COLOURS
•
•
•
Gloss (& Emulsion Glenside) – 30BB 45/008 (Mid Grey)
Emulsion – 50BG 83/009 (Dove White)
UWE Red – 19YR 14/629 (RAL3020)
FEATURE WALLS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Issue 02
70YY/50/383 – Pistachio
90BG 38/185 – Blue
90GG 40/115 – Jade
00NN 16/000 – Grey
11BB 64/135 – Pale Blue
120 337 – Very Berry
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
GENERALLY
•
Colours to be advised by CA
215
HANDLING AND STORAGE
• Coating materials: Deliver in sealed containers, labelled clearly with brand
name, type of material and manufacturer's batch number.
• Materials from more than one batch: Store separately.
220
COMPATIBILITY
• Coating materials selected by contractor:
• Recommended by their manufacturers for the particular surface and
conditions of exposure.
• Compatible with each other.
• Compatible with and not inhibiting performance of preservative/fire retardant
pre-treatments.
240
SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED Radiator valves, stop valves, sprinkler heads
etc.
250
SURFACES TO BE CLEANED BUT NOT COATED Within areas that are to be
redecorated, upon completion clean all non-redecorated surfaces including glazing.
280
PROTECTION
• 'Wet paint' signs and barriers: Provide where necessary to protect other
operatives and general public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied
coatings.
321
INSPECTION OF WORK STAGES;
• Programme for inspections: Submit as follows:
• Inspection at completion of M60/400
• Inspection; Give prior notice when each stage is ready for inspection.
PREPARATION
400
Issue 02
PREPARATION GENERALLY
• Standard: In accordance with BS 6150.
• Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and
method statements covering operations, disposal of waste, containment, and
reoccupation, and obtain approval before commencing work.
• Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the
coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
• Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating.
• Efflorescence salts: Remove.
• Dirt, grease and oil: Remove.
- Give notice if contamination of surfaces/ substrates has occurred.
• Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions:
- Fill flush with surface, to provide smooth finish.
• Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming.
• Surface irregularities: Abrade to a smooth finish.
• Dust, particles and residues from abrasion: Remove and dispose of
separately.
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
•
•
Water based stoppers and fillers:
Apply before priming unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer.
- If applied after priming: Batch prime.
• Doors, opening windows and other moving parts:
- Ease before and after coating.
- Prime resulting bare areas.
• Tough Wood Filler, all in accordance with Cuprinol's technical information
sheets CT636 and CT635
420
FIXTURES AND FITTINGS
• Before commencing work: Remove the following: Grilles, cover plates and
other surface mounted fixtures.
• On completion of coating work: Re-fix.
423
RADIATORS
• Where directed by CA: Before commencing work remove radiators, flush-out
and wash-down external face prior to refixing.
• Where directed by CA replace thermostatic radiator valve in accordance with
mechanical specification.
425
IRONMONGERY
• Before commencing work: Remove ironmongery from surfaces to be coated.
• Hinges: Do not remove.
• On completion of coating work: Re-fix.
430
EXISTING IRONMONGERY
• General: Remove old coating marks. Clean and polish.
440
PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES GENERALLY
• Preparation standard: To BS 6150, clause 11.5.
• Contaminated or hazardous surfaces; Give notice of:
• Coatings suspected of containing lead.
• Substrates suspected of containing asbestos or other hazardous materials.
• Significant rot, corrosion or other degradation of substrates.
• Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and
method statements covering operations, disposal of waste, containment, and
reoccupation, and obtain approval before commencing work.
• Removing coatings: Do not damage substrate and adjacent surfaces or
adversely affect subsequent coatings.
• Loose, flaking or otherwise defective areas: Carefully remove to a firm edge.
• Alkali affected coatings: Completely remove.
• Retained coatings:
• Thoroughly clean to remove dirt, grease and contaminants.
• Gloss coated surfaces: Abrade to provide a key.
• Partly removed coatings:
• Additional preparatory coats: Apply to restore original coating thicknesses.
- Junctions: Abrade to give a flush surface.
- Completely stripped surfaces: Prepare as for uncoated surfaces.
Issue 02
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
450
APPROVED PRIMERS
• Manufacturer: AkzoNobel
• Wood: Dulux Trade Primer
• Metal: Dulux Trade Metal Primer
• Weathered galvanised metal: Dulux Trade Quick Drying Metal Primer
• MDF: Dulux Trade Quick drying MDF Primer Undercoat
• Melamine: Dulux Ultra Grip Primer (2-pack primer)
• Wall Tiles: Dulux Ultra Grip Primer (2-pack primer)
• Primer/Sealer (internal use): Dulux Trade Primer Sealer
456
PREVIOUSLY COATED TIMBER – BURNING OFF.
• Risk assessment and method statement; Prepare, and obtain hot works
approval before commencing work.
• Adjacent areas: Protect from excessive heat and falling scrapings.
• Exposed resinous areas and knots; Apply two coats of knotting.
• Removed coatings: Dispose of safely.
459
PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES – BLAST CLEANING.
• Prepare risk assessment and method statement before commencing work.
• Operatives:
- Trained/experienced in blast cleaning.
- Submit evidence of training/experience on request.
• Dust and nuisance: Minimise.
461
PREVIOUSLY COATED TIMBER
• Degraded or weathered surface timber: Take back to provide suitable
substrate.
• Degraded substrate timber: Repair with sound timber of same species.
• Exposed resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.
471
PREPRIMED TIMBER
• Defective primer: Abrade back to bare timber.
• Bare areas: Re-prime.
481
UNCOATED TIMBER
• General: Abrade to a smooth, even finish with arrises and moulding edges
lightly rounded or eased.
• Heads of fasteners: Countersink sufficient to hold stoppers/fillers.
• Resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.
490
PREVIOUSLY COATED STEEL
• Defective paintwork: Remove to leave a firm edge and clean bright metal.
• Sound paintwork: Abrade to provide key for subsequent coats.
• Corrosion and loose scale: Abrade back to bare metal.
• Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution.
• Bare metal: Apply primer as soon as possible.
• Remaining areas: Degrease.
500
PREPRIMED STEEL
• Defective primer, corrosion and loose scale: Abrade back to bare metal.
• Bare areas: Re-prime as soon as possible.
Issue 02
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
511
GALVANIZED, SHERARDIZED AND ELECTROPLATED STEEL
• White rust: Remove.
• Pre-treatment: Apply one of the following:
- 'T wash'/ mordant solution to blacken whole surface.
- Etching primer recommended by coating system manufacturer.
521
UNCOATED STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING
• Oil and grease: Remove.
• Corrosion, loose scale, welding slag and spatter: Abrade to remove.
• Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution.
• Primer: Apply as soon as possible.
531
UNCOATED STEEL – BLAST CLEANING.
• Oil and grease; Remove.
• Blast cleaning:
• Atmospheric conditions: Dry.
• Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil.
• Surface finish; To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade SA 2.5.
• Primer: Apply as soon as possible and within four hours of blast cleaning.
541
UNCOATED ALUMINIUM/ COPPER/ LEAD
• Surface corrosion: Remove and lightly abrade.
• Pre-treatment: Etching primer if recommended by coating system
manufacturer.
552
UNCOATED PVC-u
• Dirt and grease: Remove. Do not abrade surface.
560
UNCOATED CONCRETE.
• Release agents; Remove.
570
UNCOATED MASONRY/RENDERING
• Loose and flaking material: Remove.
572A
NEW / UNCOATED INTERIOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
• Thoroughly clean down the surface to remove all dirt, grease, etc. Carefully
remove plaster and mortar deposits. Remove efflorescence and underbond
slurry by brushing or rubbing with a dry cloth followed by wiping a damp cloth.
Allow to dry. Brush surface to remove any loose aggregate.
• Remove any surface mould growths and treat residual growths by washing
with a proprietary fungicidal wash as directed on the container. Rinse off after
24 hours and allow to dry. Repeat treatment if required.
- Cut and make good cracks, holes and other imperfections and allow such
making good to dry out thoroughly. All fillers must be used in accordance
with the manufacturers recommendations.
572B
PREVIOUSLY COATED INTERIOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
• Thoroughly clean down the surface to remove all dirt, grease, etc. Carefully
remove plaster and mortar deposits. Remove efflorescence and underbond
slurry by brushing or rubbing with a dry cloth followed by wiping a damp cloth.
Allow to dry. Brush surface to remove any loose aggregate.
Issue 02
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
•
•
•
•
Scrape, brush and wash to completely remove unstable surface coatings such
as soft distemper. Allow surface to dry before proceeding.
Remove any surface mould growths and treat residual growths by washing
with proprietary fungicidal wash as directed on the container. Rinse off 24
hours and allow to dry. Repeat treatment if required.
Cut and make good cracks, holes and other imperfections and allow such
making good to dry out thoroughly. All fillers must be used in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations.
Advise C.A. prior to applying initial coat(s) if surface remains powdery and
friable after thorough preparation. Primer/Sealer to be applied to CA
instruction.
572C
NEW / UNCOATED EXTERIOR WALLS
• Thoroughly clean down the surface to remove all dirt, grease, mould etc.
Carefully remove any mortar deposits. Remove efflorescence and underbond
slurry by brushing or rubbing with a dry cloth followed by wiping a damp cloth.
Allow to dry. Brush surface to remove any loose aggregate.
• Remove any surface mould growths and treat residual growths by washing
with proprietary fungicidal wash as directed on the container. Rinse off 24
hours and allow to dry. Repeat treatment if required.
• Cut and make good cracks, holes and other imperfections and allow such
making good to dry out thoroughly. All fillers must be used in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations.
• Advise C.A. prior to applying initial coat(s) if surface remains powdery and
friable after thorough preparation. Stabilising Primer to be applied to CA
instruction.
572D
PREVIOUSLY COATED EXTERIOR WALLS
• Thoroughly clean down the surface to remove all dirt, grease, etc. Carefully
remove plaster and mortar deposits. Remove efflorescence and underbond
slurry by brushing or rubbing with a dry cloth followed by wiping a damp cloth.
Allow to dry. Brush surface to remove any loose aggregate.
• Remove any surface mould growths and treat residual growths by washing
with proprietary fungicidal wash as directed on the container. Rinse off 24
hours and allow to dry. Repeat treatment if required.
• Cut and make good cracks, holes and other imperfections and allow such
making good to dry out thoroughly. All fillers must be used in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations.
• Advise C.A. prior to applying initial coat(s) if surface remains powdery and
friable after thorough preparation. Stabilising Primer to be applied to CA
instruction.
580
UNCOATED PLASTER
• Nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes: Scrape off.
• Over trowelled 'polished' areas: Abrade lightly.
590
UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD
• Depressions around fixings: Fill with stoppers/fillers.
601
UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD - TO RECEIVE TEXTURED COATING
• Joints: Fill, tape and feather out with materials recommended by textured
coating manufacturer.
Issue 02
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
611
WALLCOVERINGS
• Retained wall coverings: Check that they are in good condition and well
adhered to substrate.
• Previously covered walls: Wash down to remove paper residues, adhesive
and size.
622
ORGANIC GROWTHS
• Loose growths and infected coatings: Scrape off and remove from site.
• Treatment biocide: Apply appropriate solution to growth areas and
surrounding surfaces.
• Dead growth: Scrape off and remove.
• Residual effect biocide: Apply appropriate solution to inhibit re-establishment
of growths.
631
PREVIOUSLY PAINTED WINDOW FRAMES
• Paint encroaching beyond glass sight line: Remove.
• Loose and defective putty: Remove.
• Putty cavities and junctions between previously painted surfaces and glass:
Clean thoroughly.
• Finishing:
- Patch prime, re-putty and allow to harden.
- Seal and coat as soon as sufficiently hard.
640
EXTERNAL POINTING TO EXISTING FRAMES
• Defective sealant pointing: Remove.
• Joint depth: Approximately half joint width; adjust with backing strip if
necessary.
• Preparation and application:
• Sealant:
- Manufacturer: As per finishes schedule/drawing.
- Preparation and application as section Z22.
645
SEALING OF INTERNAL MOVEMENT JOINTS.
• General: To junctions of walls and ceilings with architraves, skirtings and
other trims.
• Sealant: Water based acrylic.
• Manufacturer: as specified.
• Preparation and application: As section Z22.
651
EXISTING GUTTERS
• Dirt and debris: Clean from inside of gutters.
• Defective joints: Clean and seal with suitable jointing material.
711
COATING GENERALLY
• Application standard: To BS 6150, CLAUSE 9..
• Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during
application and drying.
• Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application.
• Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by
manufacturer.
• Over painting: Do not paint over intumescent strips or silicone mastics.
• Priming coats:
Issue 02
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
M60
PAINTING / CLEAR FINISHING
-
Thickness: To suit surface porosity.
Application: As soon as possible on same day as preparation is completed.
• Finish: Even, smooth and of uniform colour.
- Free from brush marks, sags, runs and other defects.
- Cut in neatly.
- Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease before coating,
between coats and after coating.
720
PRIMING JOINERY.
• Preservative treated timber: Retreat cut surfaces with two flood coats of a
suitable preservative before priming.
• End grain; Coat liberally, allow to soak in, and recoat.
730
WORKSHOP COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES
• General: Apply coatings to all surfaces of components.
731
SITE COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES.
• General; After priming, apply additional coatings to surfaces that will be
concealed when fixed in place.
740
CONCEALED METAL SURFACES.
• General; Apply additional coatings to surfaces that will be concealed when
fixed in place.
751
STAINING TIMBER
• Primer: Apply if recommended by stain manufacturer.
• Stain: Apply in flowing coats and brush out excess stain to produce uniform
appearance.
760
VARNISHING WOOD.
• First coat: Brush well in and lay off avoiding aeration.
• Subsequent coats; Rub down lightly along the grain between coats.
770
EXTERNAL DOORS
• Bottom edges: Prime and coat before hanging doors.
780
790
BEAD GLAZING TO COATED TIMBER
• Before glazing: Apply first two coats to rebates and beads
•
PUTTY GLAZING
• Setting: Allow putty to set for seven days.
• Sealing: Within a further 14 days, seal with an oil based primer.
• Fully protect putty with coating system as soon as it is sufficiently hard.
• Extend finishing coats on to glass up to sight line.
800
Issue 02
GLAZING.
• Etched, sand blasted and ground glass; Treat or mask edges before coating
to protect from contamination by oily constituents of coating materials.
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
PRODUCTS
160
SHELVING SYSTEM
TOPRAIL SHELVING / PROPRIETARY STORAGE SYSTEM
Issue: 01
DESCRIPTION:
Rail hung storage system. All items are hung from the
rail/uprights - only the rail is fixed
MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION:
To BS4875 Part 7 and HTM62
FINISH / COLOUR:
Manufacturers standard
INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS:
The rail is to be installed in accordance with the
manufacturers installation guide set out in their Fact Sheet B
SUPPORTING
DOCUMENTS:
This specification is to be read in conjunction with the
manufacturers literature, relevant drawings and schedules
MANUFACTURERS
DETAILS:
Toprail Systems Ltd, Unit 17, Shepperton Business Park
Govett Avenue, Shepperton, Middlesex. TW17 8BA
Tel: +44 (0)870 777 5557 Fax: +44 (0)870 777 5556
Email: [email protected] Web: www.toprail.com
RAIL:
Manufactured from anodised aluminium extrusion.
30.010
Rail & cover 2400mm
30.012
Cover only 2400mm
30.013
Rail end stop – left hand
30.014
Rail end stop – right hand
30.023
Rail fixing tool (only recommended where large quantities of
rail are to be installed)
SLOTTED
UPRIGHTS:
Slotted uprights are used to support a wide range of
Toprail components. They hook directly onto the rail.
They are spaced at intervals of 350/360mm for filing
applications/pigeon holes. They are spaced at intervals
of 600mm or 750mm for all other applications.
30.020
Slotted upright – short 919mm
30.027
Slotted upright – medium 1215mm
30.021
Slotted upright – long 1844mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
HOOKS:
Hooks designed to hang directly from the rail.
30.092
Chart hook (for charts, pictures, calendars etc.)
30.090
Rivet hook (can be used for existing pinboards/marker
boards)
30.096
Magnetic hook (for holding paper/lightweight sheets)
30.112
Clamping hook (for heavier presentation card)
30.093
Special board hook (for display boards etc.)
30.091
25mm hook (screw onto existing pinboards/marker boards)
SHELVING:
Laminate and white powder coated universal steel
shelves are used with bookend brackets. Aluminium and
stainless steel shelves have integral bookend brackets
that hook directly onto the slotted uprights.
Laminate shelves 18mm high density particle board core
with 1mm laminate on both faces, standard colour white
with PVC lip to front edge and slots in the underside to
locate into bookend brackets.
30.072
Laminate shelf 600 x 250mm
30.073
Laminate shelf 600 x 325mm
30.070
Laminate shelf 750 x 250mm
30.074
Laminate shelf 750 x 325mm
Laminate shelves are supported on bookend brackets to
suit either 250mm or 325mm deep shelves. Available in
a standard height of 110mm or extended height 185mm
to provide additional support for lever arch files or
heavier books.
Issue: 01
30.030
Bookend brackets - 250mm satin anodised aluminium (pair)
30.032
Bookend brackets - 325mm satin anodised aluminium (pair)
30.041
Bookend brackets - 250mm white powder coated (pair)
30.042
Bookend brackets - 325mm white powder coated (pair)
30.007
Extended bookend brackets - 250mm satin anodised (pair)
30.008
Extended bookend brackets - 325mm satin anodised (pair)
30.005
Extended bookend brackets - 250mm white powder coated
(pair)
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
30.006
Extended bookend brackets - 325mm white powder coated
(pair)
Laminate shelf dividers manufactured from satin
anodised aluminium.
30.100
Laminate shelf divider for 250mm shelf
30.101
Laminate shelf divider for 325mm shelf
One piece white powder coated aluminium shelves
incorporating 115mm high integral bookend brackets.
They hook directly onto slotted uprights. Ideal for use in
clinical areas where a high degree of hygiene is required.
30.697
One piece shelf 600 x 150mm
30.705
One piece shelf 600 x 250mm
30.707
One piece shelf 600 x 325mm
30.704
One piece shelf 750 x 250mm
30.706
One piece shelf 750 x 325mm
30.755
One piece shelf 360 x 250mm (pigeon hole/post tray use)
30.744
One piece shelf 360 x 325mm (pigeon hole/post tray use)
30.709
One piece shelf 350 x 250mm (pigeon hole/post tray use)
30.710
One piece shelf 350 x 325mm (pigeon hole/post tray use)
Stainless steel one piece shelves incorporating 115mm
high integral bookend brackets that hook directly onto
slotted uprights.
Issue: 01
30.649
One piece stainless steel shelf 600 x 250mm
30.650
One piece stainless steel shelf 600 x 325mm
30.651
One piece stainless steel shelf 750 x 250mm
30.652
One piece stainless steel shelf 750 x 325mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
Universal white powder coated steel shelves for use
where extremely robust heavy load shelving is required.
Supplied with white powder coated steel bookend
brackets in standard size. Hook directly onto slotted
uprights.
30.087
Universal steel shelf 600 x 400mm
30.088
Universal steel shelf 600 x 300mm
30.084
Universal steel shelf 750 x 400mm
30.085
Universal steel shelf 750 x 300mm
Filing shelves manufactured in A4 and A3 sizes.
Manufactured in powder coated aluminium. Hook
directly onto slotted uprights.
30.060
A4 Filing shelf - silver
30.061
A4 Filing shelf – yellow
30.063
A4 Filing shelf - white
30.059
A3 Filing shelf - silver
30.062
A3 Filing shelf - yellow
30.064
A3 Filing shelf - white
Shallow lipped shelves manufactured in white powder
coated aluminium with integral book-end brackets for
mounting onto slotted uprights.
30.749
Shallow lipped shelf 600 x 150mm
30.750
Shallow lipped shelf 750 x 150mm
Deep lipped shelves manufactured in white powder
coated aluminium with integral book-end brackets for
mounting onto slotted uprights.
Issue: 01
30.711
Deep lipped shelf 600 x 75mm
30.712
Deep lipped shelf 600 x 150mm
30.720
Deep lipped shelf 750 x 75mm
30.721
Deep lipped shelf 750 x 150mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
Sloping shelves manufactured with either a shallow or
deep lip in white powder coated aluminium. Supplied
complete with brackets for mounting onto slotted
uprights.
30.078
Sloping shelf 600 x 375mm
30.083
Sloping shelf 600 x 500mm
30.077
Sloping shelf 750 x 375mm
30.075
Sloping shelf 750 x 500mm
SHELVING
BRACKETS:
(For continuous
shelving)
30.031
Pass over bracket 145mm (for 150mm shelf)
30.035
Double flange bracket 145mm (for 150mm shelf)
30.033
Pass over bracket 210mm (for 250mm shelf)
30.034
Double flange bracket 210mm (for 250mm shelf)
30.036
Pass over bracket 285mm (for 300mm shelf)
30.038
Double flange bracket 285mm (for 300mm shelf)
30.040
Pass over bracket 385mm (for 400mm shelf)
30.043
Double flange bracket 385mm (for 400mm shelf)
CUPBOARDS:
Issue: 01
Pass over brackets used to support continuous shelving
supplied with a single or double flange. The double
flange bracket is used to support two joining sections of
shelving material. The spacing between brackets is
determined by the permissible span of the shelving
material being used. If other Toprail components are
being used then the span must be 600mm or 750mm
between the slotted uprights.
Cupboards are manufactured from white melamine, high
density particle board. Cupboards are supported from
slotted uprights that enable easy height adjustment.
Cupboard doors are supplied with 180 degree opening
hinges with standard locks to doors. Cupboards have
one internal adjustable shelf as standard. Locks are not
provided as standard on drawer fronts. Cupboards fitted
with cupboard support set.
30.820
Cupboard L/H hinged 600 x 600 x 325mm
30.821
Cupboard R/H hinged 600 x 600 x 325mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
30.822
Cupboard with 2 doors 750 x 600 x 325mm
30.823
Cupboard L/H hinged with 1 drawer 600 x 900 x 325mm
30.824
Cupboard R/H hinged with 1 drawer 600 x 900 x 325mm
30.825
Cupboard L/H hinged with 2 drawers 600 x 900 x 325mm
30.826
Cupboard R/H hinged with 2 drawers 600 x 900 x 325mm
Cupboards with up & over doors manufactured in white
melamine high density particle board to match standard
cupboard range, with a white powder coated aluminium
sliding up & over door. Cupboards supplied with door
locks, one internal adjustable shelf and fitted with
cupboard support set.
30.587
Cupboard with up & over door 600 x 425 x 425mm
30.588
Cupboard with up & over door 750 x 425 x 425mm
Drawer set units manufactured as a set of three drawers
fabricated from white melamine, high density particle
board. Locks are not supplied as standard. Fitted with
cupboard support set.
30.827
Three-drawer unit 600 x 600 x 425mm
Cupboard support sets for use in hanging cupboard
units, framed panels or similar furniture not
manufactured by Toprail. Supplied complete with inserts
and bolts to mount the bobbins onto the unit together
with support plates. Please refer to Toprail Fact Sheet
C.0 for full details.
30.080
Cupboard support set
30.082
Large cupboard support set (for use where weight exceeds
60kg)
WORKTOPS:
Must be used in conjunction with the correct heavy duty
brackets which locate and clamp onto the slotted
uprights.
Linoleum covered high density particle board worktops,
manufactured in Marmoleum range from Forbo Nairn
Issue: 01
30.770
Worktop in linoleum 600 x 500mm
30.771
Worktop in linoleum 1230 x 500mm
30.772
Worktop in linoleum 750 x 500mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
30.773
Worktop in linoleum 1530 x 500mm
30.775
Worktop in linoleum 1530 x 800mm
White powder coated aluminium worktops. Can also be
used as extra wide shelves.
30.716
Worktop/shelf 600 x 500 x 40mm
30.717
Worktop/shelf 1230 x 500 x 40mm
30.713
Worktop/shelf 750 x 500 x 40mm
30.714
Worktop/shelf 1530 x 500 x 40mm
30.718
Worktop/shelf - perforated 600 x 500 x 40mm
30.719
Worktop/shelf - perforated 1230 x 500 x 40mm
30.739
Worktop/shelf - perforated 750 x 500 x 40mm
30.751
Worktop/shelf - perforated 1530 x 500 x 40mm
Stainless steel worktops
30.726
Stainless steel worktop 600 x 500 x 40mm
30.728
Stainless steel worktop 1230 x 500 x 40mm
Laminate worktops 38mm thick
30.722
Worktops 600 x 500mm
30.723
Worktops 1230 x 500mm
30.727
Worktops 750 x 500mm
30.729
Worktops 1530 x 500mm
Heavy duty brackets designed with unique clamping
devise to hold bracket around the slotted upright as well
as latch into the actual slot to create an extremely strong
support bracket.
Issue: 01
30.039
Heavy duty brackets (pair) 500mm
30.047
Heavy duty brackets (pair) 650mm
30.048
Adjustable leg support (pair) – for use with 800mm worktops
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
White powder coated aluminium worktops with
aluminium bracket inserts that connect the worktop to
the slotted uprights
(Heavy duty brackets not required with this item).
30.703
Worktop with inserts 600 x 500mm
30.701
Worktop with inserts 750 x 500mm
Fold down table – white powder coated aluminium work
surface with integral fold down hinges and ‘rapid
release’ fingertip control to lower and raise and
automatically lock into position. (Heavy duty brackets
not required with this item)
30.760
Fold down table 600 x 500mm
30.761
Fold down table 750 x 500mm
STORAGE UNITS:
Open storage units with adjustable vertical dividers,
manufactured from white powder coated aluminium.
When used in a vertical stack, the lid is only necessary
for the top unit. Units have a generous lip for labelling
purposes.
30.201
Open storage unit 600 x 325mm (will hold 7 dividers)
30.207
Open storage lid 600mm
30.213
Open storage unit 750 x 325mm (will hold 9 dividers)
30.212
Open storage lid 750mm
30.204
Open storage unit dividers 280mm
Open storage units with a fixed centre shelf and vertical
dividers. Manufactured from white powder coated
aluminium.
Issue: 01
30.202
Open storage unit with shelf 600 x 325mm (will hold 14
dividers)
30.207
Open storage lid 600mm
30.216
Open storage unit with shelf 750 x 325mm (will hold 18
dividers)
30.212
Open storage lid 750mm
30.205
Open storage unit dividers 135mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
Bulk storage units manufactured in white powder coated
aluminium. Bulk storage unit sides hook into slotted
uprights. The units consist of a pair of sides and then
either 2 or 3 shelves.
30.210
Bulk storage unit sides 425 x 425mm (supplied in pairs)
30.211
Bulk storage units shelf 600 x 425mm
30.215
Bulk storage unit shelf 750 x 425mm
Wire baskets manufactured from PVC coated heavy-duty
steel mesh. Baskets are supported on a wire basket
frame.
30.421
Wire basket 625 x 430 x 425mm
30.424
Wire basket 630 x 370 x 300mm
Wire basket frames manufactured from powder coated
aluminium tube section supported from anodised
aluminium brackets that hook onto slotted uprights.
30.422
Wire basket frame 1230 x 500mm
30.425
Wire basket frame 600 x 500mm
PANELS:
All panels are mounted in one of three ways:
1. Rail hung for mounting items at a fixed height
2. Hooked directly onto slotted uprights
3. Bobbin mounted for adjustable height between
slotted uprights
Lipped support panels hook directly into the slotted
uprights. Manufactured from powder coated aluminium
and used to support tote bins.
Issue: 01
30.186
Lipped support panel 600 x 159mm
30.187
Lipped support panel 600 x 311mm
30.188
Lipped support panel 600 x 465mm
30.183
Lipped support panel 750 x 159mm
30.184
Lipped support panel 750 x 311mm
30.185
Lipped support panel 750 x 465mm
31.190
Plastic bin size 1 105 x 105 x 50mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
31.191
Plastic bin size 3 190 x 105 x 75mm
31.192
Plastic bin size 4 210 x 140 x 130mm
31.193
Plastic bin size 6 280 x 210 x 180mm
31.194
Plastic bin size 8 375 x 420 x 180mm
Peg panels hook directly into the slotted uprights.
Manufactured from powder coated aluminium. Peg
panels support a range of polypropylene round or flat
hooks and ‘Terry Clips’
30.364
Peg panels 600 x 159mm
30.400
Peg panels 600 x 311mm
30.401
Peg panels 600 x 465mm
30.365
Peg panels 750 x 159mm
30.402
Peg panels 750 x 311mm
30.403
Peg panels 750 x 465mm
30.366
Eurohook (flat profile) 100mm
30.367
Eurohook (flat profile) 200mm
30.368
Round profile hook 100mm
30.369
Round profile hook 150mm
30.370
Round profile hook 200mm
30.404
Terry Clip
Literature racks hang directly from the rail. Fabricated
with a smoked acrylic back panel and 4 perspex
literature pockets.
30.359
Literature rack – 4 x A4 pockets 350 x 879mm
Magazine racks hang directly from the rail. Fabricated
with a smoked acrylic back panel and 3 open-ended
perspex pockets.
30.358
Issue: 01
Magazine rack – 3 x A3 pockets 450 x 879mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
Coat racks hang directly from the rail.
30.120
Coat rack unit – 3 hooks 225 x 300mm
30.123
Coat rack unit – 5 hooks 375 x 300mm
30.124
Coat rack unit – 9 hooks 675 x 300mm
Socket outlet panels hook into the slotted uprights and
provide a range of terminal combinations. Standard
panels incorporate 4 x 13 amp sockets or 2 x 13 amp
sockets with 2 x telephone / data points.
30.362
Socket outlet panel 600 x 150mm
30.363
Socket outlet panel 750 x 150mm
Light panels hang directly from the rail.
30.521
Rail mounted directional light
Vanity panels hang directly from the rail. They
incorporate a vanity mirror with a fixed bottom shelf.
30.371
Vanity panel with mirror and shelf 400 x 919mm
Blank panels are either rail hung units, for mounting
items at a fixed height, or bobbin-mounted, for
positioning at adjustable heights between slotted
uprights. They can be used to house equipment such as
fire extinguishers, telephones, first aid and eye wash
stations, cleaning and maintenance equipment.
Issue: 01
30.352
Blank panel rail hung 200 x 919mm
30.353
Blank panel rail hung 300 x 919mm
30.354
Blank panel rail hung 400 x 919mm
30.356
Blank panel rail hung 600 x 919mm
30.372
Blank panel rail hung 200 x 1200mm
30.373
Blank panel rail hung 300 x 1200mm
30.374
Blank panel rail hung 400 x 1200mm
30.376
Blank panel rail hung 600 x 1200mm
30.340
Blank bobbin mounted panel 600 x 300mm
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
30.341
Blank bobbin mounted panel 600 x 425mm
30.342
Blank bobbin mounted panel 600 x 600mm
30.343
Blank bobbin mounted panel 600 x 900mm
30.344
Blank bobbin mounted panel 600 x 1200mm
30.345
Blank bobbin mounted panel 750 x 300mm
30.346
Blank bobbin mounted panel 750 x 425mm
30.347
Blank bobbin mounted panel 750 x 600mm
PRESENTATION
EQUIPMENT:
Once the rail and cover section has been correctly
installed all presentation equipment can simply be hung
directly from the rail.
Pinboards manufactured from 6mm Forbo Nairn bulletin
board. Aluminium framed with mitred corners,
aluminium backing and supplied complete with hooks to
hang directly on the rail.
30.143
Pinboard 600 x 879mm colour – beige
30.141
Pinboard 1200 x 879mm colour – beige
30.145
Pinboard 600 x 879mm colour – blue
30.147
Pinboard 1200 x 879mm colour – blue
Magnetic dry marker boards fabricated from P3 ceramic
steel with Polyvision high quality magnetic writing
surface. Aluminium framed with mitred corners,
supplied complete with hooks to hang directly on the
rail.
30.130
Dry marker board 600 x 879mm
30.132
Dry marker board 1200 x 879mm
Flipcharts manufactured with backing board from the
same material as the magnetic dry marker boards and
therefore doubles as a dry marker. Supplied with
adjustable slide hooks for various size flip chart pads
and complete with hooks to hang directly from the rail.
Issue: 01
30.520
Flipchart unit 750 x 879mm
30.519
Flipchart pad 40 x A1 sheets
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
Pull down projection screens manufactured from
‘miralyte matt’ high gain projection surface supplied
complete with hooks to hang directly on the rail.
30.142
Pull down projection screen 1520 x 1520mm
Tilting projection screen incorporates ‘miralyte matt’
high gain projection screen within powder coated
aluminium frame.
30.522
Tilting projection screen 1660 x 1700mm
MOBILE UNIT:
Frame manufactured in aluminium box section powder
coated in silver, with white powder coated aluminium
back panels and heavy duty braked castors. Designed to
support 2 x 600mm bays.
30.103
Mobile unit 1950mm high x 1325mm wide x 535mm deep
STATIC ISLAND
UNIT:
Frame manufactured in aluminium box section powder
coated in silver with white powder coated aluminium
back panels. Supplied single or double sided.
30.102
Static island unit 2 x 600mm bays double sided 1840 x 1330
x 1070mm
30.104
Static island unit 2 x 600mm bays single sided 1840 x 1330 x
535mm
30.105
Static island unit 2 x 750mm bays double sided 1840 x 1630
x 1070mm
30.106
Static island unit 2 x 750mm bays single sided 1840 x 1630 x
535mm
HOSPITAL
COMPONENTS:
Issue: 01
Suture cabinet frames designed to hold standard suture
cabinets supplied by various manufacturers.
Constructed to contain 8 trays high (but can
accommodate more when each cabinet is locked to the
next). Manufactured in white powder coated aluminium.
30.304
Suture cabinet frame (for hanging on slotted uprights)
30.305
Suture cabinet frame (for wall mounting)
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
X-ray viewer support bars enable viewer panels of most
makes to be supported on Toprail. Hooks are mounted
onto powder coated aluminium bars with adjustable hole
positions so that height and width of viewer can be
determined by user.
30.349
X-ray viewer support bars (pair)
Open storage dispenser units are standard open storage
units with an adjustable and removable powder coated
frame complete with a clear plastic front panel. They
have vertical dividers manufactured in white powder
coated aluminium. When used in a vertical stack, the lid
is only necessary for the top unit.
30.220
Open storage dispenser 600 x 325mm (will hold 7 dividers)
30.207
Open storage lid 600mm
30.221
Open storage dispenser 750 x 325mm (will hold 9 dividers)
30.212
Open storage lid 750mm
30.204
Open storage unit dividers 280mm
Catheter Trays – deep lipped shelves manufactured in
white powder coated aluminium
30.711
Catheter tray 600 x 75mm
30.712
Catheter tray 600 x 150mm
30.720
Catheter tray 750 x 75mm
30.721
Catheter tray 750 x 150mm
Suture Trays – shallow lipped shelves manufactured in
white powder coated aluminium.
240
30.749
Suture tray 600 x 150mm
30.750
Suture tray 750 x 150mm
VERTICAL BLINDS
• Manufacturer and reference: Luvolite Luvotex FR A17
• Blade width: 127mm
• Colour: Cream
• Cleaning: Blades to be cleaned at completion, to manufacturer’s instructions
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
247
ROLLER BLINDS –LECTURE THEATRES
• Blackout blind to lecture theatres
• Electrically controlled from Lecturns (see Electrical Specification)
247B
ROLLER BLINDS - GLENSIDE
• Blackout blind to teaching & learning spaces
• Rolshade 430 chain operated roller blind
• Manufacture: Kensington, Capital House, 17 Alexandra Park, Fishponds,
Bristol, BS16 2BG. T: +44 (0)117 958 9933, F: +44 (0)117 958 9936, E:
[email protected], www.kensingtonsystems.co.uk
• High quality heavy duty side control roller blind system for institutional use,
incorporating 44mm diameter roller tube with internal spines to provide
rigidity, fitted with heavy duty white aluminium hem bar to maintain
taughtness of the fabric. Operation by means of nickel steel control chain, a
one piece enclosed chain sprocket to provide positive action and integrity of
mechanism under load. PVC Grey.
290
MATWELL FRAMES
• Project specific
300
ENTRANCE MATTING
• Project specific
EXECUTION
710
MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD AND WOOD BASED BOARDS
• Temperature and humidity: During delivery, storage, fixing and to handover
maintain conditions to suit specified moisture contents of timber components.
• Testing: When instructed, test components with approved moisture meter to
manufacturers recommendations.
720
INSTALLATION GENERALLY
• Fixing and fasteners: As section Z20.
• Services: Allow for cutting/chasing as necessary to allow the routing of intruder
alarm and/or access control cables/plates
760
SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING
• Application: As section Z22
• Bedding: As required
• Pointing: As required
770
TRIMS
• Lengths: Wherever possible, unjointed between angles or ends of runs.
• Running joints: Where unavoidable, obtain approval of location and method of
jointing
• Angle joints: Mitred
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N10
GENERAL FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS / EQUIPMENT
COMPLETION
910
GENERAL
• Doors and drawers: Accurately aligned, not binding. Adjusted to ensure smooth
operation.
• Ironmongery: Checked, adjusted and lubricated to ensure correct functioning.
920
APPLIANCES
• Test Run for a full cycle, ensure that all functions and features work correctly.
• Documentation: Submit guarantees, instruction manuals etc.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N13
SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
PRODUCTS
300
WCS AND CISTERNS
• WC Pan - Armitage Shanks Contour 21 rimless standard height back to wall WC
pan, standard projection with floor fixing kit. Ref. S3056.
• WC seat – Armitage Shanks Contour 21 toilet seat no cover, top fixing hinges
with retaining buffers. Ref. S4066.
• WC cistern – Refer to Mechanical Specification.
302
WCS AND FLUSHING VALVES
• Refer to Mechanical Specification
311
UNISEX ACCESSIBLE CORNER WC EQUIPMENT PACKAGES (DOCUMENT M)
• Manufacturer: Armitage Shanks
- Product reference: S6984(RN)
• Type approval certificate: Submit.
• Finish/ Colour:
- Pan & Cistern: White
- Seat: White
- Basin: White
- Handrails and grab bars: Charcoal - RAL 7016
• Transfer handing: Project specific
• Water supply fittings (basin): See Mechanical specification
• Water supply temperature (maximum): Mechanical specification
• Accessories: Fix only soap dispenser etc to be supplied by UWE Facilities
Cleaning Services.
315
URINALS AND AUTOFLUSHING CISTERNS
• Urinals: Armitage Shanks Sanura 50cm wall urinal. Ref. S6100.
• Wastes and traps: Refer to Mechanical Specification
• Auto-flush: Refer to Mechanical Specification
316
URINALS AND FLUSHING VALVES
• Refer to Mechanical Specification.
331
SINKS
• Project specific
335
WASH BASINS
• Basins: Armitage Shanks Orbit 21, 55cm countertop washbasin, single centre
taphole, overflow, no chainstay hole. Ref S2486
• Wastes and traps: Refer to Mechanical Specification
• Taps: Refer to Mechanical Specification
338
WASH BASIN & PEDESTAL
• Basins: Armitage Shanks, white Sandringham Classic full pedestal washbasin,
single centre taphole, overflow, no chainstay hole. Ref S2112(01)
• Wastes and traps: Refer to Mechanical Specification
• Taps: Refer to Mechanical Specification
Issue 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N13
SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS
375
SHOWER UNITS
• Project specific
436
HANDRAILS AND GRAB BARS – Other than Accessible WC
• Project specific
438
GLASS MIRRORS
• Mirror material: Float glass, silvered to give maximum reflection, free from
tarnishing, discoloration, scratches and other defects visible in the designed
viewing conditions.
• Thickness: 6 mm.
• Backing: Silvered.
• Edge treatment: Polished arris
• Background: project specific.
• Fixing method: Dome top wood screws with polyethylene sleeves and washers
at 600 mm centres.
• Installation: Fixed accurately and securely without over tightening fasteners, to
provide a flat surface giving a distortion free reflection.
441
PAPER ROLL DISPENSERS - Fix only
• To be supplied by UWE Facilities Cleaning Services
442
PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS - Fix only
• To be supplied by UWE Facilities Cleaning Services
446
SANITARY TOWEL DISPOSAL BINS - Fix only
• To be supplied by UWE Facilities Cleaning Services
458
SOAP DISPENSERS - Fix only
• To be supplied by UWE Facilities Cleaning Services
462
TOILET PAPER HOLDERS - Fix only
• To be supplied by UWE Facilities Cleaning Services
• Concealed fixings where possible; generally fix back-to-back to adjacent
cubicles where even number of cubicles, on last odd number cubicle fix to preexisting wall or if end panel fix with dome headed bolt.
472
HAND DRIERS • Refer to Electrical Specification
484
SANITARY TOWEL DISPENSERS
• To be supplied and fixed by UWE Facilities Cleaning Services
500
PREPLUMBED FRAME SYSTEM
• See K32
580
SEALANT FOR POINTING
• Project specific
Issue 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N13
SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS
EXECUTION
610
INSTALLATION GENERALLY
• Assembly and fixing: Surfaces designed to falls to drain as intended.
• Fasteners: Nonferrous Or stainless steel.
• Supply and discharge pipework: Fix before appliances.
• Fixing: Fix appliances securely to structure. Do not support on pipework.
• Jointing and bedding compounds: Recommended by manufacturers of
appliances, accessories and pipes being jointed or bedded.
• Appliances: Do not use. Do not stand on appliances.
• On completion: Components and accessories working correctly with no leaks.
• Labels and stickers: Removed.
620
NOGGINGS AND BEARERS
• Noggings, bearers, etc. to support sanitary appliances and fittings: Position
accurately. Fix securely.
630
TILED BACKGROUNDS OTHER THAN SPLASHBACKS
• Timing: Complete before fixing appliances.
• Fixing appliances: Do not overstress tiles.
670
INSTALLING CISTERNS
• Cistern operating components: Obtain from cistern manufacturer.
- Float operated valve: Matched to pressure of water supply.
• Overflow pipe: Fixed to falls and located to give visible warning of discharge.
- Location: Agreed, where not shown on drawings.
710
INSTALLING TAPS
• Fixing: Secure against twisting.
• Seal with appliance: Watertight.
• Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by user of appliance.
• See also N13.335 & N13.338
720
INSTALLING WASTES AND OVERFLOWS
• Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound.
• Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and backnut.
755
SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING
• Bedding: Project specific.
•
Pointing: Project specific
Issue 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N14
GENERAL INTERNAL SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
GENERAL
110
SIGNAGE SYSTEM
• Project specific
120
INCLUSIVE SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
• Project specific
127
ROOM NAME PLATES – FRENCHAY & BOWER ASHTON
• Nomenclature: As per individual project schedule
• Manufacturer: Spandex UK
• Address: 1600 Park Avenue, Aztec West, Almondsbury, Bristol, BS32 4UA. Tel
0800 772633
• Product: Slatz
• Faceplate: 150mm wide, Multi slat system; Top Slat – “Room Number” Square
Little Slatz Finishing Plate 41mm high overall (SV700); Subsequent Slats –
“Occupant Name” Square Mini Finishing Plate 20.5 high (SV125); Colour Silver
• Sidetracks: Square; Silver SV121
• Caps: Square; Black plastic SZ0042
• Fixing: Mechanically fixed to substrate
• Room Numbering: Numbering to be obtained from UWE CETT’s based upon
UWE Facilities Design Guide for Buildings – Guidance for Cataloguing Rooms.
128
ROOM NAME PLATE – WC / SHOWER / BABY CHANGING etc. – FRENCHAY &
BOWER ASHTON
• Slats: As per individual project schedule
• Product: Big Slatz
• Manufacturer: Spandex UK
• Address: 1600 Park Avenue, Aztec West, Almondsbury, Bristol, BS32 4UA. Tel
0800 772633
• Faceplates: Two slat system; Top – “Room Number” Square Little Finishing
Plate 41mm high (SV700); Bottom – “Symbol” Square Big Finishing Plate 82mm
high (SV710); Colour – Silver
• Fixing: Mechanically fixed to substrate
• Room Numbering: Numbering to be obtained from UWE CETT’s based upon
UWE Facilities Design Guide for Buildings – Guidance for Cataloguing Rooms
129
ROOM PLATE – ROOM INFORMATION (Timetable etc.)
• Acrylic A4 Paper Holder, silver anodised frame & header panel
• Product: A4TUWE
• Manufacturer: Create Signs Ltd
• Address: The Barn, The Bypass, Langford, Bristol BS40 5JQ.
Tel: 01934 853888
• Web: http://www.create-signs.co.uk/
• Fixing: Doors – fixed with adhesive pads; Walls - mechanically fixed to
substrate.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N14
GENERAL INTERNAL SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
• Signage system: Complete to BS 559, including facing information,
components, inserts, accessories and fixings necessary to complete the system.
• Comply with the requirements of: Project Specific.
• Geometric shapes, colours and layout: In accordance with BS 8501.
• Design standard for disabled people: In accordance with BS 8300.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations and
manufacturer’s literature.
290
SIGNAGE SAMPLES / SAMPLE BOARD
• Sign type: Project Specific
- Action: Submit labelled samples.
- Content: Selected labelled signs, show methods of fixing if required by CA
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract or until
instructed to remove.
- Delivered products: To conform with labelled samples
PRODUCTS
305
PRODUCTS GENERALLY
• Standard: To BS 559.
310
ADHESIVE VINYL
• Project specific
320
ALUMINIUM
• Project specific
350
PLASTICS
• Project specific
EXECUTION
610
FIXING SIGNS GENERALLY
• Installation: To BS 559.
- Secure, plumb and level.
• Strength of fasteners: Sufficient to support all live and dead loads.
• Fasteners and/or adhesives: As section Z20,
• Fixings showing on surface of sign: Must not detract from the message being
displayed
620
FIXING SIGNS FOR THE VISUALLY IMPAIRED
• Protection of users: Fasteners for Tactile / Braille signs must not have sharp
edges or protrusions that would cause confusion or injury to users.
COMPLETION
910
DOCUMENTATION
• Submit: Manufacturer's maintenance instructions. Guarantees, warranties, test
certificates, record schedules and log books
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N15
INTERNAL FIRE AND SAFETY SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
110
SIGNAGE SYSTEM
• Signage system design:
- Complete to : BS559 and BS ISO 16069
- Comply with the requirements of: UWE’s Health & Safety- Fire Safety
Standard documents: FSS01 Fire Escape Routes And Fire Exit Signs;
FSS02 Manual Call Points; FSS06 Final Exits; FSS07 Fire Control Doors;
FSS14 Notice Boards; FSS17 Disabled Refuge And Communication
- Comply with project requirements: Project Specific
• Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations and
manufacturer’s literature.
240
SIGNAGE SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
• Content: Signs including facing information, components, inserts, accessories
and fixings necessary to complete the system.
• Geometric shapes, colours and layout: To BS 5499-1.
- Font: Helvetica medium.
• Escape route: In accordance with BS 5499-4 and BS ISO 16069
• Safety meaning: In accordance with BS 5499-5.
• Water safety: In accordance with BS 5499-11.
290
SIGNAGE SAMPLES
• Sign type: Project Specific
- Action: Submit labelled samples.
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract or until
instructed to remove.
- Delivered products: To conform with labelled samples
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N17
PORTABLE FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEMS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210
DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the portable fire fighting system.
• The following company shall undertake the design and provision of Portable Fire
Fighting products: FPS (Fire Protection) Limited, BFF Business Park, Bathe
Road, Bridgewater, Somerset, TA6 4NZ. Tel: 01278 727460
• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and
manufacturers' literature.
EXECUTION
610
INSTALLING PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
• Mounting height above finished floor level: 1m to top of handle unless stated
otherwise by CA and/or UWE Health and Safety Unit
• Back-boards to be provided where substrate will not support weight of
extinguisher
650
INSTALLING FIRE BLANKETS
• Mounting height above finished floor level: In agreement with CA and/or UWE
Health and Safety Unit
COMPLETION
910
CLEANING
• Protective wrappings: Remove.
• Cleaning: Clean off and wipe down container finishes.
920
TESTING
• Testing will be undertaken by the contractor named in clause 210
930
TRAINING
• Training: Submit instruction manuals or supply other appropriate resources to
train the users of the building in the safe and appropriate use of the fire
extinguishers and fire blankets.
940
MAINTENANCE
• Servicing: Arrange the first annual service of the portable fire fighting systems.
• Maintenance standard: To BS 5603-0.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N91
EXTERNAL SIGNAGE AND INTERPRETATION
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
SYSTEM OUTLINE
110
PROPRIETARY SIGNAGE SYSTEM
• Project specific
120
BESPOKE SIGNAGE SYSTEM
• Project specific
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
200
WAY FINDING PRINCIPLES
• Design and installation to follow the way finding principles given in UWE Design
Guide for Buildings – Section 7 Way-finding Principles.
• Entrance Fixed Signs: As Section 7: Way-finding Principles 7.4.6
205
DESIGN OF SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
• Design: Complete detailed design and submit before commencing work.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations and
manufacturer's literature before commencing work
210
EXTERNAL SIGNAGE GENERALLY
• Signage systems generally: Complete to BS 559, including components, inserts,
accessories and fixings necessary to complete the system
• External signage: To BS 559 clause 6.3.
• Content: Signs including facing information, components, inserts, accessories
and fixings necessary to complete the system.
• Geometric shapes, colours and layout: To BS 8501 and ISO 7001.
• Wind loads: To BS 6399-2.
220
SAFETY SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS
• General: To relevant parts of BS 5499.
• Safety meaning: To BS 5499-5.
• Geometric shapes, colours and layout: To BS 5499-1 and BS 5378-2.
- Font: Helvetica medium.
• Water safety: To BS 5499-11
• Escape route: To BS ISO 16069.
225
ROAD TRAFFIC SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS
• Signage system design: Complete to BS 12899-1 and the Department for
Transport 'Traffic Signs Manual' Chapter 7.
• Wind loads: To BS 12899-2.
230
ACCESSIBILITY
• Design standard for disabled users: In accordance with BS 8300.
• Geometric shapes, colours and layout: To BS 5499-1 and BS 8501.
- Font Helvetica medium.
235
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ILLUMINATED SIGNS
• Electrical requirements for illumination: To BS 559 clause 6A and section 7.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N91
EXTERNAL SIGNAGE AND INTERPRETATION
PRODUCTS
305
SIGNAGE PRODUCTS GENERALLY
• Materials: To BS 559.
• Colorimetric and photometric properties: To BS 5378·2.
• Fabricated letters: To BS 559 clause 6.6.
• Fixings: To BS 559 clause 6.11 and section Z12.
310
POSTS FOR EXTERNAL SIGNS
• Project specific
315
POSTS FOR ROAD TRAFFIC SIGNS
• Standard: To BS 8442. Project specific
320
LOCKING MECHANISMS
• Standard: To BS EN 12209. Project specific
410
ALUMINIUM
• Project specific
• Standards: To relevant parts of BS EN 515 and BS EN 12020.
- -Mechanical properties of extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles: To BS EN
755-2.
- -Tolerances on dimensions and form of seamless tubes: To BS EN 755-7.
- -Profiles, tolerances on dimensions and form: To BS EN 755-9.
- -Structural members: In accordance with BS 8118-2.
- -Aluminium sheet: To BS EN 573-3.
• Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.
425
CARBON STEEL
• Project specific
• Standards: See 'National Structural Steelwork Specification'
- Designation and definitions of steels: To BS EN 10027-1 and BS EN 10079.
- Design of steel structures: To BS EN 1993 Eurocode 3.
440
GLAZING PLASTICS
• Project specific
• Standards: In accordance with relevant parts of BS 6262-4.
- Impact strength: To BS 5544 and BS 6206.
450
PLYWOOD
• Project specific
• General requirements: To BS EN 635-1.
• Certification: To BS EN 13986
455
STAINLESS STEEL
• Project specific
• Standards:
- Properties of stainless steels: To BS EN 10088-1.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N91
EXTERNAL SIGNAGE AND INTERPRETATION
FABRICATION
520
MONOLITH/ENTRANCE/WELCOME SIGN
• Refer to: UWE Design Guide for Buildings – Section 7: Way-Finding Principles.
525
POST-MOUNTED SIGN
• Refer to: UWE Design Guide for Buildings – Section 7: Way-Finding Principles.
550
FINGER POST
• Refer to: UWE Design Guide for Buildings – Section 7: Way-Finding Principles.
555
WAYMARKER POST/BOLLARD
• Refer to: UWE Design Guide for Buildings – Section 7: Way-Finding Principles.
565
PLAQUE/WALL-MOUNTED SIGN
• Refer to: UWE Design Guide for Buildings – Section 7: Way-Finding Principles.
580
EXTERNAL SIGN
• Refer to: UWE Design Guide for Buildings – Section 7: Way-Finding Principles.
EXECUTION / ERECTION / INSTALLATION
610
FIXING SIGNS GENERALLY
• Generally: Where not specified precisely, select methods of jointing and fixing
and types, sizes and spacings of fasteners In compliance with section Z20.
• Installation: To BS 559.
- Secure, plumb and level
• Strength of fasteners: Sufficient to support all live and dead loads.
• Fasteners and or adhesives: As section Z20.
• Fasteners for external signs: Corrosion resistant material or with a corrosion
resistant finish. Isolate dissimilar metals to avoid electrolytic corrosion.
• Fixings showing on surface of sign: Must not detract from the message being
displayed.
• Temporary support: Do not subject members to non-design loadings.
• Protection of users:
- Fasteners for signs must not have sharp edges or protrusions that would
cause injury to users.
- Fasteners for tactile/Braille signs must not have protrusions that would
cause confusion to users.
615
BUILDING SIGNS INTO EXISTING STRUCTURES
• Components being built in: Accurately position and support securely. Set In
mortar and point neatly to match adjacent material.
• Temporary support: Maintain for 48 hours (minimum) and prevent disturbance.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N91
EXTERNAL SIGNAGE AND INTERPRETATION
620
FIXING ROAD SIGNS
• Protrusion of post top above sign: Not permitted unless supporting a luminaire.
• Drilling of components:
- Ferrous components: Drilled before the application of any finish.
- Plastics sheeting: Apply clear lacquer recommended by plastics sheet
manufacturer to edges of holes to prevent ingress of moisture damaging the
lamination.
• Erection: In accordance with the OFT Traffic Signs Manual: Chapter 1.
• Fixing: Austenitic stainless steel fasteners recommended for the purpose by the
sign manufacturer.
625
FIXING SIGN POSTS INTO CONCRETE
• Concrete: To BS 8500-2.
• Mix: Designated concrete not less than GEN 1 or standard prescribed concrete
not less than ST2.
- Admixtures: Submit proposals.
- Prohibited: Calcium chloride and admixtures containing calcium chloride
• Depth of foundations, bedding, haunching: Appropriate to provide adequate
support and to receive overlying soft landscape or paving finishes.
• Type: Project Specific
• Size: Project Specific
• Other requirements: Project Specific
• Foundation holes: Neat vertical sides.
• Components: Accurately positioned and securely supported.
• Concrete fill: Compact as filling proceeds.
• Concrete foundations exposed to view: Compact until air bubbles cease to
appear on the upper surface, then weather to shed water and trowel smooth.
• Temporary support: Maintain undisturbed for minimum 48 hours.
665
MAKING GOOD GALVANIZED SURFACES
• Minor damage in areas up to 40 mm2 (including on fixings and fittings): Make
good.
- Material: Low melting point zinc alloy repair rods or powders made for this
purpose or at least two coats of zinc-rich paint to BS 4652.
- Thickness: Sufficient to provide a zinc coating at least equal to the original
layer.
675
ELECTRICAL AND DATA SERVICES
• Services connection required: Project Specific
• Coordinate with services trades.
COMPLETION
905
INSPECTION OF SIGNS
• Maintenance inspection: Check and tighten fixings 6-8 weeks after completion
of structure.
• Access: Provide access for inspection and maintenance of luminaires and other
technologies.
910
TESTING OF SIGNS AND STRUCTURES
• Standard for testing timber structures: In accordance with BS 5268-2, section 8.
• Product testing standard for road traffic signs: To BS 8408 and BS 8442.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
N91
EXTERNAL SIGNAGE AND INTERPRETATION
920
DOCUMENTATION
• Submit: Within O&M Manual
- Copies of structural design calculations / test reports.
- General product information, installation information.
- Inspection and maintenance reports.
- Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
- Guarantees, warranties, test certificates, record schedules and log books.
• Number of copies: 2
• Submission: Hard & Electronic
925
SPARE PARTS & SPECIALIST TOOLS
• Supply as follows: Project Specific
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P10
SUNDRY INSULATION / PROOFING WORK / FIRE STOPS
To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.
120
MINERAL WOOL INSULATION LAID BETWEEN CEILING TIES/ JOISTS
• Material: Mineral wool mats to BS 5803-1, Kitemark certified.
• Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY. Tel: 01656 862
621. Fax: 0871 222, 1784. Email: [email protected] Web: www.rockwool.co.uk
(or equal approved).
- Product reference: Rockwool Rolls. Kite Mark licence No.6661.
• Thickness: 300 (or project specific) mm.
• Installation: To BS 5803-5.
• Installation requirements:
- Joints: Closely butted, no gaps.
- Extent of insulation: Over wall plates.
- Service holes: Sealed, and debris removed before laying insulation.
- Eaves ventilation: Unobstructed.
- Electric cables overlaid by insulation: Sized accordingly.
- Water cistern platforms: No insulation underneath.
170
LOFT ACCESS HATCHES
• Insulation: Mineral wool mat.
- Thickness: Same as loft insulation.
- Laying: Cut to fit, with no gaps and securely fixed.
• Edges of hatch: Sealed with an approved compressible draught excluder.
210
INSULATION FITTED BETWEEN STUDS
• Material: mineral wool batts. .
• Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY. Tel: 01656 862
621. Fax: 0871 222, 1784. Email: [email protected] Web: www.rockwool.co.uk
(or equal approved).
- Product reference: Rockwool Acoustic Partition Slab.
• Thickness: 67 mm.
• Installation requirements:
- Joints: Closely butted, no gaps.
- Fasteners: Used to prevent slumping/ displacement.
432
MINERAL WOOL SLAB CAVITY BARRIERS/ FIRE STOPS
• Cavity width: (project specific) mm.
• Fire resistance to BS 476-20 (integrity/ insulation): 60 minutes.
• Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY. Tel: 01656 862
621. Fax: 0871 222, 1784. Email: [email protected] Web: www.rockwool.co.uk
(or equal approved).
- Product reference: Rockwool Firepro SP 60 Firestop Slab.
• Thickness: 75 mm.
• Installation requirements:
- Installed: With continuity and minimum joints.
- Fasteners: J450 galvanized steel brackets at 500 mm centres. All installed as
per manufacturer's instructions .
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P10
SUNDRY INSULATION / PROOFING WORK / FIRE STOPS
•
440
Other requirements:
FIRE STOPPING
• Imperfections of fit between building elements that are required to have fire
resistance and/ or resist the passage of smoke: Seal.
• Gaps: Tightly packed gaps with sealing material: Rockwool Firepro Acoustic
Intumescent Sealant. Colour: White.
• Backing material (where required): Rockwool Firepro Fire and Acoustic Foam. /
Rockwool Linear Firestop 2.
• Manufacturer: Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY. Tel: 01656 862
621. Fax: 0871 222, 1784. Email: [email protected] Web: www.rockwool.co.uk
(or equal approved).
• Seal type: Single seal. / Dual seal.
• Installation: All surfaces must be thoroughly clean and free of bond breaking
contaminants prior to application of the sealant. No priming is required for most
construction substrates; test small area first if doubtful. Do not apply sealant if the
ambient temperature is below 5°C as adhesion will be impaired.
• Using a standard sealant gun, apply sealant to joint, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
• Allow to cure before overpainting, if required.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P20
UNFRAMED ISOLATED TRIMS / SKIRTINGS / SUNDRY ITEMS
UNFRAMED ISOLATED TRIMS / SKIRTINGS / SUNDRY ITEMS
To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.
109
TIMBER PROCUREMENT
• Timber and wood products should be sourced from forest areas certified under a
credible timber certification schemes (such as FSC, ISO 14001, PEFC) which are
based on publicly available forestry standards drawn up in a fully participatory,
transparent and objective manner and backed by independent auditing.
• Where independently certified timber is not available, the timber should be procured
from a supplier that has adopted a formal Environmental Purchasing Policy (e.g.
Forests Forever Policy or WWF 95+ Group) and can provide evidence of
commitment to that policy.
110A
HARDWOOD SKIRTINGS AND ARCHITRAVES
• Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186:Part 3.
• Species: American light Oak
• Class: 1
• Moisture content at time of fixing: 8 to 12%
• Profile: Skirting :- Chamfered.
• Size: 25 x 125 mm
• Fixing: Screwed and peleted at 600mm centres.(where the skirting is adjacent to
the timber effect floor the skirting must be fixed after the flooring has been
installed.)
• Profile: Architraves :- Chamfered.
• Size: 19 x 45 mm
• Fixing: Screwed and peleted at 450mm centres.
• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.
110B
SOFTWOOD SKIRTINGS AND ARCHITRAVES
• Quality of timber and fixing: To BS 1186:Part 3.
• Species: Douglas Fir or equal approved
• Class: 2
• Moisture content at time of fixing: 8 to 12%
• Profile: Skirting: Chamfered.
• Size: 19 x 100high mm
• Fixing: Screwed at 600mm centres.
• Profile: Architraves: Chamfered.
• Size: 19 x 45 mm
• Fixing: at 450mm centres.
110C
PLASTIC SKIRTING
• See M50.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P20
UNFRAMED ISOLATED TRIMS / SKIRTINGS / SUNDRY ITEMS
510
INSTALLATION GENERALLY
• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.
• Metal workmanship: As section Z11.
• Methods of fixing and fasteners: Unless specified as section Z20.
• Straight runs: To be in one piece, or in long lengths with as few joints as possible.
• Running joints: Location and method of forming to be agreed where not detailed.
• Joints at angles: Mitre unless shown otherwise.
• Position and level: To be agreed where not detailed.
• 196 P20
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
110
QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS
• Quantities and locations of ironmongery are in the ironmongery schedule
• Fixing: As sections L10 and L20.
GENERAL
120
IRONMONGERY RANGE
• Source: Generally from single coordinated range (Note: Exception of Lever
Handles – See P21.610B-D)
• Notification: Submit details of selected range, manufacturer and / or supplier.
• Principal material / finish: Satin
• Items unavailable within selected range: Submit proposals.
140
SAMPLES
• General: Before placing orders with suppliers submit labelled samples of the
following: Project Specific
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract. Ensure
conformity of ironmongery as delivered with labelled samples.
170
IRONMONGERY FOR FIRE DOORS
• Relevant products: Ironmongery fixed to, or morticed into, the component parts
of a fire resisting door assembly.
• Compliance: Ironmongery included in successful tests to BS 476-22 or BS EN
1634-1 on door assemblies similar to those proposed.
- Certification: Submit evidence of successful testing by UKAS accredited
laboratory
• Melting point of components (except decorative non functional parts): 800˚C
minimum.
180
CATEGORY OF DUTY FOR DOOR IRONMONGERY
• Standard: To DD 171.
- Category of duty of doors: Heavy Duty
• General: Durability of ironmongery components to be compatible with stated
category of duty of each door leaf.
- Exclusions: Ironmongery with specific duty or 'category of use' defined
elsewhere.
• Documentation: Before placing orders with suppliers submit documentation
showing product compliance with stated category of duty.
DOOR HANGING DEVICES
320
DOOR HINGES
• Type: Square Corner Butt Hinges
• Grade 13 Exceed BS EN 1935
• Size: 102 x 76mm
• Material / finish: Satin Stainless Steel
• Other requirements: Intumescent packs to fire / smoke control doors
321
DOOR HINGES – RISING BUTT HINGES
• Type: Rising Butt Hinges ‘soft closing action’
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
•
•
•
Clockwise or Anti-clockwise to suit swing
Grade 304
Material / finish: Satin Stainless Steel
DOOR OPERATING DEVICES
410A
OVERHEAD DOOR CLOSERS - GENERALLY
• Standard: To BS EN 1154.
- Door closing devices to fire / smoke control doors: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Briton
- Product reference: 1110
• Type: Face Fixed
• Power size: Fixed power sizes 3
• Casing finish: Satin Stainless Steel
• Operational adjustment:
- Variable power: Matched to size, weight and location of doors.
- Latched doors: Override latches and / or door seals when fitted.
- Unlatched doors: Hold shut under normal working conditions.
- Closing against smoke seals of fire doors: Positive. No gaps.
410B
OVERHEAD DOOR CLOSERS – HIGH TRAFFIC LOCATIONS
• Standard: To BS EN 1154.
- Door closing devices to fire / smoke control doors: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Briton,
- Product reference: 2003
• Type: Face Fixed
• Power size: Power sizes 2-4
• Casing finish: Satin Stainless Steel
• Operational adjustment:
- Variable power: Matched to size, weight and location of doors.
- Latched doors: Override latches and / or door seals when fitted.
- Unlatched doors: Hold shut under normal working conditions.
- Closing against smoke seals of fire doors: Positive. No gaps.
412
PERFORMANCE SPEC FOR OVERHEAD DOOR CLOSERS –
ELECTROMAGNETIC TO FIRE DOORS
• Standard: To BS EN 1154 and BS EN1155.
- Door closing devices to fire / smoke control doors: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Briton,
- Product reference: 996
• Minimum Classification Grades:
•
Category of use: 3
•
Durability:
•
Door closer power size: Appropriate to Door Weight
•
Suitability for use on fire / smoke doors
•
Safety: 1
• Type: Face Fixed
• Casing finish: Satin Stainless Steel
• Operational adjustment:
- Hold open in normal working conditions.
- Closing against smoke seals of fire doors: Positive. No gaps.
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
417
LOW ENERGY SWING DOOR OPERATOR
• Standard: To BS EN 1154.
- Electrically powered door operating device
• Manufacturer: Dorma
- Product reference: ED100
• Electrical supply – 240v AC mains
- Location: adjacent to each unit
• Type: Face Fixed
• Casing finish: Silver anodised
• Activation: Push pad or swipe/proximity card according to location
• Operational adjustment:
- Variable power: Matched to size, weight and location of doors.
- Latched doors: Override latches and / or door seals when fitted.
- Unlatched doors: Hold shut under normal working conditions.
- Closing against smoke seals of fire doors: Positive. No gaps.
471
ELECTROMAGNETIC HOLD OPEN / SWING-FREE DEVICES
• Standard: to BS EN 1155.
- Electromagnetic devices to fire / smoke control doors: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Honeywell - Gent
- Product reference: 04390-31
• Type: Magnetic Door Holder
• Electric supply: 24V dc
• Location: Wall Mounted
• Means of release: Alarm system and / or failure of power supply.
• Test switch: Located in a convenient position adjacent to door
DOOR SECURING DEVICES
510
THIEF RESISTANT DOOR CYLINDER LOCK
• Manufacturer: Kaba
• Address: PO Box 2, Tiverton, Devon, EX16 6YT
• To be supplied by UWE Facilities for installation
• Type: Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round Profile.
512
THIEF RESISTANT DOOR CYLINDER LOCK & THUMBTURN
• Manufacturer: Kaba
• Address: PO Box 2, Tiverton, Devon, EX16 6YT
• To be supplied by UWE Facilities for installation
• Type: Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round Profile
515
DOOR LOCKS - ROLLERBOLT NIGHTLATCH
• Manufacturer: Yale
- Product reference: 630081001729
• Location: Student Accommodation; Carroll Court and Glenside.
• Keying: Cylinders to be supplied by UWE for installation
530
SPECIAL FUNCTION DOOR LOCKS – MAGNETIC DOOR LOCK
• Manufacturer: Refer to Electrical specification
- Product reference: Refer to Electrical specification
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
540
DOOR LATCHES - SASH
• Standard: To BS EN 12209.
• Manufacturer: Imperial Locks
• Address: Wednesfield Rd, Willenhall, West Midlands, WV13 1AL
- Product reference: G7000 Y7000, Striker Plate Type A
• Type: Sash Lock
• Locking System: 22mm round Profile as per Kaba 20.
• Lockset: 76mm
• Backset: 57mm
• Latch spring strength: Sprung to suit sprung lever furniture.
542
DOOR LATCHES – TUBULAR LATCH
• Standard: To BS EN 12209.
• Manufacturer: Imperial Locks
• Address: Wednesfield Rd, Willenhall, West Midlands, WV13 1AL
- Product reference: G4060
• Type: Heavy Duty Tubular Mortice Latch
• Lockset: 80mm
• Backset: 60mm
• Latch spring strength: Sprung to suit sprung lever furniture.
546
DOOR CYLINDER MORTICE DEADLOCK
• Standard: To BS 3621.
• Manufacturer: Imperial Locks
• Address: Wednesfield Rd, Willenhall, West Midlands, WV13 1AL
- Product reference: G7034
• Type: Deadbolt
• Lockset: 76mm
• Backset: 57mm
• Striker Plate: Box, Type M.
565
PADLOCKS
• To be provided by UWE Facilities
571
EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES – RIM LATCH
• Standard: To BS EN 179.
- Emergency exit devices for locked doors on escape routes: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Ingersol Rand
- Product reference: Briton 1438 Reversible push rim latch
• Type: Push Pad
• Additional Information: Not to be used in areas open to the public
573
EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES – MORTICE NIGHT LATCH
• Standard: To BS EN 179.
- Emergency exit devices for locked doors on escape routes: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Ingersol Rand
- Product reference: Briton 389.N Push pad mortice nightlatch
• Type: Push Pad
• Additional Information: Not to be used in areas open to the public
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
582
DOOR BOLTS – FLUSHBOLTS
• Type: Lever Action
• Size: 200mm
• Material / finish: ESS
• Additional requirements: Square ended
DOOR FURNITURE
610A
LEVER HANDLES - Sprung lever on round rose
• Manufacturer: Orbis Commercial Range (OR EQUAL APPROVED)
- Product reference: ID 254 801.22FRS
• Style: Round bar ‘return to door’ , prefixed to concealed fixing rose
• Material / finish: SA
• Mounting: Bolt through fixing
• Standard: To BS EN 1906 – grade 4 (highest grade)
• Compliant with BS8300 dimensional requirements
• Location: To new internal doors
610B
LEVER HANDLES - Accessible toilet lock
• Standard: To BS EN 1906
• Manufacturer: JEFLOCK Ltd. PO Box 2134 Bristol BS99 5YL Tel 0870 243
0686 Fax. 0870 243 0687
- Product reference: Jeflock
• Style to Match Surroundings: Corridor face - Satin Stainless Steel / Internal face
– 18 Dark Grey; RAL 7043
• Mounting: Bolt through fixing
610C
LEVER HANDLES - Sprung long plate latch furniture
• Standard: To BS EN 1906
• Manufacturer: Hoppe
- Product reference: ID 2655959
• Style: Paris Range 138S/267U
• Mounting: Bolt through fixing
• Location: To existing internal doors
610D
LEVER HANDLES - Sprung Kaba 22 profile lock
• Standard: To BS EN 1906
• Manufacturer: Hoppe
- Product reference: ID 2655967
• Style: Paris Range 138S/267U
• Mounting: Bolt through fixing
• Location: To existing internal doors
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
651A
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION FOR PULL HANDLES - GENERALLY
• Standard to BS 8424
• Minimum classification grades:
• - Category of use: Heavy Duty
• Suitability for use on fire/smoke doors: Grade 1
• Shape: Straight Bar
• Diameter: 22mm diameter
• Distance between centres: 300mm
• Material / finish: SAA
• Mounting: Bolt through fixing
651B
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION FOR PULL HANDLES – CORRIDORS/HIGH
TRAFFIC
• Standard to BS 8424
• Minimum classification grades:
- Category of use: Heavy Duty
• Suitability for use on fire/smoke doors: Grade 1
• Shape: Straight Bar
• Diameter: 22mm diameter
• Distance between centres: 450mm
• Material / finish: SAA
• Mounting: Bolt through fixing
670A
PUSH PLATES - GENERALLY
• Manufacturer: To match pull handles
• Product reference: To match pull handles
• Size: 350mm
• Material / finish: Satin Stainless Steel
• Mounting: Screw fixings
• Additional requirements: Radius Corners
670B
PUSH PLATES – CORRIDORS/HIGH TRAFFIC
• Manufacturer: To match pull handles
• Product reference: To match pull handles
• Size: 500mm
• Material / finish: Satin Stainless Steel
• Mounting: Screw fixings
• Additional requirements: Radius Corners
690A
KICK PLATES
• Manufacturer: To match push plates
• Product reference: To match push plates
- Size: 200mm high x 1.5thk to suit width of doors
• Mounting: Screw fixings
690B
KICK PLATES
• Manufacturer: To match push plates
• Product reference: To match push plates
- Size: 400mm high x 1.5thk to suit width of doors
• Mounting: Screw fixings
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
710
713
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
ESCUTCHEONS
• Material / finish: SAA
• Keyhole type: Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round Profile
• Fixing; Single screw fixed directly into lower cylinder profile.
•
FINGER GUARD
• Manufacturer: Astroflame (Fire Seals) Ltd (OR EQUAL APPROVED)
• Unit 8, The IO Centre, Stephenson Road, Segensworth, Fareham, PO15 5RU.
Tel: 0800 0232482
• Product reference: Astro Finger Defender
• Material/Finish: Silver Anodised
• Mounting: Screw fixings
920
IRONMONGERY PACKAGES
INTERNAL DOORS
Door Type
Door
Location
Ref
Ironmongery
Ironmongery Type
Set Ref
Single / Un-Glazed
A
General
01
Non-Locking
Single / Un-Glazed
A
General
02a / 02b / 2c
Single / Un-Glazed
A
General
03a / 03b
Single / Glazed - Narrow
D
General
04
Non-Locking
Single / Glazed - Narrow
D
General
05
Locking
Single / Glazed - Narrow
D
General
06a
Swipe Access Control
Single / Glazed - Narrow
D
General
06b
Swipe Access Control
Locking
Swipe Access Control
& Locking
Leaf & Half / Unglazed
B
General
07
Locking
Leaf & Half / Glazed
E
General
07
Locking
Leaf & Half / Glazed
E
General
08
Swipe Access Control
Double / Un-Glazed
C
General
10
Locking
Double / Glazed - Narrow
F
General
09
Non-Locking
Double / Glazed - Narrow
F
General
10
Locking
Double / Glazed - Narrow
F
General
11
Access Control
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
UWE STANDARD IRONMONGERY SETS
Set 01a - General – Single / Un-Glazed / Non-Locking
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Orbis Commercial Range; Lever on Round Rose Ø 22mm; as
P21.610A.
Tubular Latch:
Imperial Locks; as P21.542
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Set 01b - General – Single / Un-Glazed / Non-Locking – WC etc.
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Not Required.
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Radius; 500 x 100; SAA
Pull Handle:
22mm x 450mm bolt through fixing; SAA
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
Set 02a - General –Single / Un-Glazed / Locking
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Orbis Commercial Range; Lever on Round Rose Ø 22mm; as
P21.610A.
Sash Lock:
Imperial Locks as P21.540
Cylinder Lock:
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round Profile;
Supplied by UWE.
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Set 02b - General –Single / Un-Glazed / Locking
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Not Required
Mortice Deadlock:
Imperial Locks as P21.546
Cylinder Lock:
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round Profile;
Supplied by UWE.
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; both sides; as P21.690
Push Plates:
350 x 100; SAA; both sides; as P21.670A
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Set 02c – Accessible WC - General -Single/Un-Glazed/Locking
Hinges:
Rising Butt Hinges; ‘Soft Closing Action’; 1 pair per leaf; as
P21.321
WC Locks:
Jeflock Disabled Bathroom Lockset; as P21.610B
Kick Plates:
400h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Pull Handles:
Not Applicable
Part M Pack
As N13.311
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Set 03a - General – Single / Un-Glazed / Locking &Swipe Access Control
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Orbis Commercial Range; Lever on Round Rose Ø 22mm; as
P21.610A.
Tubular Latch:
Imperial Locks; as P21.542
Cylinder Lock
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round
Profile; Supplied by UWE; as P21.510 / P21.512
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Swipe Access Control:
Access control kit as per electrical specification
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Set 03b - General – Single / Glazed / Swipe Access Control
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Orbis Commercial Range; Lever on Round Rose Ø 22mm
Tubular Latch:
Imperial Locks; as P21.542
Cylinder Lock
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round
Profile; Supplied by UWE; as P21.510 / P21.512
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Access Control:
Access control kit as per electrical specification
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Set 04 - General Door – Single / Glazed / Non-Locking
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Orbis Commercial Range; Lever on Round Rose Ø 22mm; as
P21.610A.
Tubular Latch:
Imperial Locks; as P21.542
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slatz System as N14
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
Door Closers & Operators::
As required
Set 05 - General Door – Single / Glazed / Locking
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Orbis Commercial Range; Lever on Round Rose Ø 22mm; as
P21.610A.
Sash Lock:
Imperial Locks as P21.540
Cylinder Lock
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round Profile;
Supplied by UWE; as P21.510 / P21.512
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slatz System as N14
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Set 06a - General – Single / Glazed /Swipe Access Control
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Orbis Commercial Range; Lever on Round Rose Ø 22mm; as
P21.610A.
Tubular Latch:
Imperial Locks; as P21.542
Access Control:
Access control kit as per electrical specification
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
Set 06b - General – Single / Glazed /Swipe Access Control & Locking
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Lever Handle:
Orbis Commercial Range; Lever on Round Rose Ø 22mm; as
P21.610A.
Sash Lock:
Imperial Locks as P21.540
Cylinder Lock
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round Profile;
Supplied by UWE; as P21.510 / P21.512
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Access Control:
Access control kit as per electrical specification
Kick Plates:
200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; one side; as P21.690
Push Plates:
Not Applicable
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Set 07 - General - Leaf & Half / Locking / Glazed
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Mortice Cylinder Deadlock:
Imperial Locks as P21.546
Cylinder Lock
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round
Profile; Supplied by UWE; as P21.510 / P21.512
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Flushbolt & Sockets:
Lever Action; 200mm; SS; Fixed to leading edge; top & bottom
Kick Plates:
Both leafs; 200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door ; to one side only
Push Plates:
Both leafs; Radius; 500 x 100; SAA
Pull Handle:
22mm x 450mm bolt through fixing; SAA; to one side only
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
Set 08 - General - Leaf & Half / Glazed / Swipe Access Control &Locking
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Tubular Latch:
Imperial Locks; as P21.542
Cylinder Lock
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round
Profile; Supplied by UWE; as P21.510 / P21.512
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Access Control
Access control kit as per electrical specification
Flushbolt & Sockets:
Lever Action; 200mm; SS; Fixed to leading edge; top & bottom
Kick Plates:
Both Leafs; 200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; to one side only
Push Plates:
Both leafs; radius; 500 x 100; SAA
Pull Handle:
22mm x 450mm bolt through fixing; SAA; to one side only
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Set 09 - General -Double/Non-Locking/Glazed
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Kick Plates:
Both Leafs; 200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; to one side only
Push Plates:
Both leafs; radius; 500 x 100; SAA
Pull Handles:
Both leafs; 22mm x 450mm bolt through fixing; SAA
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers &
Electromagnetic Holders
As required
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
Set 10 - General -Double/Locking/Glazed or Un-Glazed
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Mortice Dead Lock:
Imperial Locks as P21.546
Cylinder Lock
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round
Profile; Supplied by UWE; as P21.510 / P21.512
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Flushbolt & Sockets:
Lever Action; 200mm; SS; Fixed to leading edge; top & bottom
Kick Plates:
Both Leafs; 200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; to one side only
Push Plates:
Both leafs; radius; 500 x 100; SAA
Pull Handle:
Both leafs; 22mm x 450mm bolt through fixing; SAA
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14 – If required
Door Closers & Operators:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers &
Electromagnetic Holders
As required
Set 11 - General -Double/ Glazed / Access Control & Locking
Hinges:
Square corner Butt Hinges; 1½ pairs per leaf; as P21.320
Mortice Dead Lock:
Imperial Locks as P21.546
Cylinder Lock
Kaba 20 High Security Locking System in a 22mm round
Profile; Supplied by UWE; as P21.510 / P21.512
Escutcheons
Kaba; as P21.710
Access Control
Access control kit as per electrical specification
Flushbolt & Sockets:
Lever Action; 200mm; SS; Fixed to leading edge; top & bottom
Kick Plates:
Both Leafs; 200h x 1.5thk to suit width of door; to one side only
Push Plates:
Both leafs; radius; 500 x 100; SAA
Pull Handles:
Both leafs; 22mm x 450mm bolt through fixing; SAA
Room Name Plate:
Spandex Slat System as N14
Door Closers:
As required
Accessories for Fire Doors:
Intumescent pack for FD30:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Intumescent pack for FD60:
To include for - Hinge, Lock & Door Closer Protection
Symbols:
76mm Circular Architectural Signs; with face fixing screws;
wording to suit location
Overhead Door Closers:
As required
Issue:01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
P21
Issue:01
DOOR / WINDOW IRONMONGERY
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Q24
INTERLOCKING BRICK / BLOCK ROADS / PAVINGS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
TYPES OF PAVING
110A
CONCRETE BLOCK PAVING (PROJECT SPECIFIC)
• Granular sub-base: As clause D20/617.
- Thickness: (project specific) mm.
• Bedding: As clause 455, compacted as recommended by block/ paver
manufacturer.
- Nominal thickness after compaction: 50 mm.
• Blocks: To BS EN 1338:
- Manufacturer: (project specific). Product reference: (project specific).
- Sizes: (project specific).
- Special blocks: (project specific).
- Colour / Finish: (project specific).
• Jointing material: In accordance with BS 7533-3. Joint width 2-5mm. Dry sand
as clause 510.
• Setting out:
- Bond: (project specific).
- Features: (project specific).
LAYING
211
COLOUR BANDING
• General: Unless premixed by manufacturer, select blocks / pavers / setts
vertically from at least 3 separate packs in rotation, to avoid colour banding.
260
LEVELS OF PAVING
• Permissible deviation from specified levels:
- Generally: ± 6 mm.
• Height of finished paving above features:
- At drainage channels and kerbs: +3 to +6 mm.
360
CONDITION OF SUB·BASES / BASES BEFORE LAYING SAND BEDDING
COURSE
• Granular surfaces:
- Sound, clean, smooth and close-textured enough to prevent migration of
sand bedding into the sub-base / overlay during compaction and use.
- Free from movement under compaction plant and free from compaction
ridges, cracks and loose material.
• Prepared existing and new bound bases (roadbases): Sound, clean, free from
rutting or major cracking and cleared of sharp stones, projections or debris.
• Bound base (roadbase) surface tolerance: +0 to -12 mm.
• Levels and falls: Accurate and within specified tolerances.
• Drainage outlets: Within +0 to -10 mm of required finished level.
• Edge restraints, manhole covers, drainage outlets and the like: Complete, to
required levels, and adequately bedded and haunched in mortar that has
reached sufficient strength.
• Haunching to gullies, manhole covers and inside face of edge restraints:
Vertical, so that pavings do not 'ride up' when compacted.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Q24
INTERLOCKING BRICK / BLOCK ROADS / PAVINGS
455
SAND FOR BEDDING
• Type: Naturally occurring clean sharp sand from the quaternary geological
series or sea dredged, graded to BS 7533-3, Annex D, Category III.
• Purity: Free from deleterious salts, contaminants and cement.
• Procurement: Obtain from one source and ensure consistent grading.
• Moisture content: Maintain even moisture content that will give maximum
compaction. Sand squeezed in the hand should show no free water and bind
together when pressure is released.
460
GRANULAR MATERIAL FOR PERMEABLE PAVING BEDDING COURSE
• Granular materials: 5mm nominal single size stone aggregate to BS 882.
• Purity: Free from deleterious salts, contaminants and cement.
• Procurement: Obtain from one source and ensure consistent grading.
465
LAYING BEDDING GENERALLY
• Site trial: Determine by trial the depth of loose bedding material needed to
ensure specified bedding course thickness after final compaction of paving.
• Bedding materials: Do not deliver to working area over uncompacted paving.
• Bedding course prepared area: 1m (minimum) to 3m (maximum) in advance of
laying face, and 1m (maximum) at end of working period.
• Protection of prepared bedding course: Do not allow traffic or leave exposed.
Fill, re-screed and re-compact areas disturbed by removal of screed rails or
trafficking. Lay blocks / pavers / setts immediately.
485
LAYING BLOCKS / PAVERS / SETTS
• General: Commence from an edge restraint. Vibrate to produce thoroughly
interlocked paving of even overall appearance with regular joints and accurate
to line, level and profile.
• Bedding of units: Firm, so that rocking or subsidence does not occur or develop.
• Working face: Lay blocks / pavers / setts hand tight. Maintain open noncastellated working face. Do not use mechanical force to obtain tight joints.
• Joint width: 2-5mm.
• Placing: Squarely with minimum disturbance to bedding.
• Supply to laying face: Deliver over newly laid paving but stack at least 1m back
from laying face. Do not allow plant to traverse areas of un-compacted paving.
• Alignment: Continually check with string lines as work proceeds to ensure
maintenance of accurate bond.
• Infill at edge restraints: Complete as work proceeds. Cut units accurately and
maintain specified joint width. Avoid very small infill pieces at edges by breaking
bond on the next course in from the edge, using cut blocks / pavers / setts not
less than 1/3 full size.
• Cut edges: Turn inwards: do not position against edge restraints or other
features.
• In situ mortar infill: 1:3 cement:sand as section Z21, coloured to match pavers,
in areas up to 40 x 40 mm.
495
OBSTRUCTIONS
• Cutting: After laying full paving units, trim blocks / pavers / setts neatly around
drainage fittings and other obstructions. Cut units accurately and maintain joint
width within specified range. Do not reduce thickness of blocks / pavers / setts.
• In situ concrete surrounds:
- Locations: (project specific).
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Q24
INTERLOCKING BRICK / BLOCK ROADS / PAVINGS
-
Standard: To BS 5328, Grade C35 air entrained, maximum aggregate size
10mm.
Shape and size: Rectangular, 100mm (minimum) all round obstruction.
Thickness (minimum): Combined depth of blocks / pavers / setts and sand
bedding.
Colour: To match units.
500
CUTTING BLOCKS / PAVERS / SETTS
• General: Cleanly and accurately, without spalling.
- Do not mark or damage visible surfaces.
• Other requirements: Disc cutting equipment only with approval of CA and Risk
Assessment and Method Statement.
510
SAND FOR JOINTING
• Type: Clean free flowing dried silica sand graded to BS 7533-3, table D3.
- Do not use sand that will stain paving units.
• Purity: Free from deleterious salts, contaminants and cement.
515
JOINTING MATERIAL FOR PERMEABLE PAVING
• Washed aggregate.
520
COMPACTING AND JOINTING
• Timing:
- After edge restraint / kerb haunchings have matured.
- As laying proceeds, but after infilling at edges. Do not leave uncompacted
areas of paving at end of working periods.
• Compacting:
- Standard: To BS 7533-3, Annex F, site category III
- General: Thoroughly compact blocks / pavers / setts with vibrating plate
compactor to achieve specified bedding course thickness. Apply same
compacting effort throughout. Do not damage kerbs and adjacent work.
- Neoprene sole plate: Use for clay pavers.
• Areas not to be compacted:
- Within 1m of working face
- Within 1m of unrestrained edges.
• Surface levels: Check frequently. Lift and relay areas not at specified level.
• Jointing: Where jointing material is specified, brush into joints, re-vibrate surface
and repeat as necessary to completely fill joints.
• Timing: Brush sand into the joints and remove surplus before commencing any
compaction.
525
COMPACTING CLAY PAVERS
615
COMPLETION OF PAVING WITH SAND FILLED JOINTS
• Final compaction of the surface course: In accordance with BS 7533-3.
• Sand dressing: Not required.
• Vacuum cleaning machines: Do not use.
620
COMPLETION OF PERMEABLE PAVING
• Cleaning: Immediately before handover, thoroughly clean paving with vacuum
brush cleaning machine. Do not clean areas with sand filled joints.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
R12
DRAINAGE BELOW GROUND
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
THIS SECTION COVERS MINOR DRAINAGE REPAIRS AND ALTERATIONS /
ADDITIONS TO LOW RISE BUILDINGS ONLY
100
EXISTING DRAINS
• Setting out: Before starting work, check invert levels and positions of existing
drains, sewers, inspection chambers and manholes against drawings. Report
discrepancies.
• Protection: Protect existing drains to be retained and maintain normal operation.
TYPES OF PIPELINE
121
CLAY PIPELINES FOR FOUL / SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE GENERALLY
• Pipes, bends and junctions: Vitrified clay to BS EN 295-1, with flexible joints,
Kitemark certified.
• Manufacturer: Hepworth
• Product Reference: Project Specific.
• Type of subsoil: Project specific.
• Bedding class: Project specific.
• Warning marker tape: 150mm x 0.1mm.
• Colour / message: Red
EXCAVATING / BACKFILLING
202
PUBLIC ROADS AND PAVINGS
• Excavating and backfilling of trenches: To Stationery Office Code of Practice,
‘Specification for the Reinstatement of Openings in Highways’ and ‘Practical
Guide to Street Work’ - June 2006.
205
EXCAVATED MATERIAL
• Turf, topsoil, hardcore, etc: Set aside for use in reinstatement.
210
LOWER PART OF TRENCH - GENERAL
• Trench from bottom up to 300mm above crown of pipe: With vertical sides and
of a width as small as practicable but not less than external diameter of pipe
plus 300mm.
230
TYPE OF SUBSOIL
• General: Where type of subsoil at level of crown of pipe differs from that stated
for the type of pipeline, obtain instructions before proceeding.
240
FORMATION FOR BEDS
• Timing: Excavate to formation immediately before laying beds or pipes.
• Mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots: Remove. Replace with
consolidated bedding material.
• Local soft spots: Harden by tamping in bedding material.
• Inspection of excavated formations: Give notice.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
R12
DRAINAGE BELOW GROUND
270
BACKFILLING TO PIPELINES
• Backfilling from top of surround or protective cushion: Material excavated from
trench, compacted in layers 300mm (maximum) thick.
• Heavy compactors: Do not use before there is 600mm of material over pipes.
280
BACKFILLING UNDER ROADS AND PAVINGS
• Backfilling from top of surround or protective cushion up to formation level:
Granular Sub-base Material Type 1 to HA Specification for Highway Works,
Clause 803, laid and compacted in 150 mm layers.
BEDDING / JOINTING
310
INSTALLATION GENERALLY
• Pipes and fittings: From same manufacturer for each pipeline.
• Jointing: Use recommended lubricants. Leave recommended gaps at ends of
spigots to allow for movement.
• Jointing differing pipes and fittings: With adaptors recommended by pipe
manufacturer.
• Laying pipes: To true line and regular gradient on even bed for full length of
barrel with sockets (if any) facing up the gradient.
• Protect from damage and ingress of debris. Seal all exposed ends during
construction.
• Timing: Minimize time between laying and testing. Backfill after successful initial
testing.
350A
CLASS F GRANULAR BED
• Location: External areas where depth of cover is greater than 600mm.
• Granular material to BS 882:
• Pipe size (DN) Nominal single size (mm)
• 100 & 150
10
• 225 & 300
10 or 20
• Bedding: Granular material, compacted over full width of trench:
- Thickness (minimum): 50mm for sleeve jointed pipes, 100mm for socket
jointed pipes. Where trench bottom is uneven due to hard spots or other
reason, increase thickness by 100mm.
• Pipes: Digging slightly into bed, resting uniformly on their barrels and adjusted
to line and gradient.
• Backfilling:
- Timing: Laid after successful initial testing.
- Material: Protective cushion of selected fill, free from vegetable matter,
rubbish, frozen soil and material retained on a 40 mm sieve.
- Depth: 150mm (250mm for adoptable sewers) above crown of pipe.
- Compaction: By hand in 100mm layers.
• When suitable site generated backfilling material is not available, use same
material as specified for bedding to a depth of 150mm above crown of pipe.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
R12
DRAINAGE BELOW GROUND
430A
CLASS W GRANULAR SURROUND FOR DEEP PIPES UNDER BUILDINGS
• Locations: Where crown of pipe is more than 300mm below underside of slab.
• Timing: Excavate trench after hardcore has been laid and compacted.
• Granular material to BS 882:
• Pipe size (DN) Nominal single size (mm)
• 100 & 150
10
• 225 & 300
10 or 20
• Granular bedding, compacted over full width of trench:
- Thickness (minimum): 100mm.
• Pipes: Digging slightly into bed, resting uniformly on their barrels and adjusted
to line and gradient.
• Granular surround:
- Timing: Laid after successful initial testing.
- Depth: To 100mm above crown of pipe.
- Compaction: By hand.
• Backfilling:
- Material: Hardcore or granular material.
- Depth: Up to slab formation.
- Compaction: In 300mm (maximum) thick layers.
451
CLASS Y CONCRETE SURROUND FOR SHALLOW PIPES UNDER BUILDINGS
• Locations: Where crown of pipe is less than 300mm below underside of slab.
• Timing: Excavate trench after hardcore has been laid and compacted.
• Concrete blinding (over full width of trench): Allow to set before laying pipes.
- Thickness: 25mm.
• Pipes:
- Temporary support: Folding wedges of compressible board. Prevent
flotation.
- Height above blinding (minimum): 100mm.
• Surround: Encase pipe in concrete of same mix as slab and cast integrally with
the slab.
• Extent of surround: To within 150mm of next nearest flexible joint.
461A
CLASS Z CONCRETE SURROUND
• Locations: External pipes where depth of cover is less than 600mm.
• Concrete blinding (over full width of trench): Allow to set before laying pipes.
- Thickness: 25mm.
• Temporary pipe support: Folding wedges of compressible board. Prevent
flotation.
• Surround, to full width of trench:
- Timing: After successful initial testing.
- Depth: To 150mm above crown of pipe or as shown on drawings.
- Vertical construction joints: At face of flexible pipe joints using 18mm thick
compressible board pre-cut to profile of pipe.
- Socketed pipes: Fill gaps between spigots and sockets with resilient material
to prevent entry of concrete.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
R12
DRAINAGE BELOW GROUND
470
PIPE RUNS NEAR FOUNDATIONS
• Class Z concrete surround: Provide in locations where bottom of trench is lower
than bottom of foundation. Measurements are horizontal clear distances
between nearest edges of foundations and pipe trenches.
• Trenches less than one metre from foundations: Top of concrete surround not
lower than bottom of foundation.
• Trenches more than one metre from foundations: Top of concrete surround not
lower than D mm below bottom of foundation, where D mm is horizontal
distance of trench from foundation, less 150mm.
512
PIPELINES PASSING THROUGH STRUCTURES
• Pipelines that must be cast in or fixed to structures (including manholes,
catchpits and inspection chambers): Provide short length (rocker) pipes near
each external face, with flexible joint at each end:
Pipe size (DN)
Distance to first joint
Short length (mm)
from structure (mm)
•
100 & 150
150
600
225
225
600
Pipelines that need not be cast in or fixed to structures (e.g. walls to footings):
Provide either:
- Short length (rocker) pipes as specified above, or
- Openings in the structures to give 50mm minimum clearance around the
pipeline. Closely fit a rigid sheet to each side of opening to prevent ingress
of fill or vermin.
520
BENDS AT BASE OF SOIL STACKS
• Type: Nominal 90° rest bend.
- Radius to centreline of pipe (minimum): 200mm.
• Height of invert of horizontal drain at base of stack below centreline of lowest
branch pipe (minimum): 450mm.
• Stabilizing bends: Bed in concrete without impairing flexibility of couplings.
525
DIRECT CONNECTION OF GROUND FLOOR WCS TO DRAINS
• Drop from crown of WC trap to invert of drain (maximum): 1.3m.
• Horizontal distance from the drop to a ventilated drain (maximum): 6m.
530
BACKDROP PIPES OUTSIDE MANHOLE WALLS
• General: Encase in concrete.
- Thickness (minimum): 150mm.
- Excavation beneath backdrop pipe and its surround: Replace with concrete.
570
FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
• Standard: To BS EN 295-4, WIS 04-41-01, or Agrément certified.
• Ends of pipes to be joined: Cleanly cut and square.
• Outer surfaces of pipes to be joined: Clean and smooth. Where necessary, e.g.
on concrete or iron pipes, smooth out mould lines and / or apply a cement grout
over the sealing area.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
R12
DRAINAGE BELOW GROUND
690
INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS
• Setting out Square with and tightly jointed to adjacent construction.
• Bedding and surrounds: Concrete, 150mm thick.
• Permissible deviation in level of gully gratings: +0 to -10mm.
• Exposed openings in fittings: Fit purpose made temporary caps. Protect from
site traffic.
725
LAYING WARNING MARKER TAPES
• Installation: During backfilling, lay continuously over pipelines.
• Depth: 300 – 400mm
• Pipelines deeper than 2m: lay an additional tape 600mm above the top of the
pipline.
MANHOLES / CHAMBERS / SOAKAWAYS / TANKS
740
PLASTICS INSPECTION CHAMBERS - NON-ROAD AREAS
• Standard: To BS 7158 or Agrément certified.
• Bedding: 100 mm granular material, 10mm single size to BS 882.
• Surround: Not required.
• Backfilling: Granular material to 100mm above crown of pipes, then selected as
dug material.
• Concrete collar.
• Access covers and seating: inclusive with chamber.
821
STEEL ACCESS COVERS AND SEATING
• Covers: Steel to BS EN 124, where applicable.
• Seating: Engineering bricks to BS 3921, Class B, laid in 1:3 cement: sand
mortar or precast concrete cover frame units, Type 1 or Type 2 to suit cover
shape.
• Bedding and haunching frame: Solidly in 1:3 cement:sand mortar over its whole
base area, centrally over opening, top level and square with joints in
surrounding finishes. Cut back top of haunching to 30 mm below top of surface
material.
861
CONNECTIONS TO SEWERS
• General: Connect new pipework to existing adopted sewers to the requirements
of the Adopting Authority or its agent.
CLEANING / TESTING / INSPECTION / COMPLETION
900
REMOVAL OF DEBRIS AND CLEANING
• Preparation: Before cleaning, final testing, CCTV inspection if specified and
immediately before handover, lift covers to manholes, inspection chambers and
access points. Remove wrappings, mortar droppings and any other debris.
• Cleaning: Thoroughly flush with water to remove silt and check for blockages.
Rod pipelines between access points if there is any indication that they may be
obstructed.
• Washings and detritus: Do not discharge into sewers or watercourses.
• Covers: Securely replace after cleaning and testing.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
R12
DRAINAGE BELOW GROUND
910
TESTING / INSPECTION
• Dates for inspection: Give notice.
• Records: Provide evidence of testing
• Attendance: Provide water, assistance and apparatus as required.
• Remedial work: Repair leaks & re-test..
920
WATER / AIR TESTING OF GRAVITY DRAINS AND PRIVATE SEWERS UP TO
DN 300
• Initial testing: To ensure that pipelines are sound and properly installed, air test
short lengths to BS 8301, clause 25.6.3 immediately after completion of bedding
/ surround.
• Final testing: For final checking and statutory authority approval, water test to
BS 8301, clause 25.6.2 all lengths of pipeline from terminals and connections to
manholes / chambers and between manholes / chambers.
925
WATER / AIR TESTING OF GRAVITY DRAINS AND PROVATE SEWERS UP TO
DN 300
• Air testing preparation and method: To BS 8301, clauses 25.6.3.1 and 25.6.3.2.
• Initial testing: To ensure that pipelines are sound and properly installed, air test
short lengths to BS EN 1610, clauses 13.1 and 13.2 immediately after
completion of bedding / surround.
• Final testing: For final checking and statutory authority approval, water test to
BS EN 1610, clause.
• 13.1 and 13.3 all lengths of pipeline from terminals and connections to
manholes / chambers and between manholes / chambers.
940
WATER TESTING OF MANHOLES / INSPECTION CHAMBERS
• Timing: Before backfilling.
• Standard:
- Exfiltration: To BS EN 1610, clause 13.3.
- Infiltration: No identifiable flow of water penetrating the chamber.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z10
PURPOSE MADE JOINERY
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
109
TIMBER PROCUREMENT
• The University recognise the importance of the choices we make in buying
products and the impacts on environmental and social aspects throughout the
world. Consequently it is UWE's policy to purchase only legal and sustainable or
recycled timber and timber products.
• UWE has adopted the UK Government Timber Procurement Policy as below:
• This policy requires that all timber and wood derived products procured originate
from:
- Legal and sustainable sources, or
- FLEGT licensed or equivalent sources
- Recycled products are equally accepted
110
FABRICATION
• Standard: To BS 1186-2.
• Sections: Accurate in profile and length, and free from twist and bowing. Formed
out of solid unless shown otherwise.
- Machined surfaces: Smooth and free from tearing, wooliness, chip bruising
and other machining defects.
• Joints: Tight and close fitting.
• Assembled components: Rigid. Free from distortion.
• Screws: Provide pilot holes.
- Screws of 8 gauge (4mm diameter) or more and screws into hardwood:
Provide clearance holes.
- Countersink screws: Heads sunk at least 2mm below surfaces visible in
completed work.
- Adhesives: Compatible with wood preservatives applied and end uses of
timber.
115
FINISHED COMPONENT
• The finished and installed component shall comply with BS EN 942:1996. The
table 1 class shall be J10. Finger jointing, edge jointing and laminating is not
permitted unless specific permission is given by the CA.
120
CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF TIMBER
• General: Dimensions on drawings are finished sizes.
• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes:
- Softwood sections: To BS EN 1313-1: Clause 6 for sawn sections. Clause
NA.2 for further processed sections.
- Hardwood sections; To BS EN 1313-2: Clause 6 for sawn sections. Clause
NA.3 for further processed sections.
130
PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD
• Cutting and machining: Completed as far as possible before treatment.
• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed,
planed, ploughed, etc.
• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and / or drilling: Treat as recommended by
main treatment solution manufacturer.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z10
PURPOSE MADE JOINERY
140
MOISTURE CONTENT
• Wood and wood based products: Maintained within range specified for the
component during manufacture and storage.
250
FINISHING
• Joinery surfaces: Smooth, even and suitable to receive finishes.
• Arrises: Eased unless shown otherwise on drawings.
• End grain in external components: Sealed with primer or sealer as section M60
and allowed to dry before assembly
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z12
PRESERVATIVE / FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.
110
TREATMENT APPLICATION
• Timing: After cutting and machining timber, and before assembling
components.
• Processor: Licensed by manufacturer of specified treatment solution.
• Certification: For each batch of timber provide a certificate of assurance that
treatment has been carried out as specified.
120
COMMODITY SPECIFICATIONS
• Standard: Current edition of the Wood Protection Association (WPA)
publication 'Industrial wood preservation specification and practice'.
130
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT SOLUTION STRENGTHS/ TREATMENT
CYCLES
• General: Select to achieve specified service life and to suit treatability of
specified wood species.
• Preservative treatment: Vacuum / pressure impregnated with Tanalith E, or
similar and sanctioned.
- Desired service life:
- 60 years for structural timber, unless specified otherwise.
- 30 years for other timber that is accessible for future replacement.
- Sawing, planing, etc:
• Do not machine treated timber unless it is returned to the preservative
processor for retreatment.
• Treat cuts, holes, etc with end grain preservative as recommended by the
processor.
• Fixings: Use fixings that are fully compatible with the preservative treatment
and as recommended by the processor for the particular circumstances,
including taking account of the item being fixed and the need for separation if
necessary.
• Assembly / use: Allow timbers to dry as recommended by processor. Do not
use fixings until moisture content of timber is as recommended by the
processor for the particular fixings.
• Certification: Provide confirmation of treatment and of suitability of fixings.
140
COPPER-ORGANIC PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
• Solution: Contractor selection to CA approval.
• Application: High pressure impregnation.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: Not more than 28%. After
treatment, allow timber to dry before using.
150
COPPER CHROMIUM BASED PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
• Not to be used.
160
ORGANIC SOLVENT PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
• Solution: Contractor selection to Architect’s approval.
• Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation, or immersion.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/
component at time of fixing. After treatment, timber to be surface dry before
use.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z12
PRESERVATIVE / FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
165
WATER BASED MICROEMULSION PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
• Solution: Contractor selection to Architect’s approval.
• Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/
component at time of fixing. After treatment, timber to be surface dry before
use.
167
BORON COMPOUND PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
• Solution: Contractor selection to Architect’s approval.
• Application: High pressure impregnation.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: Not more than 28%. After
treatment, allow timber to dry before using.
170
CREOSOTE PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
• Not to be used.
180
RECYCLED TIMBER CONTAINING CREOSOTE OR CHROMIUM/ ARSENIC
BASED PRESERVATIVE
• Not to be used
210
FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
• Solution type: See Finishes Schedule / work section specifications as
applicable.
• Application: Vacuum + pressure impregnation.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/
component at time of fixing. After treatment, timber to be re-dried slowly at
temperatures not exceeding 65°C to minimize distortion and degradation.
220
LEACH RESISTANT FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
• Solution: See section K13.
• Application: Vacuum + pressure impregnation.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/
component at time of fixing.
610
MAKING GOOD TO PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT ON SITE
• Preservative solution: Compatible with off-site treatment.
• Application: In accordance with preservative manufacturer’s
recommendations.
620
MAKING GOOD TO FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT ON SITE
• Fire retardant: Compatible with off-site treatment.
• Application: In accordance with fire retardant manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z20
FIXINGS AND ADHESIVES
To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.
PRODUCTS
310
FASTENERS GENERALLY
• Materials: To have:
- Bimetallic corrosion resistance appropriate to items being fixed.
- Atmospheric corrosion resistance appropriate to fixing location.
• Appearance: Submit samples on request.
320
PACKINGS
• Materials: Noncompressible, corrosion proof.
• Area of packings: Sufficient to transfer loads.
330
NAILED TIMBER FASTENERS
• Nails:
- Steel: To BS 1202-1 or BS EN 10230-1.
- Copper: To BS EN 1202-2.
- Aluminium: To BS 1202-3.
340
MASONRY FIXINGS
• Light duty: Plugs and screws.
• Heavy duty: Expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
350
PLUGS
• Type: Proprietary types to suit substrate, loads to be supported and conditions
expected in use.
360
ANCHORS
• Types:
- Expansion: For use in substrate strong enough to resist forces generated
by expansion of anchor.
- Adhesive or chemical:
- For use in substrate where expansion of anchor would fracture substrate.
- For use in irregular substrate where expansion anchors cannot transfer
load on anchor.
- Cavity: For use where the anchor is retained by toggles of the plug locking
onto the inside face of the cavity.
370
WOOD SCREWS
• Type:
- Wood screws (traditional pattern).
- Standard: To BS 1210.
- Wood screws.
- Pattern: Parallel, fully threaded shank or twin thread types.
• Washers and screw cups: Where required are to be of same material as
screw.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z20
FIXINGS AND ADHESIVES
380
MISCELLANEOUS SCREWS
• Type: To suit the fixing requirement of the components and substrate.
- Pattern: Self-tapping, metallic drive screws, or power driven screws.
• Washers and screw cups: Where required to be of same material as screw.
390
ADHESIVES GENERALLY
• Standards:
- Hot-setting phenolic and aminoplastic: To BS 1203.
- Thermosetting wood adhesives: To BS EN 12765.
- Thermoplastic adhesives: To BS EN 204.
410
POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS
• Powder actuated fixing tools: To BS 4078-2 and Kitemark certified.
Operatives: Trained and certified as competent by tool manufacturer.
• Types of fastener, accessories and consumables: As recommended by tool
manufacturer.
• Protective coatings to exposed fasteners used externally or in other locations
subject to dampness: Zinc rich primer to fastener heads.
EXECUTION
610
FIXING GENERALLY
• Integrity of supported components: Select types, sizes, quantities and
spacings of fixings, fasteners and packings to retain supported components
without distortion or loss of support.
• Components, substrates, fixings and fasteners of dissimilar metals: Isolate
with washers/ sleeves to avoid bimetallic corrosion.
• Appearance: Fixings to be in straight lines at regular centres.
620
FIXING THROUGH FINISHES
• Penetration of fasteners and plugs into substrate: To achieve a secure fixing.
630
FIXING PACKINGS
• Function: To take up tolerances and prevent distortion of materials and
components.
• Limits: Do not use packings beyond thicknesses recommended by fixings and
fasteners manufacturer.
• Locations: Not within zones to be filled with sealant.
640
FIXING CRAMPS
• Cramp positions: Maximum 150 mm from each end of frame sections and at
600 mm maximum centres.
• Fasteners: Fix cramps to frames with screws of same material as cramps.
• Fixings in masonry work: Fully bed in mortar.
650
NAILED TIMBER FIXING
• Penetration: Drive fully in without splitting or crushing timber.
• Surfaces visible in completed work: Punch nail heads below wrot surfaces.
• Nailed timber joints: Two nails per joint (minimum), opposed skew driven.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z20
FIXINGS AND ADHESIVES
660
SCREW FIXING
• Finished level of countersunk screw heads:
- Exposed: Flush with timber surface.
- Concealed (holes filled or stopped): Sink minimum 2 mm below surface.
670
PELLETED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING
• Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber
surface.
• Pellets: Cut from matching timber, match grain and glue in to full depth of
hole.
• Finished level of pellets: Flush with surface.
700
APPLYING ADHESIVES
• Surfaces: Clean. Adjust regularity and texture to suit bonding and gap filling
characteristics of adhesive.
- Support and clamping during setting: Provide as necessary. Do not mark
surfaces of or distort components being fixed.
• Finished adhesive joints: Fully bonded. Free of surplus adhesive.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z21
MORTARS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS
110
CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MIXES
• Specification: Proportions and additional requirements for mortar materials are
specified elsewhere.
120
SAND FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS
• Standard: To BS EN 13139.
• Grading: 0/2 (FP or MP).
- Fines content where the proportion of sand in a mortar mix is specified as a
range (e.g. 1:1: 5-6): - Lower proportion of sand: Use category 3 fines.
- Higher proportion of sand: Use category 2 fines.
• Sand for facework mortar: Maintain consistent colour and texture. Obtain from
one source.
131
READY-MIXED LIME: SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS
• Standard: To BS 4721 or BS EN 998-2.
• Lime: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.
- Type: CL 90S.
• Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.
135
SITE MADE LIME: SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS
• Permitted use: Where a special colour is not required and in lieu of factory made
ready-mixed material.
• Lime: Nonhydraullc to BS EN 459-1.
- Type: CL 90S.
• Mixing: Thoroughly mix lime with sand, in the dry state. Add water and mix
again. Allow to stand, without drying out, for at least 16 hours before using.
160
CEMENTS FOR MORTARS
• Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.
- Portland slag cement, CEM II/B-S.
- Portland fly ash cement, CEM II/B-V.
- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.
• White cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.
- Type: Portland cement, CEM I.
- Strength class: 52.5.
• Sulfate resisting Portland cement:
- Types: To BS 4027 and Kitemarked.
- To BS EN 197-1 fly ash cement, CEM 11/B-V and CE marked.
- Strength class: 42.5.
• Masonry cement: To BS EN 413-1 and CE marked.
- Class: MC 12.5 (with air entraining agent).
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z21
MORTARS
180
ADMIXTURES FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS
• Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-3 and compatible with
other mortar constituents.
• Other admixtures: Submit proposals.
• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride and any admixture containing calcium
chloride.
190
RETARDED READY TO USE CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS
• Standard: BS EN 998-2.
• Lime for cement:lime:sand mortars: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.
- Type: CL 90S.
• Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.
• Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar
manufacturer.
- Retempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time
limits.
210
MAKING CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS
• Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.
- Mix proportions: Based on dry sand. Allow for bulking of damp sand.
• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency, free from lumps.
- Mortars containing air entraining admixtures: Mix mechanically. Do not
overmix.
• Working time (maximum): Two hours at normal temperatures.
• Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.
LlME:SAND MORTARS
310
LIME: SAND MORTAR MIXES
• Specification: Proportions and additional requirements for mortar materials are
specified elsewhere.
320
SAND FOR LIME: SAND MASONRY MORTARS
• Type: Sharp, well graded.
- Quality, sampling and testing: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading / Source: As specified elsewhere in relevant mortar mix items.
330
READY PREPARED LIME PUTTY
• Type: Slaked directly from CL 90 quicklime to BS EN 459-1, using an excess of
water.
- Maturation: In pits / containers that allow excess water to drain away.
- Density of matured lime putty: 1.3-1.4 kg/litre.
• Maturation period before use (minimum): 30 days.
345
ADMIXTURES FOR HYDRAULIC LIME: SAND MORTARS
• Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-3 and compatible with
other mortar constituents.
• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride and any admixture containing calcium
chloride.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z21
MORTARS
sb360
MAKING LIME: SAND MORTARS GENERALLY
• Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.
• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency, free from lumps.
• Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials, including cement.
370
SITE PREPARED NON HYDRAULIC LIME: SAND MORTARS
• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly by compressing, beating and chopping. Do not
add water.
- Equipment: Roller pan mixer or submit proposals.
• Maturation period before use (maximum): Seven days.
380
READY TO USE NONHYDRAULIC LIME:SAND MORTARS
• Manufacturer: contractor's choice.
- Product reference: contractor's choice.
• Materials: Select from:
- Lime putty slaked directly from quicklime to BS EN 459·1 and mixed
thoroughly with sand.
- Quicklime to BS EN 459-1 slaked directly with sand.
• Maturation period before use (maximum): Seven days.
390
KNOCKING UP NONHYDRAULIC LlME:SAND MORTARS
• Knocking up before and during use: Achieve and maintain a workable
consistency by compressing, beating and chopping. Do not add water.
- Equipment: Roller pan mixer or submit proposals.
400
MAKING HYDRAULIC LIME/ SAND MORTARS
• Mixing hydrated hydraulic lime:sand: Follow the lime manufacturer’s
recommendations for each stage of the mix.
- Water quantity: Only sufficient to produce a workable mix.
• Working time: Within limits recommended by the hydraulic lime manufacturer.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z22
SEALANTS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions
PRODUCTS
110
SEALANTS
• Classification: As specified in the relevant section.
115
JOINTS
• Primer. Backing strip, bond breaker: Types recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
120
SUITABILITY OF JOINTS
• Pre-sealing checks:
- Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant.
- Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable.
• Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification.
130
PREPARING JOINTS
• Surfaces to which sealant must adhere:
- Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material, dust, oil,
grease, surface water and contaminants that may affect bond.
- Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.
- Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing
with primer or sealant.
• Primer, backing strip, bond breaker: Types recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
- Backing strip and / or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint to correct
depth, without stretching or twisting, leaving no gaps.
• Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage until sealant is applied.
160
APPLYING SEALANTS
• Substrate: Dry (unless recommended otherwise) and unaffected by frost, ice or
snow.
• Environmental conditions: Mix and apply primers and sealants within
temperature and humidity ranges recommended by manufacturers. Do not dry
or raise temperature of joints by heating.
• Sealant application: Unless specified otherwise, fill joints completely and neatly,
ensuring firm adhesion to substrates.
• Sealant profiles:
- Butt and lap joints: Slightly concave.
- Fillet joints: Flat or slightly convex.
• Protection: Protect finished joints from contamination or damage until sealant
has cured.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z31
POWDER COATINGS
To be read with Preliminaries / General Conditions.
210
WORKING PROCEDURES
• Requirement: Comply with:
• BS 6496 for aluminium alloy backgrounds.
• BS 6497 for galvanized steel backgrounds.
• British Coatings Federation: Code of safe practice - Application of thermosetting
powder coatings by electrostatic spraying.
• Powder coating manufacturer's guarantee.
220
POWDER COATING APPLICATORS
• Applicator requirements:
- Approved by powder coating manufacturer.
- Currently certified to BS EN ISO 9001.
- Comply with quality procedures, guarantee conditions, standards and tests
required by powder coating manufacturer.
- Each applicator to use only one plant.
- Selected applicator: Submit details before commencement of powder
coating including:
- Name and contact details.
- Details of accreditation schemes.
225
GUARANTEES
• Powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees:
- Submit sample copies before commencement of powder coating.
- Submit signed project specific copies on completion of work.
310
PRETREATMENT
• Condition of components to be powder coated:
• Free from corrosion and damage.
• Free from impurities including soil, grease and oil.
- Suitable for and compatible with the pre-treatment and powder coating
process.
• Process: Clean, conversion coat, condition, rinse in demineralised water, drain
and dry components in accordance with the powder coating manufacturer's
requirements and the pre-treatment supplier's recommendations.
430
EXTENT OF POWDER COATINGS
• Application: To visible component surfaces, and concealed surfaces requiring
protection. Coated surfaces will be deemed 'significant surfaces' for relevant BS
6496 or BS EN 13438 performance requirements.
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z31
POWDER COATINGS
435
APPLICATION OF POWDER COATINGS
• Surfaces to receive powder coatings: Free from dust or powder deposits.
• Completion of powder coatings: Within 48 hours of pre-treatment of
components.
• Jig points: Not visible on coated components.
• Curing: Controlled to attain metal temperatures and hold periods recommended
by powder coating manufacturer.
• Stripping and recoating of components: Only acceptable by prior agreement of
powder coating manufacturer. Stripping, pre-treatment and powder coating are
to be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
• Overcoating of components: Not acceptable.
440
PERFORMANCE AND APPEARANCE OF POWDER COATINGS
• For aluminium components:
- Standard: To BS 6496 or BS EN 12206-1.
• For steel components:
- Standard: To BS EN 13438.
• Visual inspection after powder coating: Significant surface viewing distances to
be specified in the relevant Standard, unless specified otherwise.
• Colour and gloss levels: To conform with approved samples.
450
ALUMINIUM ALLOY FABRICATIONS
• Units may be assembled:
- Before powder coating.
- From components powder coated after cutting to size.
- Where approved, from components powder coated before cutting to size.
• Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.
• Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour
if sealants are visible after fabrication.
460
STEEL FABRICATIONS
• Unit assembly: Wherever practical, before powder coating.
• Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.
• Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour
if sealants are visible after fabrication.
470
FIXINGS
• Exposed metal fixings: Powder coat together with components, or coat with
matching repair paint system applied in accordance with the powder coating
manufacturers recommendations.
480
DAMAGED COMPONENTS – REPAIR / REPLACEMENT
• Inspection: Check all components before delivery to site for damage to powder
coatings. Submit proposals for repair or replacement
Issue: 01
UWE Facilities – Standard B&CE Specification
Z31
POWDER COATINGS
510
PROTECTION
• Powder coated surfaces of components: Protect from damage during handling
and installation, or by subsequent site operations.
• Protective coverings: Must be:
- Resistant to weather conditions.
- Partially removable to suit building in and access to fixing points.
• Protective tapes in contact with powder coatings: Must be:
- Low tack, self adhesive and light in colour.
- Applied and removed in accordance with tape and powder coating
manufacturers' recommendations. Do not use solvents to remove residues
as these are detrimental to the coating.
• Inspection of protection: Carry out monthly. Promptly repair any deterioration or
deficiency.
530
SITE DAMAGE REPAIR / REPLACEMENT
• Damage to powder coatings: Rectify immediately damage caused during
handling and installation, or by subsequent site operations. Submit proposals for
extensive repair or replacement.
535
DOCUMENTATION
• Submit the following information for each batch of powder coated components:
- Supplier.
- Trade name.
- Colour.
- Type of powder.
- Method of application.
- Batch and reference number.
- Statutory requirements.
540
COMPLETION
• Cleaning and maintenance of powder coatings: Carry out in accordance with
procedures detailed in powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees.
Issue: 01
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement